WO2021235271A1 - User Equipment (UE) AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - Google Patents
User Equipment (UE) AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2021235271A1 WO2021235271A1 PCT/JP2021/017856 JP2021017856W WO2021235271A1 WO 2021235271 A1 WO2021235271 A1 WO 2021235271A1 JP 2021017856 W JP2021017856 W JP 2021017856W WO 2021235271 A1 WO2021235271 A1 WO 2021235271A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- pdu session
- network
- procedure
- snpn
- session establishment
- Prior art date
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W76/00—Connection management
- H04W76/20—Manipulation of established connections
- H04W76/27—Transitions between radio resource control [RRC] states
Definitions
- This disclosure relates to UE (User Equipment) and communication control method.
- UE User Equipment
- This application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2020-088865 filed in Japan on May 21, 2020, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- the 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project) has begun studying the system architecture of the next generation, that is, the 5GS (5G System), which is the 5th generation (5G) mobile communication system, and will support new procedures and new functions. Discussions are taking place (see Non-Patent Document 1, Non-Patent Document 2, Non-Patent Document 3, and Non-Patent Document 4).
- optimization and diversification of communication procedures to support continuous mobile communication services for a wide variety of services optimization of communication procedures, and optimization of system architecture according to diversification are also required. It is listed as a condition.
- 3GPP TS 23.501 v16.4.0 (2020-03); Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects; System Architecture for the 5G System; Stage 2 (Release 16) 3GPP TS 23.502 v16.4.0 (2020-03); Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects; Procedures for the 5G System; Stage 2 (Release 16) 3GPP TS 24.501 v16.4.1 (2020-03); Technical Specification Group Core Network and Terminals; Non-Access-Stratum (NAS) protocol for 5G System (5GS); Stage 3 (Release 16) 3GPP TR 23.700-07 v0.3.0 (2020-01); Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects; Study on enhanced support of non-public networks (Release 17)
- 5G Core Network 5G Core Network
- NPN Non-Public Network
- PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
- One aspect of the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is the processing of the control device of the core network and the processing of the UE when the UE is registered in the NPN in 5GS. It is to provide a realization method.
- the UE User Equipment; terminal device
- the UE is based on a transmission / reception unit that receives an indication indicating that an RRC (Radio Resource Control) connection has been suspended from a lower layer, and a transmission / reception unit that receives the indication.
- the control unit is provided with a control unit that transitions to 5GMM-CONNECTED (5G Mobility Management CONNECTED) mode with RRC inactive indication.
- 5GMM-CONNECTED 5G Mobility Management CONNECTED
- PLMN Public land mobile network
- the UE (User Equipment; terminal device) communication control method of one aspect of the present invention includes a step of receiving an indication indicating that an RRC (Radio Resource Control) connection has been suspended from a lower layer, and a step of receiving the indication indicating that the RRC (Radio Resource Control) connection has been suspended.
- RRC Radio Resource Control
- the UE has a step to transition to 5GMM-CONNECTED (5G Mobility Management CONNECTED) mode with RRC inactive indication based on reception, and the UE is registered in the SNPN (Stand-alone Non-Public Network), the UE Is characterized by transitioning from the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to the 5GMM-IDLE (5G Mobility Management IDLE) mode based on the selection of PLMN (Public land mobile network).
- 5GMM-CONNECTED 5G Mobility Management CONNECTED
- RRC inactive indication based on reception
- PLMN Public land mobile network
- 5GS it is possible to realize the control process of the control device in the core network and the control process of the UE when the UE moves between PLMNs and NPNs. Become. Furthermore, in 5GS, it is also possible to realize the control processing of the control device in the core network and the control processing of the UE when moving between the PLMN and the SNPN.
- EPS / 5GS It is a figure explaining the outline of the mobile communication system (EPS / 5GS). It is a figure explaining the detailed structure of the mobile communication system (EPS / 5GS). It is a figure explaining the apparatus configuration of UE. It is a figure explaining the structure of the access network apparatus (gNB) in 5GS. It is a figure explaining the structure of the core network apparatus (AMF / SMF / UPF) in 5GS. It is a figure explaining the procedure of 1st to 4th. It is a figure explaining the registration procedure. It is a figure explaining the PDU session establishment procedure. It is a figure explaining the RRC connection release procedure.
- gNB access network apparatus
- AMF / SMF / UPF the core network apparatus
- FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the mobile communication system 1 used in each embodiment
- FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a detailed configuration of the mobile communication system 1.
- the mobile communication system 1 is composed of UE_A10, access network_A80, core network_A90, PDN (Packet Data Network) _A5, access network _B120, core network _B190, and DN (Data Network) _A6. It is stated that
- these devices / functions may be described by omitting symbols such as UE, access network_A, core network_A, PDN, access network_B, core network_B, DN, etc. ..
- Fig. 2 shows the devices / functions of UE_A10, E-UTRAN80, MME40, SGW35, PGW-U30, PGW-C32, PCRF60, HSS50, 5GAN120, AMF140, UPF130, SMF132, PCF160, UDM150, etc. Interfaces that connect devices and functions to each other are described.
- these devices / functions are referred to as UE, E-UTRAN, MME, SGW, PGW-U, PGW-C, PCRF, HSS, 5GAN, AMF, UPF, SMF, PCF, UDM, etc. May be omitted.
- the EPS Evolved Packet System
- 4G system is configured to include an access network_A and a core network_A, but may further include a UE and / or a PDN.
- 5GS which is a 5G system, is configured to include a UE, an access network_B, and a core network_B, but may further include a DN.
- the UE is a device that can connect to network services via 3GPP access (3GPP access network, also called 3GPPAN) and / or non-3GPP access (non-3GPP access network, also called non-3GPPAN).
- 3GPP access network also called 3GPPAN
- non-3GPP access network also called non-3GPPAN
- the UE may be a terminal device capable of wireless communication such as a mobile phone or a smartphone, and may be a terminal device capable of connecting to EPS or 5GS.
- the UE may be equipped with a UICC (Universal Integrated Circuit Card) or an eUICC (Embedded UICC).
- UICC Universal Integrated Circuit Card
- eUICC embedded UICC
- the UE may be expressed as a user device or a terminal device.
- the access network_A corresponds to E-UTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network) and / or wireless LAN access network.
- E-UTRAN Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
- eNB evolved Node B
- eNB45 may be described by omitting a symbol like eNB. If there are a plurality of eNBs, each eNB is connected to each other by, for example, an X2 interface.
- one or more access points are arranged in the wireless LAN access network.
- access network_B corresponds to 5G access network (5GAN).
- 5GAN is composed of NG-RAN (NG Radio Access Network) and / or non-3GPP access network.
- NG-RAN NG Radio Access Network
- gNB NR Node B
- gNB122 may be described by omitting a symbol like eNB.
- the gNB is a node that provides the NR (New Radio) user plane and the control plane to the UE, and is a node that connects to the 5GCN via an NG interface (including an N2 interface or an N3 interface).
- gNB is a base station device newly designed for 5GS and has a different function from the base station device (eNB) used in EPS, which is a 4G system.
- eNB base station device
- EPS base station device
- each gNB is connected to each other by, for example, an Xn interface.
- E-UTRAN and NG-RAN may be referred to as 3GPP access.
- wireless LAN access network and non-3GPP AN may be referred to as non-3GPP access.
- the nodes arranged in the access network_B may be collectively referred to as NG-RAN nodes.
- the device included in the access network_A and / or the access network_B and / or the access network_A, and / or the device included in the access network_B is the access network or the access network device. May be called.
- core network_A corresponds to EPC (Evolved Packet Core).
- EPC includes, for example, MME (Mobility Management Entity), SGW (Serving Gateway), PGW (Packet Data Network Gateway) -U, PGW-C, PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function), HSS (Home Subscriber Server), etc. Be placed.
- MME Mobility Management Entity
- SGW Serving Gateway
- PGW Packet Data Network Gateway
- PGW-C Packet Data Network Gateway
- PCRF Policy and Charging Rules Function
- HSS Home Subscriber Server
- core network_B corresponds to 5GCN (5G Core Network).
- 5GCN 5G Core Network
- AMF Access and Mobility Management Function
- UPF User Plane Function
- SMF Session Management Function
- PCF Policy Control Function
- UDM Unified Data Management
- 5GCN may be expressed as 5GC.
- the core network_A and / or the core network_B, the device included in the core network_A, and / or the device included in the core network_B are referred to as a core network or a core network device. There is.
- the core network is a mobile network operator (Mobile) that connects the access network (access network_A and / or access network_B) with the PDN and / or DN. It may be an IP mobile communication network operated by Network Operator; MNO), it may be a core network for a mobile communication operator that operates and manages mobile communication system 1, or it may be an MVNO (Mobile Virtual Network Operator). ), MVNE (Mobile Virtual Network Enabler), etc. may be a core network for virtual mobile communication operators and virtual mobile communication service providers.
- MNO IP mobile communication network operated by Network Operator
- MNO Mobile Virtual Network Operator
- MVNE Mobile Virtual Network Enabler
- the PDN may be a DN (Data Network) that provides a communication service to the UE.
- the DN may be configured as a packet data service network or may be configured for each service.
- the PDN may include a connected communication terminal. Therefore, connecting to the PDN may be connecting to a communication terminal or server device arranged in the PDN. Further, sending and receiving user data to and from the PDN may be sending and receiving user data to and from a communication terminal or server device arranged in the PDN.
- PDN may be expressed as DN
- DN may be expressed as PDN.
- access network_A, core network_A, PDN, access network_B, core network_B, at least a part of DN, and / or one or more devices included in these are referred to as a network or network device. May be called. That is, the fact that the network and / or the network device sends and receives messages and / or executes the procedure means that the access network_A, core network_A, PDN, access network_B, core network_B, and DN are used. It means that at least a part and / or one or more devices contained therein send / receive messages and / or perform procedures.
- the UE can connect to the access network.
- the UE can also connect to the core network via the access network.
- the UE can connect to the PDN or DN via the access network and core network. That is, the UE can send / receive (communicate) user data with the PDN or DN.
- IP Internet Protocol
- non-IP communication may be used.
- IP communication is data communication using IP, and data is transmitted and received by IP packets.
- An IP packet is composed of an IP header and a payload part.
- the payload section may include devices / functions included in EPS and data transmitted / received by devices / functions included in 5GS.
- non-IP communication is data communication that does not use IP, and data is transmitted and received in a format different from the structure of IP packets.
- non-IP communication may be data communication realized by sending and receiving application data to which an IP header is not added, or a UE may add another header such as a Mac header or an Ethernet (registered trademark) frame header. User data to be sent and received may be sent and received.
- each device may be configured as physical hardware, may be configured as logical (virtual) hardware configured on general-purpose hardware, or may be configured as software. May be done. Further, at least a part (including all) of the functions of each device may be configured as physical hardware, logical hardware, or software.
- each storage unit in each device / function appearing below may be, for example, a semiconductor memory or SSD (semiconductor memory unit). It consists of Solid State Drive), HDD (Hard Disk Drive), etc.
- each storage unit has not only the information originally set from the shipping stage, but also devices / functions other than its own device / function (for example, UE and / or access network device, and / or core network device, and /. Or, various information transmitted / received to / from PDN and / or DN) can be stored.
- each storage unit can store identification information, control information, flags, parameters, and the like included in control messages transmitted and received in various communication procedures described later. Further, each storage unit may store such information for each UE. In addition, each storage unit may store control messages and user data sent and received between 5GS and / or devices / functions included in EPS when interwork is performed between 5GS and EPS. can. At this time, not only those transmitted / received via the N26 interface but also those transmitted / received without the N26 interface can be stored.
- the UE is composed of a control unit_A300, an antenna 310, a transmission / reception unit_A320, and a storage unit_A340.
- the control unit_A300, the transmission / reception unit_A320, and the storage unit_A340 are connected via a bus.
- the transmitter / receiver_A320 is connected to the antenna 310.
- Control unit_A300 is a functional unit that controls the operation and functions of the entire UE.
- the control unit_A300 realizes various processes in the UE by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_A340 as needed.
- the transmission / reception unit_A320 is a functional unit for wireless communication with the base station device (eNB or gNB) in the access network via the antenna. That is, the UE may send / receive user data and / or control information to / from the access network device and / or the core network device and / or the PDN and / or DN by using the transmission / reception unit_A320. can.
- the base station device eNB or gNB
- the UE can communicate with the base station device (eNB) in the E-UTRAN via the LTE-Uu interface by using the transmission / reception unit_A320.
- the UE can communicate with the base station device (gNB) in the 5GAN by using the transmission / reception unit_A320.
- the UE can send and receive NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) messages to and from the AMF via the N1 interface by using the transmitter / receiver _A320.
- NAS Non-Access-Stratum
- the storage unit_A340 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of the UE.
- the gNB is composed of a control unit_B500, an antenna 510, a network connection unit_B520, a transmission / reception unit_B530, and a storage unit_B540.
- the control unit_B500, network connection unit_B520, transmission / reception unit_B530, and storage unit_B540 are connected via a bus.
- the transmitter / receiver_B530 is connected to the antenna 510.
- Control unit_B500 is a functional unit that controls the operation and function of the entire gNB.
- the control unit_B500 realizes various processes in gNB by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_B540 as needed.
- the network connection part_B520 is a functional part for gNB to communicate with AMF and / or UPF. That is, the gNB can send and receive user data and / or control information to and from the AMF and / or the UPF using the network connection unit_B520.
- the transmission / reception unit_B530 is a functional unit for wireless communication with the UE via the antenna 510. That is, the gNB can transmit / receive user data and / or control information to / from the UE by using the transmission / reception unit_B530.
- gNB in 5GAN can communicate with AMF via the N2 interface by using the network connection part_B520, and UPF via the N3 interface. Can communicate with. Further, the gNB can communicate with the UE by using the transmission / reception unit_B530.
- the storage unit_B540 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of gNB.
- the AMF consists of a control unit_B700, a network connection unit_B720, and a storage unit_B740.
- the control unit_B700, network connection unit_B720, and storage unit_B740 are connected via a bus.
- the AMF may be a node that handles the control plane.
- Control unit_B700 is a functional unit that controls the operation and functions of the entire AMF.
- the control unit_B700 realizes various processes in AMF by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_B740 as needed.
- the network connection unit_B720 is a functional unit for AMF to connect to the base station equipment (gNB) in 5GAN and / or SMF, and / or PCF, and / or UDM, and / or SCEF. That is, the AMF uses the network connection _B720 to the user between the base station equipment (gNB) in 5GAN and / or the SMF and / or the PCF, and / or the UDM, and / or the SCEF. Data and / or control information can be sent and received.
- the AMF within the 5GCN can communicate with the gNB via the N2 interface by using the network connection _A620 and with the UDM via the N8 interface. It can communicate, it can communicate with the SMF via the N11 interface, and it can communicate with the PCF via the N15 interface.
- AMF can send and receive NAS messages to and from the UE via the N1 interface by using the network connection unit_A620.
- the N1 interface is logical, communication between the UE and AMF is actually done via 5GAN.
- the AMF supports the N26 interface, it can communicate with the MME via the N26 interface by using the network connection unit_A620.
- the storage unit_B740 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of AMF.
- AMF has a function to exchange control messages with RAN using N2 interface, a function to exchange NAS messages with UE using N1 interface, a function to encrypt and protect the integrity of NAS messages, and registration management.
- the RM status for each UE is managed.
- the RM state may be synchronized between the UE and AMF.
- the RM state includes a non-registered state (RM-DEREGISTERED state) and a registered state (RM-REGISTERED state).
- RM-DEREGISTERED state the UE is not registered in the network, and the UE context in the AMF does not have valid location information or routing information for the UE, so the AMF cannot reach the UE.
- the RM-REGISTERED state the UE is registered in the network, so the UE can receive services that require registration with the network.
- the RM state may be expressed as a 5GMM state.
- the RM-DEREGISTERED state may be expressed as the 5GMM-DEREGISTERED state
- the RM-REGISTERED state may be expressed as the 5GMM-REGISTERED state.
- 5GMM-REGISTERED may be in a state where each device has established a 5GMM context or a state in which a PDU session context has been established.
- UE_A10 may start sending and receiving user data and control messages, or may respond to paging. Further, when each device is 5GMM-REGISTERED, UE_A10 may execute a registration procedure other than the registration procedure for initial registration and / or a service request procedure.
- each device may be in a state where the 5GMM context has not been established, the position information of UE_A10 may not be known to the network, or the network reaches UE_A10. It may be in an impossible state. If each device is 5GMM-DEREGISTERED, UE_A10 may start the registration procedure or establish the 5GMM context by executing the registration procedure.
- the CM status for each UE is managed.
- the CM state may be synchronized between the UE and AMF.
- the CM state includes a non-connected state (CM-IDLE state) and a connected state (CM-CONNECTED state).
- CM-IDLE state the UE is in the RM-REGISTERED state, but does not have a NAS signaling connection established with the AMF via the N1 interface.
- the CM-IDLE state the UE does not have an N2 interface connection (N2 connection) or an N3 interface connection (N3 connection).
- N2 connection N2 interface connection
- N3 connection N3 interface connection
- the CM-CONNECTED state it has a NAS signaling connection established with AMF via the N1 interface.
- the CM-CONNECTED state the UE may have an N2 interface connection (N2 connection) and / or an N3 interface connection (N3 connection).
- the CM state in 3GPP access and the CM state in non-3GPP access may be managed separately.
- the CM state in 3GPP access may be a non-connected state in 3GPP access (CM-IDLE state over 3GPP access) and a connected state in 3GPP access (CM-CONNECTED state over 3GPP access).
- the CM state in non-3GPP access includes the non-connected state (CM-IDLE state over non-3GPP access) in non-3GPP access and the connection state (CM-CONNECTED state over non-3GPP access) in non-3GPP access. ) And so on.
- the disconnected state may be expressed as an idle mode
- the connected state mode may be expressed as a connected mode.
- the CM state may be expressed as 5GMM mode (5GMM mode).
- the non-connected state may be expressed as 5GMM non-connected mode (5GMM-IDLE mode)
- the connected state may be expressed as 5GMM connected mode (5GMM-CONNECTED mode).
- the non-connected state in 3GPP access may be expressed as 5GMM non-connected mode (5GMM-IDLE mode over 3GPP access) in 3GPP access
- the connected state in 3GPP access may be expressed as 5GMM connection mode (5GMM-) in 3GPP access. It may be expressed as CONNECTED mode over 3GPP access).
- non-connected state in non-3GPP access may be expressed as 5GMM non-connected mode (5GMM-IDLE mode over non-3GPP access) in non-3GPP access, and the connected state in non-3GPP access is non.
- -3GPP access may be expressed as 5GMM connection mode (5GMM-CONNECTED mode over non-3GPP access).
- the 5GMM non-connection mode may be expressed as an idle mode, and the 5GMM connection mode may be expressed as a connected mode.
- AMF may be placed in the core network_B.
- AMF may be an NF that manages one or more NSIs (Network Slice Instances).
- the AMF may be a shared CP function (CCNF; Common CPNF (Control Plane Network Function)) shared among a plurality of NSIs.
- CCNF Common CPNF (Control Plane Network Function)
- N3IWF is a device and / or function that is placed between non-3GPP access and 5GCN when the UE connects to 5GS via non-3GPP access.
- the SMF consists of a control unit_B700, a network connection unit_B720, and a storage unit_B740.
- the control unit_B700, network connection unit_B720, and storage unit_B740 are connected via a bus.
- the SMF may be a node that handles the control plane.
- Control unit_B700 is a functional unit that controls the operation and functions of the entire SMF.
- the control unit_B700 realizes various processes in the SMF by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_B740 as needed.
- the network connection part_B720 is a functional part for SMF to connect with AMF and / or UPF, and / or PCF, and / or UDM. That is, the SMF can send and receive user data and / or control information between the AMF and / or the UPF, and / or the PCF, and / or the UDM by using the network connection unit_B720.
- the SMF within the 5GCN can communicate with the AMF via the N11 interface by using the network connection _A620 and with the UPF via the N4 interface. It can communicate, it can communicate with the PCF via the N7 interface, and it can communicate with the UDM via the N10 interface.
- the storage unit_B740 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of SMF.
- SMF has session management functions such as establishment / modification / release of PDU sessions, IP address allocation and management functions for UEs, UPF selection and control functions, and appropriate destinations (destination).
- UPF setting function for routing traffic function for sending and receiving the SM part of NAS message, function for notifying that downlink data has arrived (Downlink Data Notification), AN via N2 interface via AMF It has a function to provide SM information peculiar to AN (for each AN) sent to, a function to determine the SSC mode (Session and Service Continuity mode) for the session, a roaming function, and the like.
- the UPF consists of a control unit_B700, a network connection unit_B720, and a storage unit_B740.
- the control unit_B700, network connection unit_B720, and storage unit_B740 are connected via a bus.
- the UPF may be a node that handles the control plane.
- Control unit_B700 is a functional unit that controls the operation and functions of the entire UPF.
- the control unit_B700 realizes various processes in the UPF by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_B740 as needed.
- the network connection unit_B720 is a functional unit for the UPF to connect to the base station device (gNB) and / or SMF and / or DN in 5GAN. That is, the UPF uses the network connection _B720 to send and receive user data and / or control information between the base station equipment (gNB) in 5GAN and / or the SMF and / or the DN. Can be done.
- the UPF within the 5GCN can communicate with the gNB via the N3 interface by using the network connection _A620 and with the SMF via the N4 interface. It can communicate, it can communicate with the DN via the N6 interface, and it can communicate with other UPFs via the N9 interface.
- the storage unit_B740 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of UPF.
- the UPF acts as an anchor point for intra-RAT mobility or inter-RAT mobility, as an external PDU session point for interconnecting the DN (ie, as a gateway between the DN and the core network_B).
- Data forwarding function ), packet routing and forwarding function, ULCL (Uplink Classifier) function that supports routing of multiple traffic flows to one DN, and multi-homed PDU session support.
- It has a branching point function, a QoS (Quality of Service) processing function for userplane, a function for verifying uplink traffic, a function for buffering downlink packets, and a function for triggering downlink data notification (Downlink Data Notification).
- QoS Quality of Service
- the UPF may also be a gateway for IP communication and / or non-IP communication.
- the UPF may have a function of transferring IP communication, or may have a function of converting non-IP communication and IP communication.
- the multiple gateways may be a gateway connecting the core network_B and a single DN.
- the UPF may have connectivity with other NFs, or may be connected to each device via the other NFs.
- the user plane is user data transmitted and received between the UE and the network.
- the user plane may be transmitted and received using a PDN connection or a PDU session.
- the user plane may be transmitted and received using the LTE-Uu interface and / or the S1-U interface and / or the S5 interface and / or the S8 interface and / or the SGi interface.
- the user plane may be transmitted and received via the interface between the UE and NG RAN and / or the N3 interface and / or the N9 interface and / or the N6 interface.
- the user plane may be expressed as a U-Plane.
- control plane is a control message sent and received to control the communication of the UE.
- the control plane may be transmitted and received using a NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) signaling connection between the UE and the MME.
- NAS Non-Access-Stratum
- the control plane may be transmitted and received using the LTE-Uu interface and the S1-MME interface.
- the control plane may be transmitted / received using the interface between the UE and NG RAN and the N2 interface.
- the control plane may be expressed as a control plane or a C-Plane.
- the U-Plane (User Plane; UP) may be a communication path for transmitting and receiving user data, and may be composed of a plurality of bearers.
- the C-Plane (Control Plane; CP) may be a communication path for transmitting and receiving control messages, and may be composed of a plurality of bearers.
- PCF has a function to provide policy rules.
- UDM has an authentication information processing function, a user identification processing function, an access authentication function, a registration / mobility management function, a subscriber information management function, and the like.
- PCRF is connected to PGW and / or PDN, and has a function of performing QoS management for data delivery. For example, it manages the QoS of the communication path between UE_A10 and PDN.
- the PCRF may be a device for creating and / or managing PCC (Policy and Charging Control) rules and / or routing rules used by each device when transmitting and receiving user data.
- PCC Policy and Charging Control
- HSS is connected to MME and / or SCEF, and has a function to manage subscriber information.
- HSS subscriber information is referred to, for example, when controlling access to MME.
- the HSS may be connected to a location management device different from the MME.
- SCEF is connected to DN and / or PDN, MME and HSS, and has a function as a relay device that transfers user data as a gateway connecting DN and / or PDN and core network_A. .. SCEF may be a gateway for non-IP communication. Furthermore, SCEF may have a function of converting non-IP communication and IP communication. Also, multiple such gateways may be located in the core network_A. The SCEF may be configured outside or inside the core network.
- the network refers to at least a part of the access network_B, core network_B, and DN. Further, one or more devices included in at least a part of the access network_B, the core network_B, and the DN may be referred to as a network or a network device. That is, the fact that the network performs transmission / reception and / or processing of messages may mean that devices (network devices and / or control devices) in the network execute message transmission / reception and / or processing. .. Conversely, the fact that a device in the network performs transmission / reception and / or processing of a message may mean that the network executes transmission / reception and / or processing of a message.
- the network may refer to PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network) or NPN, which will be described later. Further, when it is expressed that the UE makes a network selection, it may indicate that the UE makes a PLMN selection, or it may indicate that the UE makes an SNPN selection.
- PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
- NPN Network Public Network
- the registered PLMN (registered PLMN) is the PLMN in which the UE is registered.
- Equivalent PLMN is a PLMN that is treated as if it were the same PLMN as any PLMN in the network.
- an equal PLMN may be one or more PLMNs treated the same as a registered PLMN.
- the SM (session management) message (also referred to as NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) SM message) may be a NAS message used in the procedure for SM, and is sent and received between UE_A10 and SMF_A230 via AMF_A240. It may be a control message to be performed.
- SM messages include PDU session establishment request messages, PDU session establishment acceptance messages, PDU session completion messages, PDU session rejection messages, PDU session change request messages, PDU session change acceptance messages, PDU session change response messages, and the like. You may.
- the procedure for SM may also include a PDU session establishment procedure.
- the 5GS (5G System) service may be a connection service provided using the core network_B190. Further, the 5GS service may be a service different from the EPS service or a service similar to the EPS service.
- non5GS service may be a service other than the 5GS service, and may include an EPS service and / or a non-EPS service.
- the single registration mode is a mode in which UE_A10 maintains a common registration state for the 5GMM state and EMM state when N1 mode and S1 mode are available.
- the dual registration mode is a mode in which UE_A10 maintains the registered state independently of the 5GMM state and the EMM state when the N1 mode and the S1 mode are available.
- UE_A10 may be registered in the network only in N1 mode (that is, registered only in 5GC), or may be registered in the network only in S1 mode (registered only in EPC). Alternatively, it may be registered in the network (registered in both 5GC and EPC) in both N1 mode and S1 mode.
- UEs that support both 5GC and EPC NAS can operate in single registration mode or dual registration mode.
- S1 mode is a mode that allows UE_A10 to access EPC via E-UTRAN.
- the S1 mode may be a mode in which messages are sent and received using the S1 interface.
- the S1 interface may be composed of an S1-MME interface and an S1-U interface.
- N1 mode is a mode that allows UE_A10 to access 5GC via a 5G access network.
- the N1 mode may be a mode in which messages are sent and received using the N1 interface.
- APN Access Point Name
- PDN public network address
- APN Access Point Name
- PGW_A30 / UPF_A235 may be used as information for selecting a gateway such as PGW_A30 / UPF_A235 to connect the core network A_90.
- the PDN (Packet Data Network) type indicates the type of PDN connection, and includes IPv4, IPv6, IPv4v6, and non-IP.
- IPv4 When IPv4 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv4.
- IPv6 When IPv6 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv6.
- IPv4v6 When IPv6 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv4 or IPv6.
- non-IP it indicates that communication is performed by a communication method other than IP, not communication using IP.
- a PDU (Protocol Data Unit / Packet Data Unit) session can be defined as a relationship between a DN that provides a PDU connectivity service and a UE, but it is established between the UE and an external gateway. It may be connectivity.
- the UE can send and receive user data to and from the DN using the PDU session.
- the external gateway may be UPF, SCEF, or the like.
- the UE can use the PDU session to send and receive user data to and from devices such as application servers located on the DN.
- each device may manage one or more identification information in association with each PDU session.
- these identification information may include one or more of DNN, QoS rule, PDU session type, application identification information, NSI identification information, access network identification information, and SSC mode, and other information. It may be further included. Further, when a plurality of PDU sessions are established, the identification information associated with the PDU session may have the same content or different contents.
- DNN Data Network Name
- DNN may be identification information that identifies the core network and / or the external network such as DN.
- DNN can also be used as information for selecting a gateway such as PGW_A30 / UPF_A235 to connect the core network B190.
- the DNN may correspond to an APN (Access Point Name).
- the PDU (Protocol Data Unit / Packet Data Unit) session type indicates the type of PDU session, and includes IPv4, IPv6, Ethernet, and Unstructured.
- IPv4 When IPv4 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv4.
- IPv6 When IPv6 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv6. If Ethernet is specified, it indicates that Ethernet frames will be sent and received. Further, Ethernet may indicate that communication using IP is not performed.
- Unstructured it indicates that data is sent / received to the application server etc. in the DN by using the point-to-point (P2P) tunneling technology.
- P2P point-to-point
- the PDU session type may include an IP in addition to the above. IP can be specified if the UE can use both IPv4 and IPv6.
- a network slice is a logical network that provides specific network capabilities and network characteristics.
- UEs and / or networks can support network slices (NW slices; NS) in 5GS.
- a network slice instance is composed of an instance (entity) of a network function (NF) and a set of necessary resources, and forms a network slice to be arranged.
- NF is a processing function in the network and is adopted or defined in 3GPP.
- NSI is an entity of NS composed of one or more in core network_B.
- NSI may be configured by a virtual NF (Network Function) generated by using NST (Network Slice Template).
- NST Network Slice Template
- NST Network Slice Template
- the NSI may be an aggregate in the core network_B190 composed of a plurality of NFs.
- NSI may be a logical network configured to separate user data delivered by services and the like.
- One or more NFs may be configured in NS.
- the NF configured in the NS may or may not be a device shared with other NSs.
- UE and / or devices in the network are 1 or more based on NSSAI and / or S-NSSAI and / or UE usage type and / or registration information such as 1 or more NSI IDs and / or APN. Can be assigned to NS.
- the UE usage type is a parameter value included in the UE registration information used to identify the NSI.
- the UE usage type may be stored in the HSS.
- AMF may select SMF and UPF based on UE usage type.
- S-NSSAI Single Network Slice Selection Assistance Information
- S-NSSAI may be composed of only SST (Slice / Service type) or may be composed of both SST and SD (Slice Differentiator).
- SST is information indicating the operation of NS expected in terms of functions and services.
- the SD may be information that interpolates the SST when selecting one NSI from a plurality of NSIs represented by the SST.
- the S-NSSAI may be information peculiar to each PLMN, or may be standard information shared among PLMNs.
- the network may store one or more S-NSSAI in the registration information of the UE as the default S-NSSAI. If the S-NSSAI is the default S-NSSAI and the UE does not send a valid S-NSSAI to the network in the registration request message, the network may provide the NS related to the UE.
- NSSAI Network Slice Selection Assistance Information
- S-NSSAI Network Slice Selection Assistance Information
- the UE may memorize the NSSAI permitted by the network for each PLMN. Also, NSSAI may be the information used to select AMF.
- SSC Session and Service Continuity
- SSC Session and Service Continuity
- SSC Session and Service Continuity
- SSC mode indicates the mode of session service continuity (Session and Service Continuity) supported by the system and / or each device in the 5G system (5GS). More specifically, it may be a mode indicating the types of session service continuation supported by the PDU session established between UE_A10 and UPF.
- the SSC mode may be a mode indicating the type of session service continuation set for each PDU session. Further, the SSC mode may be composed of three modes, SSC mode 1, SSC mode 2, and SSC mode 3.
- the SSC mode associated with the PDU session does not have to be changed for the life of the PDU session.
- the RRC (Radio Resource Control) connection is a connection established between the UE and the base station device in the access network. More specifically, an RRC connection is a connection established at a Uu reference point between a UE and a base station device in an access network.
- the RRC connection may be configured with a wireless bearer.
- the RRC connection may be a connection established in 3GPP access.
- the RRC connection may be a connection established in the RRC layer below the NAS layer.
- the RRC connection may be a connection established and / or released by sending and receiving an RRC message of the RRC layer.
- the RRC connection may be a connection that is suspended by sending and receiving RRC messages of the RRC layer.
- 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication is a state indicating that the state of the NAS layer is a connected state even though the RRC layer is inactive.
- the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication may be in a state where the radio bearer is released while maintaining the context of the NAS signaling connection and / or the NAS signaling connection.
- 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication may be in a state where the RRC connection is suspended. More specifically, in 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication, the NAS layer state is the connected state, but the RRC connection may be suspended. In other words, the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication may be in a suspended state of the RRC connection while maintaining the context of the NAS signaling connection and / or the NAS signaling connection.
- the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication from the lower layer based on the reception of information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended. Furthermore, the UE transitions only the state for 3GPP access from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication from the lower layer based on the reception of information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended. May be good.
- the information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended may be an indication indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended.
- support for 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication means that the state of the NAS layer can be maintained in the connected state even when a notification indicating that the RRC layer has been disabled is received from the lower layer. It may mean that it is supported.
- use of 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication means that the state of the NAS layer is maintained in the connected state even when the notification indicating that the RRC layer has been disabled is received from the lower layer. It may mean.
- PDU session with suspended user-plane resources is a PDU session in which user plane resources are established or re-established and the wireless bearer is suspended.
- the timing at which the wireless bearer is suspended may be the timing at which the UE transitions to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication.
- the radio bearer may be a data radio bearer.
- the tracking area is a single or multiple range that can be represented by the location information of UE_A10 managed by the core network.
- the tracking area may be composed of a plurality of cells. Further, the tracking area may be a range in which a control message such as paging is broadcast, or a range in which UE_A10 can move without performing a handover procedure. Further, the tracking area may be a routing area, a location area, or the same as these. Hereinafter, the tracking area may be TA (Tracking Area).
- the TA list is a list that includes one or more TAs assigned to UE_A10 by the network.
- UE_A10 may be able to move without executing the tracking area update procedure while moving within one or more TAs included in the TA list.
- the UE_A10 may be a group of information indicating an area in which the TA list can be moved without performing the tracking area update procedure.
- the TA list may be expressed as a TAI list composed of one or more TAI (Tracking area identity), and hereinafter, the TAI list may refer to the TA list.
- LADN Local Area Data Network
- the LADN may be a DN that can be connected at a particular location by using a PDU session associated with a particular DNN. Further, the LADN may be a DN that can be connected at a specific location by using a PDU session associated with a specific combination of a specific DNN and a specific S-NSSAI.
- LADN information is information related to LADN.
- the LADN information may be information indicating a specific LADN available to the UE.
- the LADN information may include LADN DNN and LADN service area information. More specifically, the LADN information may include one or more pieces of information existing for each LADN (hereinafter, referred to as information indicating LADN). Further, the information indicating LADN may include LADN DNN and LADN service area information.
- the LADN DNN may be information that identifies the LADN, may be information that identifies the DN that is treated as the LADN, or may be a DNN that is used when establishing a PDU session for the LADN. ..
- the LADN information may be the information having the configuration described above.
- the LADN service area may be the conventional LADN service area.
- the LADN information when the LADN information is the extended LADN information, the LADN information may be the information in which a part of the configuration described above is extended. Specifically, if the LADN information is extended LADN information, the LADN service area may be the extended LADN service area. Further, when the LADN information is extended LADN information, the information indicating LADN may further include information indicating the period during which the LADN service area is valid and / or information indicating the particle size of the LADN service area. Further, if the LADN information is extended LADN information, the information indicating LADN may further include S-NSSAI.
- the LADN service area is an area where a PDU session can be established for LADN.
- the LADN service area may be an area where connection to LADN is possible.
- the LADN service area may be an area indicated by the LADN service area information.
- the LADN service area information may be information that identifies the LADN service area, and may be provided as a set of tracking areas or as a TAI (Tracking area identity) list.
- the LADN service area may be an area composed of tracking areas that belong to the registration area to which the UE is currently connected. In other words, if the LADN service area is a conventional LADN service area, the LADN service area may be an area composed of one or more tracking areas. Conversely, when the LADN service area is an extended LADN service area, the LADN service area may be an area composed of the tracking area, or may be covered by some base stations in the tracking area. Area may be. Further, when the LADN service area is an extended LADN service area, the LADN service area may be an area having a size other than the area configured by the tracking area, or may be an area independent of the tracking area. May be good. In other words, if the LADN service area is an extended LADN service area, the LADN service area may be an area composed of one or more tracking areas, or may be composed of one or more tracking areas. It may be an area different from the area.
- the LADN service area information may be a tracking area ID list composed of one or more tracking area IDs.
- the LADN service area information may be information that requires assistance from RAN (Radio Access Network).
- Information that does not require RAN assistance may be used.
- the information that requires RAN assistance may be cell information or base station information.
- the information that requires RAN assistance may be a cell ID or a base station ID.
- the information that requires RAN assistance is not limited to these, and may be information defined by RAN.
- the information that does not require RAN assistance may be physical location information or location information that can be acquired by the application.
- the information that does not require RAN assistance is not limited to these, and may be information that can be acquired other than RAN.
- RAN may be expressed as an access network.
- the access network may be referred to as RAN.
- Expansion of the LADN service area may mean using a LADN service area having a particle size different from that of the conventional LADN service area. Further, the expansion of the LADN service area may mean using the expanded LADN information different from the conventional LADN information. Further, the extension of the LADN service area may mean connecting to the extended LADN, which is different from the conventional LADN.
- the expanded LADN service area which is different from the conventional LADN service area, may be applicable in addition to the conventional LADN service area. Further, if each device supports the expansion of the LADN service area, the expanded LADN information different from the conventional LADN information may be available in addition to the conventional LADN information. Further, if each device supports the expansion of the LADN service area, it may be possible to connect to the extended LADN different from the conventional LADN in addition to the conventional LADN.
- the expanded LADN service area may not be adaptable and only the conventional LADN service area may be adaptable. Further, if some of the devices do not support the expansion of the LADN service area, the expanded LADN information may not be available and only the traditional LADN information may be available. Further, if some of the devices do not support the expansion of the LADN service area, it may not be possible to connect to the expanded LADN, but only to the conventional LADN.
- the extended LADN service area may not be applicable, and only the conventional LADN service area may be applicable. Further, if each device supports the use restriction of the extended LADN service area, the extended LADN information may not be available and only the conventional LADN information may be available. Further, if each device supports the extended usage restrictions of the LADN service area, it may not be possible to connect to the extended LADN, but only to the conventional LADN.
- the extended LADN service area may also be adaptable. Further, if each device does not support the use restrictions of the extended LADN service area, the extended LADN information may also be available. In addition, if each device does not support the extended usage restrictions of the LADN service area, it may be possible to connect to the extended LADN.
- a PDU session for LADN is a PDU session associated with a DNN associated with LADN.
- the PDU session for LADN may be a PDU session established for LADN. In other words, it may be a PDU session established between the UE and LADN, or it may be a PDU session used for user data communication between the UE and LADN.
- the PDU session for LADN may be a PDU session that can be established only in the LADN service area.
- the UE may be able to establish a PDU session for LADN by using a particular DNN at a particular location.
- the UE may be able to establish a PDU session for LADN at a particular location by using a particular combination of a particular DNN and a particular S-NSSAI.
- Non-Public Network is a private network that is used by specific users for specific purposes, such as private use such as companies, not for general use.
- NPN Non-Public Network
- the SNPN is a network operated by the NPN operator and not affected by the functional parts provided by PLMN.
- the SNPN is an NPN-only network independent of the publicly available PLMN.
- the SNPN may be a network identified by the SNPN identity (SNPN ID).
- the SNPN ID may be information that is a combination of the PLMN ID and the Network identifier (NID).
- the PLMN ID used for the SNPN ID may be information reserved for the private network, and for example, the MCC included in the PLMN ID may be 999.
- the registered SNPN may be referred to as a registered SNPN or RSNPN (registered SNPN).
- NID Network identifier
- the SNPN may be identified by a combination of PLMN ID and NID information.
- the NID may be unique information within the SNPN or may be globally unique information.
- Public network integrated NPN is a network realized by using the functional parts of PLMN.
- the Public network integrated NPN is an NPN that is virtually realized within the PLMN.
- Public network integrated NPN is an NPN that can be created via PLMN.
- the Public network integrated NPN may be realized by using the function of the network slice.
- the Public network integrated NPN may be a feasible network by using the network slice assigned for the NPN.
- the Public network integrated NPN may be identified by S-NSSAI or by a combination of S-NSSAI and CAG ID.
- Public network integrated NPN may be realized by using DN.
- the Public network integrated NPN may be a feasible network by using a DN for the NPN.
- the Public network integrated NPN may be identified by the DNN or by the combination of the DNN and the CAG ID.
- CAG (Closed Access Groups) ID is information that identifies a group of subscribers who are allowed to connect to one or more cells associated with CAG.
- the CAG may be a group identified by the CAG ID.
- CAG is a group used to realize Public network integrated NPN in network slices.
- the CAG may be used to prevent attempts to access network slices assigned for NPNs from UEs that do not allow NPNs.
- the CAG ID is unique information within the PLMN.
- a UE with SNPN enabled is a UE for which the use of SNPN is set.
- An SNPN-enabled UE may store at least one piece of information about the SNPN.
- the setting information of the UE in which the SNPN is valid may include information indicating that the SNPN can be used.
- SNPN-enabled UEs may support SNPN access modes. In other words, a UE with SNPN enabled may operate in SNPN access mode.
- SNPN access mode is the mode in which SNPN is selected.
- the SNPN access mode may be a mode in which the UE is registered in the SNPN.
- the SNPN access mode may be a mode in which the UE is connected to the SNPN.
- a UE operating in SNPN access mode may select only SNPN when selecting a network.
- a UE operating in SNPN access mode may select only SNPN via the Uu interface when selecting a network.
- a UE operating in SNPN access mode may select SNPN instead of PLMN when selecting a network.
- a UE operating in the SNPN access mode may be expressed as a UE in the SNPN access mode.
- the UE in the SNPN access mode may be a UE in which the SNPN is valid.
- Equivalent PLMN may be an SNPN that is treated as if it were the same SNPN as any SNPN.
- an equal SNPN may be one or more SNPNs that are treated the same as a registered SNPN.
- the equal SNPN may be a PLMN that is treated as if it were the same SNPN as any SNPN.
- the equal SNPN may be one or more PLMNs treated the same as the registered SNPN.
- the equal SNPN may be one or more SNPNs identified by the same PLMN ID as any SNPN, or may be a PLMN.
- the equal SNPN may be one or more SNPNs identified by the same PLMN ID as the registered SNPN, or it may be a PLMN.
- the equal SNPN may be a PLMN identified by the same PLMN ID as the registered SNPN, and an equal PLMN of the PLMN.
- the first identification information is information indicating the suspension of the RRC connection.
- the first identification information may be a suspend setting information element. Further, the first identification information may be a suspend indication. Further, the first identification information may be identification information indicating that the RRC connection is suspended. Further, the first identification information may be identification information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended.
- the first identification information may be information for transitioning the state of the RRC connection to the RRC_INACTIVE state.
- the first identification information may be information indicating that the RRC layer transitions to the disabled state.
- the first identification information is based on the identification information received by the network and / or the capability information of the network and / or the operator policy and / or the state of the network and / or the registration information of the user. It may be information to be selected and determined. Further, the first identification information may be information selected and determined based on other identification information selected by the network in this procedure.
- the eleventh identification information is information indicating the PDU session type.
- the eleventh identification information may be information indicating the PDU session type requested by the UE. More specifically, the eleventh identification information may be information indicating the PDU session type requested by the UE and associated with the PDU session established in this procedure. Further, the eleventh identification information may be information selected and determined based on the setting of the UE and / or the state of the UE and / or the user policy and / or the request of the application.
- the PDU session type selected by the UE may be set in the eleventh identification information.
- IPv4 may be set or IPv6 may be set as the PDU session type in the eleventh identification information.
- IPv4v6 may be set as the PDU session type in the eleventh identification information.
- the eleventh identification information may be set to Unstructured or Ethernet as the PDU session type.
- the PDU session type set in the eleventh identification information is not limited to these.
- the twelfth identification information is information indicating DNN.
- the twelfth identification information may be information indicating the DNN requested by the UE. More specifically, the twelfth identification information may be information indicating the DNN associated with the PDU session established in this procedure requested by the UE. Further, the twelfth identification information may be information selected and determined based on the setting of the UE and / or the state of the UE and / or the user policy and / or the request of the application.
- the thirteenth identification information is information indicating S-NSSAI.
- the thirteenth identification information may be information indicating S-NSSAI requested by the UE. More specifically, the thirteenth identification information may be information indicating the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session established in this procedure, which is requested by the UE. Further, the thirteenth identification information may be information selected and determined based on the setting of the UE and / or the state of the UE and / or the user policy and / or the request of the application. Further, the thirteenth identification information may be the S-NSSAI included in the NSSAI transmitted / received in the registration procedure, or may be the S-NSSAI stored in the UE.
- the 21st identification information is information indicating the PDU session type.
- the 21st identification information may be information indicating the PDU session type selected by the network. More specifically, the 21st identification information may be information indicating the PDU session type selected by the network and associated with the PDU session established in this procedure.
- the 21st identification information is based on the identification information received by the network and / or the capability information of the network and / or the operator policy and / or the state of the network and / or the registration information of the user. It may be information to be selected and determined. Further, the 21st identification information may be information selected and determined based on other identification information selected by the network in this procedure.
- the PDU session type selected by the network may be set in the 21st identification information.
- IPv4 may be set or IPv6 may be set as the PDU session type in the 21st identification information.
- IPv4v6 may be set as the PDU session type in the 21st identification information.
- the 21st identification information may be set to Unstructured or Ethernet as the PDU session type.
- the PDU session type set in the 21st identification information is not limited to these.
- the PDU session type set in the 21st identification information may be the same PDU session type as the PDU session type set in the 11th identification information received, or the 11th identification information received may be the same.
- the PDU session type may be different from the set PDU session type.
- the 22nd identification information is information indicating DNN.
- the 22nd identification information may be information indicating the DNN selected by the network. More specifically, the 22nd identification information may be network-selected information indicating the DNN associated with the PDU session established in this procedure.
- the 22nd identification information is based on the identification information received by the network and / or the capability information of the network and / or the operator policy and / or the state of the network and / or the registration information of the user. It may be information to be selected and determined. Further, the 22nd identification information may be information selected and determined based on other identification information selected by the network in this procedure.
- the 23rd identification information is information indicating S-NSSAI.
- the 23rd identification information may be information indicating S-NSSAI selected by the network. More specifically, the 23rd identification information may be network-selected information indicating the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session established in this procedure.
- the 23rd identification information is the identification information received by the network and / or the information associated with the NSI, and / or the capability information of the network, and / or the operator policy, and / or the state of the network, and / Or the information may be selected and determined based on the user's registration information or the like. Further, the 23rd identification information may be information selected and determined based on other identification information selected by the network in this procedure.
- the 24th identification information is a reason value indicating the reason why the UE request is not permitted.
- the 24th identification information may be a 5GSM (5GS Session Management) reason value.
- the 24th identification information may be information indicating that the PDU session type requested by the UE is not permitted.
- the 24th identification information may be information indicating that a PDU session type other than the PDU session type requested by the UE is permitted.
- the 24th identification information is the identification information received from the UE and / or the capability information of the network and / or the operator policy and / or the state of the network and / or the user registration information and / or the UE.
- the information may be selected and determined by the network based on the area to which it currently belongs.
- the 24th identification information may be the 50th 5GSM reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted as the PDU session type.
- the 24th identification information may be 5GSM cause # 50 "PDU session type IPv4 only allowed”.
- 5GSM cause # 50 "PDU session type IPv4 only allowed” may be a reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted as the PDU session type for the requested IP connectivity.
- the 24th identification information may be the 51st 5GSM reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted as the PDU session type.
- the 24th identification information may be 5GSM cause # 51 "PDU session type IPv6 only allowed”.
- 5GSM cause # 51 "PDU session type IPv6 only allowed” may be a reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted as the PDU session type for the requested IP connectivity.
- the 24th identification information may be information indicating that IPv4 v6 is not permitted as the PDU session type.
- the 24th identification information may be information indicating that IPv4 is not permitted as the PDU session type.
- the 24th identification information may be information indicating that IPv6 is not permitted as the PDU session type.
- the 24th identification information may be information indicating that the PDU session type cannot establish an IPv4 PDU session using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI. Further, the 24th identification information may be information indicating that the PDU session type cannot establish an IPv6 PDU session using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI.
- the procedure used in each embodiment includes a registration procedure (Registration procedure), a PDU session establishment procedure (PDU session establishment procedure), and a UE setting update procedure (Generic UE configuration update procedure).
- Registration procedure Registration procedure
- PDU session establishment procedure PDU session establishment procedure
- UE setting update procedure Generic UE configuration update procedure
- HSS and UDM, PCF and PCRF, SMF and PGW-C, and UPF and PGW-U are each the same device (that is, the same physical device).
- the case where it is configured as hardware, the same logical hardware, or the same software) will be described as an example. However, the content described in this embodiment is also applicable when they are configured as different devices (ie, different physical hardware, or different logical hardware, or different software).
- data may be transmitted / received directly between them, data may be transmitted / received via the N26 interface between AMF and MME, or data may be transmitted / received via UE.
- the registration procedure is a procedure in 5GS.
- this procedure refers to the registration procedure.
- the registration procedure is a procedure for the UE to take the initiative in registering with the access network_B and / or the core network_B and / or the DN.
- the UE can execute this procedure at any time, for example, when the power is turned on, as long as it is not registered in the network.
- the UE can start this procedure at any time if it is in the unregistered state (RM-DEREGISTERED state).
- each device particularly UE and AMF
- the registration procedure is to update the location registration information of the UE in the network and / or to periodically notify the network of the status of the UE from the UE and / or to update certain parameters about the UE in the network. It may be the procedure of.
- the UE may start the registration procedure when it has mobility across TAs. In other words, the UE may initiate the registration process when it moves to a TA that is different from the TA shown in the TA list it holds. In addition, the UE may initiate this procedure when the running timer expires. In addition, the UE may initiate the registration process when the context of each device needs to be updated due to disconnection or invalidation of the PDU session. In addition, the UE may initiate the registration process if there is a change in capability information and / or preferences regarding the establishment of the UE's PDU session. In addition, the UE may initiate the registration process on a regular basis. Further, the UE may start the registration procedure based on the completion of the UE setting update procedure. The UE is not limited to these, and can execute the registration procedure at any timing.
- the UE may start the registration procedure on a regular basis even if it is in the registered state. In other words, the UE may initiate the registration process based on the expiration of the timer. Further, the UE may start the registration procedure with the LADN information stored. In addition, the UE may initiate the registration process with the PDU session established.
- the PDU session may be a PDU session associated with LADN information, or may be a PDU session for LADN. Further, the PDU session may be a PDU session associated with NSSAI.
- the registration procedure executed based on the mobility of the UE and the registration procedure executed regularly may be expressed as the registration procedure for mobility and registration renewal.
- the registration procedure for mobility and renewal of registration may be a registration procedure performed based on the mobility of the UE, or may be a registration procedure performed periodically.
- the registration procedure for mobility and registration renewal may be a registration procedure executed based on the setting update of the UE.
- the registration procedure for mobility and registration renewal may be a registration procedure executed to establish a communication path for transmitting and receiving user data.
- the registration procedure for mobility and registration renewal may be a registration procedure performed based on a request from the network.
- the registration procedure for mobility and registration renewal may be a registration procedure other than the initial registration procedure.
- the registration procedure for mobility and registration renewal may be referred to as this procedure.
- the registration procedure described below may be an initial registration procedure or a registration procedure for mobility and registration renewal.
- the UE starts the registration procedure by sending a registration request message to AMF (S800) (S802) (S804). Specifically, the UE sends an RRC message including a registration request message to 5GAN (or gNB) (S800).
- the registration request message is a NAS message.
- the RRC message may be a control message transmitted / received between the UE and 5GAN (or gNB).
- NAS messages are processed in the NAS layer, and RRC messages are processed in the RRC layer.
- the NAS layer is a layer higher than the RRC layer.
- the UE may send one or more identification information by including it in a registration request message and / or an RRC message, but a control message different from these, for example, a layer lower than the RRC layer (for example, an RRC layer). , MAC layer, RLC layer, PDCP layer) may be included in the control message and transmitted.
- the UE may indicate that the UE supports each function, or may indicate a request of the UE.
- two or more identification information of these identification information may be configured as one or more identification information.
- the information indicating the support of each function and the information indicating the request for using each function may be transmitted / received to the same identification information or may be transmitted / received as different identification information.
- the UE can also send the registration request message by including the SM message (eg, PDU session establishment request message), or by sending the SM message (eg, PDU session establishment request message) together with the registration request message.
- the PDU session establishment procedure may be started during the registration procedure.
- 5GAN When 5GAN (or gNB) receives an RRC message including a registration request message, it selects the AMF to which the registration request message is forwarded (S802). Note that 5GAN (or gNB) can select AMF based on the information contained in the registration request message and / or RRC message. 5GAN (or gNB) extracts the registration request message from the received RRC message and forwards the registration request message to the selected AMF (S804).
- the AMF When the AMF receives the registration request message, it can execute the first condition determination.
- the first conditional determination is for determining whether or not the network (or AMF) accepts the UE's request.
- the AMF initiates the procedure (A) in FIG. 7 if the first condition determination is true, whereas the AMF initiates the procedure (B) in FIG. 7 if the first condition determination is false.
- the first condition determination is the reception of the registration request message and / or each identification information contained in the registration request message, and / or the subscriber information, and / or the network capability information, and / or the operator policy, and It may be executed based on / or the state of the network and / or the user's registration information and / or the context held by AMF. For example, if the network allows the UE request, the first condition determination is true, and if the network does not allow the UE request, the first condition determination may be false. Also, if the network to which the UE is registered and / or the devices in the network support the functions required by the UE, the first condition determination is true and does not support the functions required by the UE. In this case, the first condition determination may be false.
- the first conditional determination may be true, and if the transmitted / received identification information is not permitted, the first conditional determination may be false.
- the condition for determining the truth of the first condition determination is not limited to the above-mentioned condition.
- the AMF can first execute the fourth condition determination in the procedure (A) of FIG.
- the fourth condition determination is for determining whether or not the AMF sends and receives SM messages to and from the SMF.
- the fourth condition determination may be executed based on whether or not the AMF has received the SM message. Further, the fourth condition determination may be executed based on whether the registration request message includes the SM message. For example, if the AMF received the SM message and / or if the registration request message contained the SM message, the fourth condition determination may be true and if the AMF did not receive the SM message. And / or if the registration request message does not contain an SM message, the fourth condition determination may be false.
- the condition for determining the truth of the fourth condition determination is not limited to the above-mentioned condition.
- AMF selects SMF if the fourth condition is true and sends and receives SM messages to and from the selected SMF, whereas AMF is false if the fourth condition is false. , Do not execute them (S806). Further, even if the fourth condition determination is true, the AMF may cancel the procedure of FIG. 7 (A) when it receives an SM message indicating rejection from the SMF. At this time, AMF can start the procedure of (B) in FIG.
- AMF when sending and receiving SM messages to and from SMF, AMF can notify SMF of the identification information received in the registration request message.
- the SMF can acquire the identification information received from the AMF by sending and receiving SM messages to and from the AMF.
- the AMF then sends the UE via 5GAN (or gNB) as a response message to the registration request message based on the receipt of the registration request message and / or the completion of sending and receiving the SM message to and from the SMF.
- Send a Registration accept message (S808).
- the AMF may send a registration acceptance message based on the receipt of the registration request message from the UE.
- the AMF may send a registration acceptance message based on the completion of sending and receiving the SM message to and from the SMF.
- the registration acceptance message is a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface, but it is included in the RRC message and sent and received between the UE and 5GAN (gNB).
- AMF may send one or more identification information in the registration acceptance message. By transmitting these identification information, the AMF may indicate that the network supports each function, or may indicate that the UE request has been accepted. Further, when a plurality of identification information is transmitted and received, two or more identification information of these identification information may be configured as one or more identification information. The information indicating the support of each function and the information indicating the request for using each function may be transmitted / received to the same identification information or may be transmitted / received as different identification information.
- AMF indicates which identification information is included in the registration acceptance message, each identification information received, and / or subscriber information, and / or network capability information, and / or operator policy, and / or network status. , And / or based on the user's registration information and / or the context held by AMF, etc., may be selected and determined.
- the AMF can send the registration acceptance message including the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment acceptance message), or send the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment acceptance message) together with the registration acceptance message.
- this transmission method may be executed when the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment request message) is included in the registration request message and the fourth condition determination is true. Further, this transmission method may be executed when the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment request message) is included together with the registration request message and the fourth condition determination is true.
- the AMF can indicate that the procedure for SM has been accepted in the registration procedure.
- AMF also receives each identification information and / or subscriber information and / or network capability information, and / or operator policy, and / or network status, and / or user registration information, and / or. It may be shown that the request of the UE has been accepted by sending the registration acceptance message based on the context held by the AMF.
- the AMF may send the registration acceptance message with information indicating that some of the UE's requests have been rejected, or it may send information indicating that some of the UE's requests have been rejected. This may indicate the reason why some of the UE's requests were rejected.
- the UE may recognize why some of the UE's requests have been rejected by receiving information indicating that some of the UE's requests have been rejected. The reason for rejection may be information indicating that the content indicated by the identification information received by AMF is not permitted.
- the UE receives the registration acceptance message via 5GAN (gNB) (S808).
- gNB 5GAN
- the UE can recognize that the UE's request by the registration request message has been accepted and the contents of various identification information contained in the registration acceptance message.
- the UE can also send a registration completion message to AMF via 5GAN (gNB) as a response message to the registration acceptance message (S810).
- gNB 5GAN
- the UE may send the registration completion message including the SM message such as the PDU session establishment completion message, or by including the SM message. , May indicate that the procedure for SM has been completed.
- the registration completion message is a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface, but is included in the RRC message and sent and received between the UE and 5GAN (gNB).
- AMF receives a registration completion message via 5GAN (gNB) (S810). Further, each device completes the procedure (A) in FIG. 7 based on the transmission / reception of the registration acceptance message and / or the registration completion message.
- gNB 5GAN
- the AMF sends a registration rejection message to the UE via 5GAN (gNB) as a response message to the registration request message (S812).
- the registration refusal message is a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface, but is included in the RRC message and sent and received between the UE and 5GAN (gNB).
- the AMF may indicate that the UE request by the registration request message has been rejected by sending the registration refusal message.
- the AMF may send the registration refusal message with information indicating the reason for refusal, or may send the reason for refusal to indicate the reason for refusal.
- the UE may recognize the reason why the UE's request is rejected by receiving the information indicating the reason why the UE's request is rejected.
- the reason for rejection may be information indicating that the content indicated by the identification information received by AMF is not permitted.
- the UE receives a registration refusal message via 5GAN (gNB) (S812).
- the UE can recognize that the UE's request by the registration request message has been rejected and the contents of various identification information contained in the registration refusal message. Further, the UE may recognize that the request of the UE has been rejected if the registration refusal message is not received even after a predetermined period has elapsed after the registration request message is transmitted.
- Each device completes the procedure (B) in this procedure based on the transmission / reception of the registration refusal message.
- the procedure (B) in Fig. 7 may be started when the procedure in (A) in Fig. 7 is canceled.
- the AMF may send the registration refusal message including the SM message indicating rejection such as the PDU session establishment refusal message.
- the inclusion of an SM message indicating rejection may indicate that the procedure for SM has been rejected.
- the UE may further receive an SM message indicating rejection, such as a PDU session establishment refusal message, or may recognize that the procedure for SM has been rejected.
- Each device completes the registration procedure based on the completion of the procedure (A) or (B) in Fig. 7.
- Each device may transition to the state in which the UE is registered in the network (RM_REGISTERED state) based on the completion of the procedure (A) in FIG. 7, or the procedure in (B) in FIG. 7 is completed.
- the UE may be maintained in the state of not being registered in the network (RM_DEREGISTERED state), or the UE may be transitioned to the state of not being registered in the network. Further, the transition of each device to each state may be performed based on the completion of the registration procedure or may be performed based on the establishment of the PDU session.
- each device may perform processing based on the information transmitted / received in the registration procedure based on the completion of the registration procedure. For example, when sending and receiving information indicating that a part of the UE's request has been rejected, the reason why the UE's request has been rejected may be recognized. Further, each device may carry out this procedure again based on the reason why the request of the UE is rejected, or may carry out the registration procedure for the core network_B or another cell.
- the UE may store the identification information received with the registration acceptance message and / or the registration refusal message based on the completion of the registration procedure, and may recognize the network decision.
- the PDU session establishment procedure is a procedure in 5GS. Hereinafter, this procedure refers to the procedure for establishing a PDU session.
- the PDU session establishment procedure is a procedure for each device to establish a PDU session. Each device can start the PDU session establishment procedure at any time when the registration procedure is completed and the registration state is reached. In addition, each device may be able to execute the PDU session establishment procedure in the registration procedure. In addition, each device may establish a PDU session based on the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure.
- the PDU session establishment procedure may be a procedure initiated by the UE or a procedure requested and initiated by the UE.
- the PDU session establishment procedure may be a UE request PDU session establishment procedure.
- Each device can establish a plurality of PDU sessions by executing the PDU session establishment procedure a plurality of times.
- the PDU session establishment procedure is a PDU session establishment procedure for establishing a PDU session for LADN
- each device establishes a PDU session for LADN based on the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure. You may.
- the PDU session establishment procedure is a PDU session establishment procedure using LADN DNN
- each device may establish a PDU session for LADN based on the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure.
- the PDU session establishment procedure to establish a PDU session for LADN May start. Conversely, if the UE is located outside the LADN service area, execution of the PDU session establishment procedure for establishing a PDU session for LADN may be prohibited.
- each device establishes a PDU session for LADN if the UE is located in an area where it can connect to LADN and / or if the UE is located in the LADN service area.
- the PDU session establishment procedure may be executed.
- the network device may reject the request for a PDU session establishment procedure to establish a PDU session for LADN if the UE is located outside the LADN service area.
- the UE sends a NAS message containing a PDU session establishment request message to the SMF via 5GAN (gNB) and AMF (S900) (S902) (S904), PDU session. Start the establishment procedure.
- 5GAN gNB
- AMF S900
- S904 PDU session.
- the UE sends a NAS message including a PDU session establishment request message to AMF via 5GAN (gNB) via the N1 interface (S900).
- the NAS message including the PDU session establishment request message may be an MM message.
- the MM message may be an uplink NAS transport (UL NAS TRANSPORT) message.
- UL NAS TRANSPORT uplink NAS transport
- the UE may transmit at least one of the 11th to 13th identification information including the identification information in the PDU session establishment request message and / or the NAS message, but these are different. It may be included in the control message of a control message, for example, a layer lower than the RRC layer (for example, a MAC layer, an RLC layer, a PDCP layer) and transmitted. These identifications may be included in these messages to indicate the UE's request. Further, when a plurality of identification information is transmitted and received, two or more identification information of these identification information may be configured as one or more identification information.
- a layer lower than the RRC layer for example, a MAC layer, an RLC layer, a PDCP layer
- the UE may include the eleventh identification information in the PDU session establishment request message. Further, the UE may include the twelfth identification information and / or the thirteenth identification information in the uplink NAS transport message together with the PDU session establishment request message containing at least the eleventh identification information. In addition, the UE may send the uplink NAS transport message to the AMF (S900). In other words, the UE may send the twelfth identification information and / or the thirteenth identification information to the AMF together with the PDU session establishment request message containing the eleventh identification information. In other words, the UE may send a PDU session establishment request message containing the eleventh identification information to the AMF together with the twelfth identification information and / or the thirteenth identification information.
- the UE may indicate a request for establishment of the PDU session establishment request message of the PDU session type indicated by the eleventh identification information by transmitting the eleventh identification information. Further, the UE may indicate the PDU session type requested by the UE by transmitting the eleventh identification information.
- the UE may indicate a request to establish a PDU session associated with the DNN indicated by the twelfth identification information by transmitting the twelfth identification information. Further, the UE may indicate the DNN requested by the UE by transmitting the twelfth identification information.
- the twelfth identification information may be a DNN that identifies a DN that supports one or more functions indicated by the identification information transmitted and received together with the twelfth identification information. Further, the twelfth identification information may be the DNN received in the registration procedure or may be the LADN DNN.
- the UE may indicate a request for establishing a PDU session associated with the S-NSSAI indicated by the thirteenth identification information by transmitting the thirteenth identification information. Further, the UE may indicate the S-NSSAI requested by the UE by transmitting the thirteenth identification information.
- the thirteenth identification information may be S-NSSAI that identifies an NS that supports one or more functions indicated by the identification information transmitted and received together with the thirteenth identification information.
- the AMF When the AMF receives the NAS message including the PDU session establishment request message (S900), it extracts the PDU session establishment request message from the NAS message and selects SMF as the forwarding destination of the PDU session establishment request message (S902).
- AMF shall include each identification information and / or subscriber information contained in the PDU session establishment request message and / or NAS message, and / or network capability information, and / or operator policy, and / or network status. And / or the transfer destination SMF may be selected based on the user's registration information and / or the context held by the AMF.
- AMF forwards the PDU session establishment request message to the selected SMF via the N11 interface (S904).
- the SMF When the SMF receives the PDU session establishment request message (S904), it recognizes various identification information contained in the PDU session establishment request message. Then, the SMF executes the third condition determination.
- the third condition determination is for the SMF to determine whether or not to accept the UE's request. In the third condition determination, the SMF determines whether the third condition determination is true or false. If the third condition determination is true, the procedure of FIG. 8 (A) is started, and if the third condition determination is false, the procedure of FIG. 8 (B) is started.
- the third condition determination is the PDU session establishment request message and / or each identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message, and / or the subscriber information, and / or the network capability information, and / or the operator policy. , And / or based on the state of the network, and / or the user's registration information, and / or the context held by the SMF, etc. For example, if the network allows the UE request, the third condition may be true. Also, if the network does not allow the UE request, the third condition determination may be false. Furthermore, if the network to which the UE is connected and / or the devices in the network support the functions required by the UE, the third condition determination may be true and does not support the functions required by the UE.
- the third condition determination may be false. Further, if the transmitted / received identification information is permitted, the third condition determination may be true, and if the transmitted / received identification information is not permitted, the third condition determination may be false.
- the condition for determining the truth of the third condition determination is not limited to the above-mentioned condition.
- the SMF selects the UPF to which the PDU session is established, sends a session establishment request message to the selected UPF via the N4 interface (S906), and starts the procedure of (A) in FIG.
- the SMF obtains each identification information and / or subscriber information and / or network capability information acquired based on the reception of the PDU session establishment request message, and / or the operator policy, and / or the network status. And / or one or more UPFs may be selected based on the user's registration information and / or the context held by the SMF. When a plurality of UPFs are selected, the SMF may send a session establishment request message to each UPF.
- the UPF receives the session establishment request message from the SMF (S906) via the N4 interface and creates a context for the PDU session. In addition, the UPF receives the session establishment request message and / or sends the session establishment response message to the SMF via the N4 interface based on the creation of the context for the PDU session (S908).
- the SMF receives the session establishment response message from the UPF via the N4 interface as a response message to the session establishment request message (S908).
- the SMF may assign an address to the UE based on the reception of the PDU session establishment request message and / or the selection of the UPF and / or the reception of the session establishment response message.
- the SMF receives the PDU session establishment request message and / or selects the UPF and / or receives the session establishment response message and / or the UE via the AMF based on the completion of the address assignment of the address assigned to the UE.
- the SMF sends a PDU session establishment acceptance message to the AMF via the N11 interface (S910)
- the AMF that receives the PDU session establishment request message establishes a PDU session to the UE via the N1 interface.
- the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be a NAS message and may be a response message to the PDU session establishment request.
- the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be sent and received by including the N1 interface in the MM message.
- the MM message may be a NAS message or a downlink NAS transport (DL NAS TRANSPORT) message.
- the PDU session establishment acceptance message when it is expressed that the PDU session establishment acceptance message includes identification information and / or a value, it may mean that it is included in the MM message including the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
- the PDU session establishment acceptance message can indicate that the PDU session establishment has been accepted.
- the SMF and AMF may indicate that the UE request by the PDU session establishment request has been accepted by sending the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
- the SMF and AMF may send the PDU session establishment acceptance message including at least one of the 21st to 24th identification information.
- SMF and AMF may indicate that the network supports each function by transmitting these identification information, or may indicate that the request of the UE has been accepted.
- two or more identification information of these identification information may be configured as one or more identification information.
- the information indicating the support of each function and the information indicating the request for using each function may be transmitted / received to the same identification information or may be transmitted / received as different identification information.
- the SMF and AMF may indicate acceptance of the PDU session establishment request of the PDU session type indicated by the 21st identification information by transmitting the 21st identification information, and the PDU session is established. You may show that.
- the SMF and AMF may indicate the PDU session type selected and determined by the network to send the 21st identification information.
- the PDU session type indicated by the 21st identification information may be the same PDU session type as the received 11th identification information, or may be a PDU session type different from the received 11th identification information. good.
- the SMF and AMF may indicate the acceptance of the request for establishing the PDU session associated with the DNN indicated by the 22nd identification information by transmitting the 22nd identification information, or the PDU session is established. It may be shown that.
- the SMF and AMF may indicate the DNN selected and determined by the network to transmit the 22nd identification information.
- the 22nd identification information may be a DNN that identifies a DN that supports one or more functions indicated by the identification information transmitted and received together with the 22nd identification information. Further, the 22nd identification information may be the DNN transmitted in the registration procedure or may be the LADN DNN.
- the SMF and AMF may indicate acceptance of the request for establishing the PDU session associated with the S-NSSAI indicated by the 23rd identification information by transmitting the 23rd identification information, or the PDU session may indicate acceptance. It may be shown to be established.
- the SMF and AMF may indicate that the 23rd identification information is transmitted, the network has selected and determined S-NSSAI.
- the 23rd identification information may be S-NSSAI that identifies an NS that supports one or more functions indicated by the identification information transmitted and received together with the 23rd identification information. Further, the 23rd identification information may be S-NSSAI transmitted in the registration procedure.
- the SMF and / or AMF may send the 24th identification information to indicate that some of the UE's requests are not allowed. Specifically, the SMF and / or AMF may send the 24th identification information to indicate that the PDU session type requested by the UE is not allowed.
- the SMF and / or AMF may send the 24th identification information to indicate that only PDU session types different from the PDU session type requested by the UE are allowed. Further, by transmitting the 24th identification information, the SMF and / or the AMF sets the PDU session type different from the PDU session type indicated by the 11th identification information received as the 21st identification information. You may indicate that you are.
- the PDU session type indicating the eleventh identification information is IPv4v6 or IPv6 and the permitted PDU session type is IPv4
- SMF and / or AMF will use the PDU session in the 21st identification information.
- IPv4 may be set as the type.
- the SMF and / or the AMF may set the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted in the 24th identification information.
- the SMF and / or the AMF may transmit the 24th identification information to indicate that only IPv4 is permitted as the PDU session type.
- the SMF and / or the AMF may transmit the 24th identification information to indicate that IPv6 and / or IPv4v6 are not permitted as the PDU session type.
- the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted may be the 50th 5GSM reason value. Further, the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted may be the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted as the PDU session type. In other words, the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is allowed may be the reason value indicating that only the PDU session type of IPv4 is allowed.
- the PDU session type indicating the 11th identification information is IPv4v6 or IPv4 and the permitted PDU session type is IPv6
- SMF and / or AMF will be added to the 21st identification information as the PDU session type.
- IPv6 may be set.
- the SMF and / or the AMF may set the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted in the 24th identification information.
- the SMF and / or the AMF may transmit the 24th identification information to indicate that only IPv6 is permitted as the PDU session type.
- the SMF and / or the AMF may transmit the 24th identification information to indicate that IPv4 and / or IPv4 v6 are not permitted as the PDU session type.
- the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted may be the 51st 5GSM reason value. Further, the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted may be a reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted as the PDU session type. In other words, the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is allowed may be the reason value indicating that only the PDU session type of IPv6 is allowed.
- SMF and AMF each received identification information and / or subscriber information, and whether to include one or more identification information in the PDU session establishment acceptance message from at least the 21st to 24th identification information, and It may be selected and determined based on / or network capability information and / or operator policy, and / or network status, and / or user registration information, and / or AMF-held context.
- SMF and AMF can include the selected and / or allowed PDU session ID in the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
- SMF and AMF can also specify a PDU session type that indicates the type of PDU session selected and / or allowed.
- PDU session type any one of IPv4, IPv6, IPv4v6, Ethernet, and Unstructured can be specified as described above.
- the SMF and AMF can also include the SSC mode of the selected and / or allowed PDU session in the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
- SMF and AMF can include the approved QoS rule group in the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
- the approved QoS rule group may include one or more QoS rules. Further, if a plurality of QoS flows and / or user plane radio bearers are established in this procedure, the approved QoS rule group may include a plurality of QoS rules. Conversely, if only one QoS flow and / or user plane radio bearer is established in this procedure, the approved QoS rule group may include one QoS rule.
- the SMF may send the PDU session establishment acceptance message with information indicating that some requests from the UE have been rejected, or information indicating that some requests from the UE have been rejected. May indicate why some of the UE's requests were rejected.
- the UE may recognize why some of the UE's requests have been rejected by receiving information indicating that some of the UE's requests have been rejected. The reason for rejection may be information indicating that the content indicated by the identification information received by the SMF is not permitted.
- the UE receives the PDU session establishment acceptance message from the SMF (S910) (S912). Specifically, the UE receives the NAS message including the PDU session establishment acceptance message from the AMF via the N1 interface after the PDU session establishment acceptance message is sent from the SMF to the AMF (S910). .. The UE may send a PDU session establishment complete message to the SMF via AMF based on the receipt of the PDU session establishment acceptance message and / or the NAS message including the PDU session establishment acceptance message. (S914) (S916). By receiving the PDU session establishment acceptance message, the UE can detect that the UE's request by the PDU session establishment request has been accepted.
- the UE sends a PDU session establishment completion message to the AMF via the N1 interface (S914).
- the AMF receives the PDU session establishment completion message from the UE, it sends the PDU session establishment completion message to the SMF via the N11 interface (S916).
- the PDU session establishment completion message sent by AMF to SMF may be a response message to the PDU session establishment acceptance message sent from SMF to AMF by S910. Further, the PDU session establishment completion message may be a NAS message. Further, the PDU session establishment completion message may be any message indicating that the PDU session establishment procedure is completed.
- the SMF can execute the second condition determination.
- the second condition determination is to determine the type of message sent and received on the N4 interface. If the second condition determination is true, the SMF sends a session change request message to the UPF via the N4 interface (S918) and receives a session change acceptance message sent by the UPF as its response message (S918). S920). If the second condition determination is false, the SMF sends a session establishment request message to the UPF via the N4 interface (S918) and receives a session change acceptance message sent by the UPF as its response message (S918). S920).
- the second condition determination may be executed based on whether or not a session on the N4 interface for the PDU session has been established. For example, if the session on the N4 interface for the PDU session is established, the second condition determination may be true, and if the session on the N4 interface for the PDU session is not established, the second condition is true. The condition determination of is false.
- the condition for determining the truth of the second condition determination is not limited to the above-mentioned condition.
- Each device completes the procedure (A) during the PDU session establishment procedure based on the transmission / reception of the PDU session establishment completion message and / or the transmission / reception of the session change response message and / or the transmission / reception of the session establishment response message.
- the procedure (A) during this procedure is completed, the UE is in a state where a PDU session for the DN has been established.
- the PDU session establishment procedure is a PDU session establishment procedure for establishing a PDU session for LADN
- each device is for LADN based on the completion of procedure (A) during this procedure. PDU session may be established.
- the SMF sends a PDU session establishment reject message to the UE via the AMF (S922) (S924). Specifically, the SMF sends a PDU session establishment rejection message to the AMF via the N11 interface (S922).
- the AMF receives a PDU session establishment request message from the SMF via the N11 interface (S922), it sends a PDU session establishment rejection message to the UE using the N1 interface (S924).
- the PDU session establishment refusal message may be a NAS message or an SM message transmitted from the SMF to the UE. Further, the PDU session establishment refusal message may be any message indicating that the establishment of the PDU session has been rejected. In addition, the PDU session establishment refusal message may be sent and received by including the N1 interface in the MM message. Further, the MM message may be a NAS message or a downlink NAS transport (DL NAS TRANSPORT) message.
- DL NAS TRANSPORT downlink NAS transport
- the SMF may indicate that the UE request by the PDU session establishment request has been rejected by sending the PDU session establishment refusal message.
- the SMF may send the PDU session establishment rejection message with information indicating the reason for rejection, or may send the reason for rejection to indicate the reason for rejection.
- the UE may recognize the reason why the UE's request is rejected by receiving the information indicating the reason why the UE's request is rejected.
- the reason for rejection may be information indicating that the content indicated by the identification information received by the SMF is not permitted.
- the SMF and / or AMF may send the PDU session establishment rejection message with at least the 24th identification information and / or the backoff timer value, and the 24th identification information and / or the backoff timer. By sending a value, it may indicate that the UE's request has been rejected, or it may indicate why the UE's request has been rejected.
- the SMF and / or AMF may send the 24th identification information to indicate that the UE request is not permitted. Specifically, the SMF and / or AMF may send the 24th identification information to indicate that the PDU session type requested by the UE is not allowed.
- the PDU session type indicating the 11th identification information is IPv4v6 or IPv6, and the permitted PDU session type is IPv4
- SMF and / or AMF will use IPv4 only for the 24th identification information. You may set a reason value to indicate that is allowed. Further, in this case, the SMF and / or the AMF may transmit the 24th identification information to indicate that only IPv4 is permitted as the PDU session type. Further, in this case, the SMF and / or the AMF may transmit the 24th identification information to indicate that IPv6 and / or IPv4v6 are not permitted as the PDU session type.
- the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted may be the 50th 5GSM reason value. Further, the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted may be the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted as the PDU session type. In other words, the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is allowed may be the reason value indicating that only the PDU session type of IPv4 is allowed.
- the PDU session type indicating the 11th identification information is IPv4v6 or IPv4 and the permitted PDU session type is IPv6
- SMF and / or AMF are only allowed to use IPv6 for the 24th identification information. You may set a reason value indicating that it is.
- the SMF and / or the AMF may transmit the 24th identification information to indicate that only IPv6 is permitted as the PDU session type.
- the SMF and / or the AMF may transmit the 24th identification information to indicate that IPv4 and / or IPv4 v6 are not permitted as the PDU session type.
- the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted may be the 51st 5GSM reason value. Further, the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted may be a reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted as the PDU session type. In other words, the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is allowed may be the reason value indicating that only the PDU session type of IPv6 is allowed.
- the SMF and / or AMF may instruct the UE to set the backoff timer value to the value to be transmitted by transmitting the backoff timer value, or the backoff with the transmitted value set. You may instruct to start the timer.
- the SMF and / or AMF should include at least the 24th identification information in the PDU session establishment refusal message, each identification information received, and / or the subscriber information, and / or the network capability information, and /. Alternatively, it may be selected and determined based on the operator policy and / or the state of the network and / or the user's registration information and / or the context held by the AMF.
- the UE By receiving the PDU session establishment refusal message, the UE can recognize that the UE request by the PDU session establishment request has been rejected and the contents of various identification information included in the PDU session establishment refusal message.
- Each device completes the PDU session establishment procedure based on the completion of the procedure (A) or (B) in FIG.
- each device may transition to the state in which the PDU session is established based on the completion of the procedure of FIG. 8 (A), or the PDU is based on the completion of the procedure of FIG. 8 (B).
- the UE can communicate with the DN using the established PDU session by completing the procedure (A) in FIG.
- each device may perform processing based on the information transmitted / received in the PDU session establishment procedure based on the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure. For example, if each device sends and receives information indicating that some of the UE's requests have been rejected, it may recognize the reason why the UE's request was rejected. Further, each device may perform this procedure again based on the reason why the request of the UE is rejected, or may perform the PDU session establishment procedure for another cell.
- the UE may store the identification information received with the PDU session establishment acceptance message and / or the PDU session establishment rejection message based on the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure, and may recognize the network decision. good.
- each device when each device sends and receives the 21st identification information, it may establish a PDU session of the PDU session type indicated by the 21st identification information. Further, the UE may recognize that when the 21st identification information is received, a PDU session of the PDU session type indicated by the 21st identification information is established. In addition, the UE may recognize the PDU session type selected and determined by the network when it receives the 21st identification.
- each device may establish a PDU session associated with the DNN indicated by the 22nd identification information when the 22nd identification information is transmitted / received. Further, the UE may recognize that when the 22nd identification information is received, the PDU session associated with the DNN indicated by the 22nd identification information is established. In addition, the UE may recognize the DNN selected and determined by the network when it receives the 22nd identification information.
- the 22nd identification information may be a DNN that identifies a DN that supports one or more functions indicated by the identification information transmitted and received together with the 22nd identification information. Further, the 22nd identification information may be the DNN received in the registration procedure or may be the LADN DNN.
- each device may establish a PDU session associated with the S-NSSAI indicated by the 23rd identification information when the 23rd identification information is transmitted / received. Further, the UE may recognize that when the 23rd identification information is received, the PDU session associated with the S-NSSAI indicated by the 23rd identification information is established. Further, the UE may recognize the S-NSSAI selected and determined by the network when it receives the 23rd identification information.
- the 23rd identification information may be S-NSSAI that identifies an NS that supports one or more functions indicated by the identification information transmitted and received together with the 23rd identification information. Further, the 23rd identification information may be the S-NSSAI received in the registration procedure or the S-NSSAI.
- the UE when it receives the 24th identification information, it may recognize that a part of the UE's request is not permitted. Specifically, the UE may recognize that the PDU session type requested by the UE is not allowed when it receives the 24th identification information. In other words, the UE may recognize that when it receives the 24th identification information, a PDU session of a PDU session type other than the PDU session type requested by the UE is established.
- the UE may recognize that only IPv4 is allowed as the PDU session type if it receives a 24th identification with a reason value that indicates that only IPv4 is allowed. .. Further, in this case, the UE may indicate that IPv6 and / or IPv4v6 are not allowed as the PDU session type.
- the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted may be the 50th 5GSM reason value. Further, the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted may be the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted as the PDU session type. In other words, the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is allowed may be the reason value indicating that only the PDU session type of IPv4 is allowed.
- the UE may execute the behavior A. More specifically, the eleventh identification information configured with IPv4v6 is transmitted, the 21st identification information configured with IPv4, and the 24th identification information set with a reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted.
- the UE may perform behavior A. In other words, the UE behaves when it requests an IPv4 v6 PDU session type and receives a PDU session type with IPv4 and a 24th identification with a reason value indicating that only IPv4 is allowed. A may be carried out.
- Behavior A is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set is prohibited. There may be. Further, behavior A is a behavior that prohibits the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. You may. Further, behavior A may be a behavior that uses the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and a PDU session type in which IPv6 is set so that a new PDU session establishment procedure is not started. .. Furthermore, behavior A is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set is prohibited. You may.
- the UE is prohibited from initiating a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type while performing Behavior A. You may be.
- the UE is prohibited from initiating a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type while performing Behavior A. It may be set to.
- the UE is prohibited from initiating a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type while performing Behavior A. It may be in a state of being.
- the behavior A may be carried out until the UE is registered in the new PLMN, or may be carried out until the UE is registered in the new SNPN. More specifically, if the UE is registered in the PLMN, behavior A may be performed until the UE is registered in a PLMN other than the equal PLMN, or until the UE is registered in the SNPN. It may be carried out. Furthermore, if the UE is registered in the SNPN, behavior A may be performed until the UE is registered in a SNPN other than the equal SNPN, or until the UE is registered in the PLMN. May be good.
- behavior A may be performed until the UE is registered with a PLMN other than the equal PLMN, or until the UE is registered with the SNPN. It may be carried out. Furthermore, if the UE is operating in SNPN access mode, behavior A may be performed until the UE is registered with a non-equal SNPN, or until the UE is registered with the PLMN. May be done.
- behavior A may be performed until the PDU session type is changed. Further, behavior A may be performed until the UE is switched off or until the USIM is removed.
- the PLMN other than the equal PLMN may be a PLMN that is not on the list of equal PLMNs.
- registering a UE with a non-equal PLMN may indicate that the UE is registered with a new PLMN that is not on the list of equal PLMNs.
- the PLMN other than the equal PLMN may be a PLMN that is not included in the list of equal PLMNs.
- registering a UE with a PLMN other than the equal PLMN may indicate that the UE is registered with a new PLMN that is not on the list of equal PLMNs.
- the SNPN other than the equal SNPN may be an SNPN that is not on the list of equal SNPNs.
- registering a UE with a non-equal SNPN may indicate that the UE is registered with a new SNPN that is not on the list of equal SNPNs.
- the SNPN other than the equal SNPN may be an SNPN that is not included in the list of equal SNPNs.
- registering a UE with an SNPN other than the equal SNPN may indicate that the UE is registered with a new SNPN that is not included in the list of equal SNPNs.
- the same DNN may be the same DNN as the DNN included in the 12th identification information and transmitted / received in this procedure, or the same DNN as the DNN included in the 22nd identification information and transmitted / received.
- the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI included in the 13th identification information and transmitted / received in this procedure, and may be included in the 23rd identification information and transmitted / received. It may be the same S-NSSAI as S-NSSAI.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure different from this procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of this procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be another PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of this procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type.
- a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
- the UE may recognize that only IPv6 is allowed as the PDU session type if it receives a 24th identification with a reason value that indicates that only IPv6 is allowed. .. Further, in this case, the UE may indicate that IPv4 and / or IPv4 v6 are not allowed as the PDU session type.
- the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted may be the 51st 5GSM reason value. Further, the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted may be a reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted as the PDU session type. In other words, the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is allowed may be the reason value indicating that only the PDU session type of IPv6 is allowed.
- the UE may execute the behavior B. More specifically, the eleventh identification information configured with IPv4v6 is transmitted, the 21st identification information configured with IPv6, and the 24th identification information set with a reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted.
- the UE may perform behavior B. In other words, the UE behaves when it requests an IPv4 v6 PDU session type and receives a PDU session type with IPv6 configured and a 24th identification with a reason value indicating that only IPv6 is allowed. B may be carried out.
- Behavior B is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is prohibited. There may be. Further, behavior B is a behavior that prohibits the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. You may. Further, behavior B may be a behavior that uses the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and a PDU session type in which IPv4 is set so that a new PDU session establishment procedure is not started. .. Furthermore, behavior B is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is prohibited. You may.
- the UE is prohibited from initiating a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv4 configured PDU session type while performing Behavior B. You may be.
- the UE is prohibited from initiating a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv4 configured PDU session type while performing Behavior B. It may be set to.
- the UE is prohibited from initiating a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv4 configured PDU session type while performing Behavior B. It may be in a state of being.
- behavior B may be carried out until the UE is registered in the new PLMN, or may be carried out until the UE is registered in the new SNPN. More specifically, if the UE is registered in the PLMN, behavior B may be performed until the UE is registered in a PLMN other than the equal PLMN, or until the UE is registered in the SNPN. It may be carried out. Furthermore, if the UE is registered in the SNPN, behavior B may be performed until the UE is registered in a SNPN other than the equal SNPN, or until the UE is registered in the PLMN. May be good.
- behavior B may be performed until the UE is registered with a PLMN other than the equal PLMN, or until the UE is registered with the SNPN. It may be carried out. Furthermore, if the UE is operating in SNPN access mode, behavior B may be performed until the UE is registered with a non-equal SNPN, or until the UE is registered with the PLMN. May be done.
- behavior B may be performed until the PDU session type is changed. Further, behavior B may be performed until the UE is switched off or until the USIM is removed.
- the PLMN other than the equal PLMN may be a PLMN that is not on the list of equal PLMNs.
- registering a UE with a non-equal PLMN may indicate that the UE is registered with a new PLMN that is not on the list of equal PLMNs.
- the PLMN other than the equal PLMN may be a PLMN that is not included in the list of equal PLMNs.
- registering a UE with a PLMN other than the equal PLMN may indicate that the UE is registered with a new PLMN that is not on the list of equal PLMNs.
- the SNPN other than the equal SNPN may be an SNPN that is not on the list of equal SNPNs.
- registering a UE with a non-equal SNPN may indicate that the UE is registered with a new SNPN that is not on the list of equal SNPNs.
- the SNPN other than the equal SNPN may be an SNPN that is not included in the list of equal SNPNs.
- registering a UE with an SNPN other than the equal SNPN may indicate that the UE is registered with a new SNPN that is not included in the list of equal SNPNs.
- the same DNN may be the same DNN as the DNN included in the 12th identification information and transmitted / received in this procedure, or the same DNN as the DNN included in the 22nd identification information and transmitted / received.
- the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI included in the 13th identification information and transmitted / received in this procedure, and may be included in the 23rd identification information and transmitted / received. It may be the same S-NSSAI as S-NSSAI.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure different from this procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of this procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be another PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of this procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type.
- a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv4 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
- the UE may set the back-off timer value to the back-off timer, or may start the back-off timer in which the received back-off timer value is set.
- the UE may set the received backoff timer value as the backoff timer even when the backoff timer value and the 24th identification information are received, and the received backoff timer value may be set. You may start the set backoff timer.
- the UE receives the 24th identification information, after the completion of this procedure, the UE starts the PDU session establishment procedure under other conditions based on the completion of this procedure and / or the reception of the 24th identification information. You can do it. If the UE is executing the back timer, the PDU session establishment procedure may be started under other conditions after the count of the back-off timer has expired.
- the fact that the UE starts the PDU session establishment procedure under other conditions means that, for example, the PDU session establishment procedure is performed by setting a DNN different from the DNN transmitted earlier by the UE in the DNN information element and transmitting it to the network. May be started.
- the fact that the UE starts the PDU session establishment procedure under other conditions means that the S-NSSAI, which is different from the S-NSSAI sent earlier by the UE, is set in the S-NSSAI information element and sent to the network. It may be to start the session establishment procedure.
- the fact that the UE initiates the PDU session establishment procedure under other conditions means that the PDU session type that is different from the PDU session type that the UE sent earlier is set in the PDU session type information element and sent to the network. It may be to start the session establishment procedure. Furthermore, when the UE starts the PDU session establishment procedure under other conditions, it means that the PDU session establishment procedure is started by changing the area where the UE is located and then sending the PDU session establishment request message. May be good.
- the fact that the UE starts the PDU session establishment procedure under other conditions may mean that the UE starts the PDU session establishment procedure without using the DNN. Furthermore, the fact that the UE starts the PDU session establishment procedure under other conditions may mean that the UE starts the PDU session establishment procedure without using S-NSSAI.
- the PDU session establishment procedure using the DNN and / or S-NSSAI and / or PDU session type requested by the UE is not started. , Or may transition to a stopped state or a prohibited state.
- the PDU session establishment procedure using the DNN and / or S-NSSAI and / or PDU session type requested by the UE is the DNN and / or S-NSSAI and / or the UE requested earlier. It may be a PDU session establishment procedure initiated by sending a PDU session establishment request message containing a PDU session type.
- the UE may be prohibited from PDU session establishment procedures using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and / or the same PDU session type.
- sending PDU session establishment request messages containing the same PDU session type may be prohibited.
- the PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and / or the same PDU session type is prohibited for a certain period after the completion of this procedure. It may transition to the state of being.
- the UE receives the 24th identification information it will send a PDU session establishment request message containing the same PDU session type with the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI for a period of time after the completion of this procedure. You may transition to the prohibited state.
- the fixed period may be a period set by the back-off timer value, or may be another period set by the network or the UE.
- the RRC connection release procedure is a procedure in 5GS. Hereinafter, this procedure refers to the RRC connection release procedure.
- the RRC connection release procedure is a procedure for each device to release or suspend an RRC connection.
- the base station device in the access network can start the RRC connection release procedure at any time when the registration procedure is completed and the registration state is reached.
- each device may release or suspend the RRC connection based on the completion of the RRC connection release procedure.
- the RRC connection release procedure may be a procedure that is started by the base station device in the access network, or may be a procedure that is requested and started by the core network device. Further, the RRC connection release procedure may be a procedure that is triggered by the transmission of an RRC message from the UE.
- the base station device and / or the core network device in the access network may initiate the RRC connection release procedure based on the change in the state of the UE, or may start the RRC connection release procedure based on the change in the subscriber information of the UE.
- the RRC connection release procedure may be started.
- the base station device and / or the core network device in the access network may initiate the RRC connection release procedure based on the change in network settings, or the RRC connection based on the change in network status. You may start the release procedure.
- the base station device and / or the core network device in the access network may start the RRC connection release procedure based on the detection that the transmission / reception unit of the user data has disappeared, and the RRC connection becomes unnecessary.
- the RRC connection release procedure may be started based on the detection of the occurrence.
- the trigger for the base station device and / or the core network device in the access network to start the RRC connection release procedure is not limited to these.
- the base station device (gNB) in the access network starts the RRC connection release procedure by sending an RRC release (RRC release) message to the UE (S1000).
- gNB sends an RRC release message to the UE via the Uu interface (S1000).
- the RRC release message may be an RRC message.
- gNB may include at least the first identification information in the RRC release message and send it. These identifications may be included in these messages to indicate a gNB request.
- gNB may indicate that the RRC connection is suspended by transmitting the first identification information.
- gNB may disable the RRC connection state or suspend the RRC connection state by transmitting the first identification information.
- gNB may instruct the UE to suspend the RRC connection by transmitting the first identification information.
- gNB may instruct the UE to deactivate the state of the RRC connection or suspend the state of the RRC connection by sending the first identification information. May be good.
- suspending the RRC connection may mean disabling the RRC connection. Further, disabling the state of the RRC connection may mean deactivating the state of the RRC layer. Further, suspending the state of the RRC connection may mean suspending the state of the RRC layer.
- gNB may transition to the RRC_INACTIVE state by transmitting the first identification information. Further, the gNB may instruct the UE to transition to the RRC_INACTIVE state by transmitting the first identification information.
- the UE receives the RRC release message (S900).
- the UE may recognize and store the identification information contained in the RRC release message based on the receipt of the RRC release message.
- UE_R may release the RRC connection or suspend the RRC connection based on the reception of the RRC release message.
- UE_R may disable the state of the RRC connection or suspend the state of the RRC connection based on the receipt of the RRC release message.
- UE_R may send information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended to the upper layer based on the reception of the RRC release message.
- UE_R may transition to the RRC_INACTIVE state based on the receipt of the RRC release message.
- UE_R may be a functional unit responsible for the function of the RRC layer of the UE.
- the upper layer may be a NAS layer.
- the information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended may be an indication indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended.
- the information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended may be the first identification information.
- UE_N may receive information from the lower layer indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended. Further, UE_N may transition to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication based on the reception of information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended from the lower layer. More specifically, UE_N may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication based on the reception of information from the lower layer indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended.
- UE_N transitions only the 3GPP access status from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication from the lower layer based on the reception of information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended. You may. In other words, UE_N does not have to transition to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication regarding the non-3GPP access status even if it receives information from the lower layer indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended. ..
- UE_N may be a functional unit responsible for the function of the NAS layer of the UE.
- UE_N may be a transmission / reception unit that is responsible for the function of the NAS layer of the UE, or may be a functional unit that is responsible for the function of the NAS layer of the UE.
- the lower layer may be an RRC layer.
- the information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended may be an indication indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended. Further, the information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended may be the first identification information.
- Each device completes the RRC connection release procedure based on the transmission / reception of RRC release and / or the transition to each state.
- each device may release the RRC connection or suspend the RRC connection based on the completion of this procedure. Further, each device may transition to a suspended state of the RRC connection or a disabled state of the RRC connection based on the completion of this procedure. Further, each device may transition to the RRC_INACTIVE state based on the completion of this procedure.
- each device may transition to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication based on the completion of this procedure. More specifically, each device may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication based on the completion of this procedure.
- the first embodiment will be described.
- the first embodiment will be referred to as the present embodiment.
- the UE selects and executes one or more procedures from the first to fourth procedures.
- the UE determines which of the procedures 1 to 4 is to be executed, the setting information of the UE and / or the information received from the network, and / or the mode of the UE, and / or the capability information of the UE. It may be decided based on.
- the first procedure will be described with reference to FIG.
- the first procedure will be referred to as this procedure.
- the UE first makes the first network selection (S600). Then, based on the first network selection, the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration process (S602).
- each device performs the registration procedure initiated by the UE (S602).
- each device establishes a PDU session by performing the PDU session establishment procedure initiated by the UE (S604), and is in a state where communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN. Transition.
- each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session.
- each device may perform the RRC connection release procedure at any time (S606). Note that each device may proceed to the next step without performing the RRC connection release procedure.
- the UE makes a second network selection at any time (S608).
- the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure (S610) (S612).
- each device performs a UE-initiated registration procedure and / or a PDU session establishment procedure (S610) (S612).
- each device transitions to a state in which communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN based on the completion of the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure.
- each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session. With the above, the first procedure is completed.
- the UE may execute the second network selection based on the change in the state of the UE, or may execute the second network selection based on the change in the setting subscriber information of the UE. good.
- the UE may perform a second network selection based on changes in the UE settings, or may perform a second network selection based on the movement of the UE.
- the UE may perform a second network selection based on the receipt of a control message from the network, or may perform a second network selection based on instructions from the network.
- the control message may be a NAS message or a control message other than the NAS message.
- the control message may be a non-registration request message or a registration refusal message.
- the trigger for the UE to execute the second network selection is not limited to these.
- the UE may select PLMN and select PLMN in the first network selection. More specifically, the UE selects PLMN in the first network selection based on the UE configuration information and / or the information received from the network and / or the UE mode and / or the UE capability information. You may. Specifically, when the UE is not operating in the SNPN access mode, it may perform PLMN selection in the first network selection and select PLMN.
- the UE may be registered with the PLMN based on the first network selection. In other words, the UE may transition to the PLMN registered state based on the first network selection. Further, in the first procedure, the UE may be registered with the PLMN after the completion of the first network selection. In other words, it may be in the state of being registered in the PLMN.
- the UE may perform PLMN selection in the second network selection and select PLMN. More specifically, the UE selects PLMN in the second network selection based on the UE configuration information and / or the information received from the network and / or the UE mode and / or the UE capability information. You may. In addition, the UE will in the second network selection based on changes in the UE configuration information and / or information received from the network and / or UE mode changes and / or UE capability information. PLMN may be selected. Specifically, when the UE is not operating in the SNPN access mode, it may perform PLMN selection in the second network selection and select PLMN.
- the UE may transition to a state in which the SNPN access mode is not activated. Further, the UE may transition to a state in which the SNPN access mode is not activated when PLMN is selected in the second network selection.
- the UE may select PLMN based on the first network selection, connect to the selected PLMN, or implement both. Further, the UE may transition to the selected state of the PLMN or the state registered in the PLMN based on the first network selection.
- the UE may select a new PLMN based on the second network selection, move from the current PLMN to the new PLMN, or both. Furthermore, the UE may transition to the selected state of the new PLMN based on the second network selection, or may transition from the state registered in the current PLMN to the state registered in the new PLMN. good.
- the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode or from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the second network selection. You don't have to.
- the UE may transition to the 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of PLMN other than equal PLMN.
- the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of PLMN other than equal PLMN.
- the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of PLMN other than equal PLMN.
- the UE when the UE is not operating in the SNPN access mode, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of PLMN other than equal PLMN.
- the UE may transition only the 3GPP access status from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of PLMN other than equal PLMN.
- the UE does not have to transition to the 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of the PLMN which is the equal PLMN.
- the UE does not have to transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of PLMN which is an equal PLMN.
- the UE does not have to transition from the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to the 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of the PLMN which is an equal PLMN.
- the selection of a PLMN other than the equal PLMN may indicate that a PLMN that is not an equal PLMN with respect to the registered PLMN is selected as a new PLMN. Further, the selection of a PLMN other than the equal PLMN may mean that a PLMN that is not an equal PLMN with respect to the registered PLMN is selected as the new PLMN, and the UE is included in the selected new PLMN.
- the selection of the PLMN which is the equal PLMN may indicate that the PLMN in the list of equal PLMNs is selected as the new PLMN. Further, the selection of a PLMN that is an equal PLMN may mean that the PLMN in the list of equal PLMNs is selected as the new PLMN and the UE is included in the selected new PLMN. In other words, the selection of a PLMN that is an equal PLMN may mean that the PLMN contained in the list of equal PLMNs is selected as the new PLMN and the UE is included in the selected new PLMN.
- the UE may carry out behavior C or continue behavior A based on the second network registration.
- the UE may carry out behavior C based on the registration of PLMNs other than equal PLMNs.
- the UE may perform behavior C based on the registration of PLMNs other than the equal PLMN.
- the UE may continue behavior A based on the registration of the PLMN, which is an equal PLMN.
- the UE may continue behavior A based on the registration of the PLMN, which is an equal PLMN.
- the UE may continue behavior A based on the registration of the PLMN, which is an equal PLMN.
- behavior A may be the same as behavior A during the PDU session establishment procedure.
- the behavior C may be a behavior that lifts the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. ..
- behavior C recognizes that the prohibition on starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is lifted. May be.
- behavior C is a behavior that sets the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 to be lifted. May be.
- behavior C is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set is lifted. May be.
- behavior C may be a behavior that allows the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. Further, behavior C is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is allowed. You may. Further, behavior C is a behavior that is set to allow the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6. You may.
- behavior C is a behavior that sets a new PDU session establishment procedure to be started using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. good. Furthermore, behavior C is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure is permitted using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. You may.
- the UE may perform behavior D or continue behavior B based on the second network registration.
- the UE may carry out behavior D based on the registration of PLMNs other than equal PLMNs.
- the UE may perform the behavior D based on the registration of PLMNs other than the equal PLMN.
- the UE may continue the behavior B based on the registration of the PLMN which is the equal PLMN.
- the UE may continue behavior B based on the registration of the PLMN, which is an equal PLMN.
- behavior B may be the same as behavior B during the PDU session establishment procedure.
- the behavior D may be a behavior that lifts the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. ..
- behavior D recognizes that the prohibition on starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is lifted. May be.
- behavior D is a behavior that sets the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set to be lifted. May be.
- behavior D is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is lifted. May be.
- behavior D may be a behavior that allows the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. Further, behavior D is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is allowed. You may. Further, behavior D is a behavior that is set so that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is permitted. You may.
- behavior D is a behavior that sets a new PDU session establishment procedure to be started using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. good. Furthermore, behavior D is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure is permitted using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. You may.
- the registration of a PLMN other than the equal PLMN may indicate that the PLMN is registered in a new PLMN that is not the equal PLMN with respect to the registered PLMN. Further, registration of a PLMN that is an equal PLMN may indicate that it is registered in a new PLMN in the list of equal PLMNs.
- the same DNN may be the same DNN as the sent / received DNN in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the same DNN may be the same DNN that was included in the 12th identification information and sent / received in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure, or may be included in the 22nd identification information and sent / received. It may be the same DNN as the DNN.
- the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI transmitted / received in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the 13th identification information in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure, and the 23rd. It may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the identification information of.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure different from the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be another PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type.
- a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type.
- a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv4 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
- each device may perform processing based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment refusal message, or perform processing based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment refusal message. By doing so, the first procedure may be completed.
- the second procedure will be described with reference to FIG.
- the second procedure will be referred to as this procedure.
- the UE first makes the first network selection (S600). Then, based on the first network selection, the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration process (S602).
- each device performs the registration procedure initiated by the UE (S602).
- each device establishes a PDU session by performing the PDU session establishment procedure initiated by the UE (S604), and is in a state where communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN. Transition.
- each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session.
- each device may perform the RRC connection release procedure at any time (S606). Note that each device may proceed to the next step without performing the RRC connection release procedure.
- the UE makes a second network selection at any time (S608).
- the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure (S610) (S612).
- each device performs a UE-initiated registration procedure and / or a PDU session establishment procedure (S610) (S612).
- each device transitions to a state in which communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN based on the completion of the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure.
- each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session. With the above, the second procedure is completed.
- the UE may execute the second network selection based on the change in the state of the UE, or may execute the second network selection based on the change in the setting subscriber information of the UE. good.
- the UE may perform a second network selection based on changes in the UE settings, or may perform a second network selection based on the movement of the UE.
- the UE may perform a second network selection based on the receipt of a control message from the network, or may perform a second network selection based on instructions from the network.
- the control message may be a NAS message or a control message other than the NAS message.
- the control message may be a non-registration request message or a registration refusal message.
- the trigger for the UE to execute the second network selection is not limited to these.
- the UE may perform PLMN selection in the first network selection and select PLMN. More specifically, the UE selects PLMN in the first network selection based on the UE configuration information and / or the information received from the network and / or the UE mode and / or the UE capability information. You may. Specifically, when the UE is not operating in the SNPN access mode, it may perform PLMN selection in the first network selection and select PLMN.
- the UE may be registered with the PLMN based on the first network selection. In other words, the UE may transition to the PLMN registered state based on the first network selection. Further, in the second procedure, the UE may be registered with the PLMN after the completion of the first network selection. In other words, it may be in the state of being registered in the PLMN.
- the UE may perform SNPN selection in the second network selection and select SNPN. More specifically, the UE selects the SNPN in the second network selection based on the UE configuration information and / or the information received from the network and / or the UE mode and / or the UE capability information. You may. In addition, the UE will in the second network selection based on changes in the UE configuration information and / or information received from the network and / or UE mode changes and / or UE capability information. SNPN may be selected. Specifically, when operating in the SNPN access mode, the UE may perform SNPN selection and select SNPN instead of PLMN selection in the second network selection.
- the UE may transition to a state in which the SNPN access mode is not activated. Further, the UE may transition to the state in which the SNPN access mode is activated when SNPN is selected in the second network selection.
- the UE may select PLMN based on the first network selection, connect to the selected PLMN, or implement both. Further, the UE may transition to the selected state of the PLMN or the state registered in the PLMN based on the first network selection.
- the UE may select the SNPN based on the second network selection, move from the PLMN to the SNPN, or both. Further, the UE may transition to the selected state of the SNPN based on the second network selection, or may transition from the state registered in the PLMN to the state registered in the SNPN.
- the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the second network selection.
- the UE may transition to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN.
- the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN.
- the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN.
- the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN.
- the UE may transition only the 3GPP access status from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN.
- the selection of SNPN may indicate that a new SNPN is selected. Further, the selection of the SNPN may mean that a new SNPN is selected and the UE is included in the selected new SNPN.
- the UE may perform behavior C based on the second network registration.
- the UE may perform behavior C based on the registration to the new SNPN.
- the UE may perform behavior C based on its registration with the new SNPN.
- behavior A may be the same as behavior A during the PDU session establishment procedure.
- the behavior C may be a behavior that lifts the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. ..
- behavior C recognizes that the prohibition on starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is lifted. May be.
- behavior C is a behavior that sets the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 to be lifted. May be.
- behavior C is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set is lifted. May be.
- behavior C may be a behavior that allows the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. Further, behavior C is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is allowed. You may. Further, behavior C is a behavior that is set to allow the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6. You may.
- behavior C is a behavior that sets a new PDU session establishment procedure to be started using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. good. Furthermore, behavior C is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure is permitted using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. You may.
- the UE may perform behavior D based on the second network registration.
- the UE may perform behavior D based on registration with the new SNPN.
- the UE may perform behavior D based on its registration with the new SNPN.
- behavior B may be the same as behavior B during the PDU session establishment procedure.
- the behavior D may be a behavior that lifts the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. ..
- behavior D recognizes that the prohibition on starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is lifted. May be.
- behavior D is a behavior that sets the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set to be lifted. May be.
- behavior D is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is lifted. May be.
- behavior D may be a behavior that allows the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. Further, behavior D is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is allowed. You may. Further, behavior D is a behavior that is set so that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is permitted. You may.
- behavior D is a behavior that sets a new PDU session establishment procedure to be started using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. good. Furthermore, behavior D is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure is permitted using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. You may.
- registration to a new SNPN may indicate registration to a new SNPN.
- the same DNN may be the same DNN as the sent / received DNN in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the same DNN may be the same DNN that was included in the 12th identification information and sent / received in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure, or may be included in the 22nd identification information and sent / received. It may be the same DNN as the DNN.
- the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI transmitted / received in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the 13th identification information in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure, and the 23rd. It may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the identification information of.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure different from the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be another PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type.
- a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type.
- a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv4 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
- each device may perform processing based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment refusal message, or perform processing based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment refusal message. By doing so, the second procedure may be completed.
- the third procedure will be described with reference to FIG.
- the third procedure will be referred to as this procedure.
- the UE first makes the first network selection (S600). Then, based on the first network selection, the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration process (S602).
- each device performs the registration procedure initiated by the UE (S602).
- each device establishes a PDU session by performing the PDU session establishment procedure initiated by the UE (S604), and is in a state where communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN. Transition.
- each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session.
- each device may perform the RRC connection release procedure at any time (S606). Note that each device may proceed to the next step without performing the RRC connection release procedure.
- the UE makes a second network selection at any time (S608).
- the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure (S610) (S612).
- each device performs a UE-initiated registration procedure and / or a PDU session establishment procedure (S610) (S612).
- each device transitions to a state in which communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN based on the completion of the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure.
- each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session.
- the third procedure is completed.
- the UE may execute the second network selection based on the change in the state of the UE, or may execute the second network selection based on the change in the setting subscriber information of the UE. good.
- the UE may perform a second network selection based on changes in the UE settings, or may perform a second network selection based on the movement of the UE.
- the UE may perform a second network selection based on the receipt of a control message from the network, or may perform a second network selection based on instructions from the network.
- the control message may be a NAS message or a control message other than the NAS message.
- the control message may be a non-registration request message or a registration refusal message.
- the trigger for the UE to execute the second network selection is not limited to these.
- the UE may perform SNPN selection in the first network selection and select SNPN. More specifically, the UE selects the SNPN in the first network selection based on the UE configuration information and / or the information received from the network and / or the UE mode and / or the UE capability information. You may. Specifically, when operating in the SNPN access mode, the UE may perform SNPN selection instead of PLMN selection in the first network selection and select SNPN.
- the UE may be registered with the SNPN based on the first network selection. In other words, the UE may transition to the state registered in the SNPN based on the first network selection. Further, in the third procedure, the UE may be registered with the SNPN after the completion of the first network selection. In other words, it may be in the state of being registered in SNPN.
- the UE may perform PLMN selection in the second network selection and select PLMN. More specifically, the UE selects PLMN in the second network selection based on the UE configuration information and / or the information received from the network and / or the UE mode and / or the UE capability information. You may. In addition, the UE will in the second network selection based on changes in the UE configuration information and / or information received from the network and / or UE mode changes and / or UE capability information. PLMN may be selected. Specifically, when the UE is not operating in the SNPN access mode, it may perform PLMN selection in the second network selection and select PLMN.
- the UE may transition to the state in which the SNPN access mode is activated. Further, the UE may transition to a state in which the SNPN access mode is not activated when PLMN is selected in the second network selection.
- the UE may select an SNPN based on the first network selection, connect to the selected SNPN, or both. Further, the UE may transition to the selected state of the SNPN or the state registered in the SNPN based on the first network selection.
- the UE may select PLMN based on the second network selection, move from SNPN to PLMN, or both. Further, the UE may transition to the selected state of the PLMN based on the second network selection, or may transition from the state registered in the SNPN to the state registered in the PLMN.
- the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the second network selection.
- the UE may transition to the 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the PLMN selection.
- the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the PLMN selection.
- the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of PLMN.
- the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of PLMN.
- the UE may transition only the 3GPP access status from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the PLMN selection.
- the selection of PLMN may indicate that a new PLMN is selected. Further, the selection of PLMN may mean that a new PLMN is selected and the UE is included in the selected new PLMN.
- the UE may perform behavior C based on the second network registration.
- the UE may implement behavior C based on the registration in the new PLMN.
- behavior C based on the registration in the new PLMN.
- the UE may perform behavior C based on its registration on the new PLMN.
- behavior A may be the same as behavior A during the PDU session establishment procedure.
- the behavior C may be a behavior that lifts the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. ..
- behavior C recognizes that the prohibition on starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is lifted. May be.
- behavior C is a behavior that sets the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 to be lifted. May be.
- behavior C is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set is lifted. May be.
- behavior C may be a behavior that allows the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. Further, behavior C is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is allowed. You may. Further, behavior C is a behavior that is set to allow the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6. You may.
- behavior C is a behavior that sets a new PDU session establishment procedure to be started using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. good. Furthermore, behavior C is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure is permitted using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. You may.
- the UE may perform behavior D based on the second network registration.
- the UE may perform behavior D based on the registration in the new PLMN.
- the UE may perform behavior D based on its registration in the new PLMN.
- behavior B may be the same as behavior B during the PDU session establishment procedure.
- the behavior D may be a behavior that lifts the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. ..
- behavior D recognizes that the prohibition on starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is lifted. May be.
- behavior D is a behavior that sets the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set to be lifted. May be.
- behavior D is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is lifted. May be.
- behavior D may be a behavior that allows the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. Further, behavior D is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is allowed. You may. Further, behavior D is a behavior that is set so that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is permitted. You may.
- behavior D is a behavior that sets a new PDU session establishment procedure to be started using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. good. Furthermore, behavior D is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure is permitted using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. You may.
- registration to a new PLMN may indicate registration to a new PLMN.
- the same DNN may be the same DNN as the sent / received DNN in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the same DNN may be the same DNN that was included in the 12th identification information and sent / received in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure, or may be included in the 22nd identification information and sent / received. It may be the same DNN as the DNN.
- the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI transmitted / received in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the 13th identification information in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure, and the 23rd. It may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the identification information of.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure different from the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be another PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type.
- a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type.
- a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv4 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
- each device does not have to establish the PDU session.
- each device may perform processing based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment refusal message, or perform processing based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment refusal message.
- the third procedure may be completed.
- the fourth procedure will be described with reference to FIG.
- the fourth procedure is referred to as this procedure.
- the UE first makes the first network selection (S600). Then, based on the first network selection, the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration process (S602). Next, each device performs the registration procedure initiated by the UE (S602). Next, each device establishes a PDU session by performing the PDU session establishment procedure initiated by the UE (S604), and is in a state where communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN. Transition. Next, each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session.
- each device may perform the RRC connection release procedure at any time (S606). Note that each device may proceed to the next step without performing the RRC connection release procedure.
- the UE makes a second network selection at any time (S608).
- the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure (S610) (S612).
- each device performs a UE-initiated registration procedure and / or a PDU session establishment procedure (S610) (S612).
- each device transitions to a state in which communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN based on the completion of the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure.
- each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session. With the above, the fourth procedure is completed.
- the UE may execute the second network selection based on the change in the state of the UE, or may execute the second network selection based on the change in the setting subscriber information of the UE. good.
- the UE may perform a second network selection based on changes in the UE settings, or may perform a second network selection based on the movement of the UE.
- the UE may perform a second network selection based on the receipt of a control message from the network, or may perform a second network selection based on instructions from the network.
- the control message may be a NAS message or a control message other than the NAS message.
- the control message may be a non-registration request message or a registration refusal message.
- the trigger for the UE to execute the second network selection is not limited to these.
- the UE may perform SNPN selection in the first network selection and select SNPN. More specifically, the UE selects the SNPN in the first network selection based on the UE configuration information and / or the information received from the network and / or the UE mode and / or the UE capability information. You may. Specifically, when operating in the SNPN access mode, the UE may perform SNPN selection instead of PLMN selection in the first network selection and select SNPN.
- the UE may be registered with the SNPN based on the first network selection. In other words, the UE may transition to the state registered in the SNPN based on the first network selection. Further, in the fourth procedure, the UE may be registered with the SNPN after the completion of the first network selection. In other words, it may be in the state of being registered in SNPN.
- the UE may perform SNPN selection in the second network selection and select SNPN. More specifically, the UE selects the SNPN in the second network selection based on the UE configuration information and / or the information received from the network and / or the UE mode and / or the UE capability information. You may. In addition, the UE will in the second network selection based on changes in the UE configuration information and / or information received from the network and / or UE mode changes and / or UE capability information. SNPN may be selected. Specifically, when operating in the SNPN access mode, the UE may perform SNPN selection and select SNPN instead of PLMN selection in the second network selection.
- the UE may transition to the state in which the SNPN access mode is activated. Further, the UE may transition to the state in which the SNPN access mode is activated when SNPN is selected in the second network selection.
- the UE may select an SNPN based on the first network selection, connect to the selected SNPN, or both. Further, the UE may transition to the selected state of the SNPN or the state registered in the SNPN based on the first network selection.
- the UE may select a new SNPN based on the second network selection, move from the current SNPN to the new SNPN, or both. Furthermore, the UE may transition to the selected state of the new SNPN based on the second network selection, or may transition from the state registered in the current SNPN to the state registered in the new SNPN. good.
- the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode or from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the second network selection. You don't have to.
- the UE may transition to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN other than equal SNPN.
- the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN other than equal SNPN.
- the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN other than equal SNPN.
- the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN other than equal SNPN.
- the UE may transition only the 3GPP access status from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN other than equal SNPN.
- the UE does not have to transition to the 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of the SNPN which is the equal SNPN.
- the UE does not have to transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN which is an even SNPN.
- the UE does not have to transition from the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to the 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of the SNPN which is the equal SNPN.
- the UE when operating in the SNPN access mode, the UE does not have to transition from the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to the 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of the SNPN which is the equal SNPN.
- the selection of an SNPN other than the equal SNPN may indicate that the SNPN that is not the equal SNPN for the registered SNPN is selected as the new SNPN. Further, the selection of the SNPN other than the equal SNPN may mean that the SNPN that is not the equal SNPN to the registered SNPN is selected as the new SNPN, and the UE is included in the selected new SNPN.
- the selection of the SNPN which is the equal SNPN may indicate that the SNPN in the list of equal SNPNs is selected as the new SNPN. Further, the selection of the SNPN which is the equal SNPN may mean that the SNPN in the list of equal SNPNs is selected as the new SNPN and the UE is included in the selected new SNPN. In other words, the selection of an SNPN that is an equal SNPN may mean that the SNPN contained in the list of equal SNPNs is selected as the new SNPN and the UE is included in the selected new SNPN.
- the UE may carry out behavior C or continue behavior A based on the second network registration.
- the UE may perform behavior C based on the registration of SNPNs other than equal SNPNs.
- the UE may perform behavior C based on the registration of SNPNs other than equal SNPNs.
- the UE may continue the behavior A based on the registration of the SNPN which is the equal SNPN. In other words, if the UE is performing behavior A, it may continue behavior A based on the registration of the SNPN, which is an even SNPN.
- behavior A may be the same as behavior A during the PDU session establishment procedure.
- the behavior C may be a behavior that lifts the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. ..
- behavior C recognizes that the prohibition on starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is lifted. May be.
- behavior C is a behavior that sets the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 to be lifted. May be.
- behavior C is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set is lifted. May be.
- behavior C may be a behavior that allows the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. Further, behavior C is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is allowed. You may. Further, behavior C is a behavior that is set to allow the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6. You may.
- behavior C is a behavior that sets a new PDU session establishment procedure to be started using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. good. Furthermore, behavior C is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure is permitted using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. You may.
- the UE may perform behavior D or continue behavior B based on the second network registration.
- the UE may perform behavior D based on the registration of SNPNs other than equal SNPNs.
- behavior B when performing behavior B, the UE may perform behavior D based on the registration of SNPNs other than equal SNPNs.
- the UE may continue the behavior B based on the registration of the SNPN which is the equal SNPN.
- the UE may continue behavior B based on the registration of the SNPN, which is an even SNPN.
- behavior B may be the same as behavior B during the PDU session establishment procedure.
- the behavior D may be a behavior that lifts the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. ..
- behavior D recognizes that the prohibition on starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is lifted. May be.
- behavior D is a behavior that sets the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set to be lifted. May be.
- behavior D is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is lifted. May be.
- behavior D may be a behavior that allows the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. Further, behavior D is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is allowed. You may. Further, behavior D is a behavior that is set so that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is permitted. You may.
- behavior D is a behavior that sets a new PDU session establishment procedure to be started using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. good. Furthermore, behavior D is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure is permitted using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. You may.
- the registration of an SNPN other than the equal SNPN may indicate that the SNPN is registered in a new SNPN that is not the equal SNPN with respect to the registered SNPN. Further, registration of an SNPN that is an equal SNPN may indicate that it is registered in a new SNPN in the list of equal SNPNs.
- the same DNN may be the same DNN as the sent / received DNN in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the same DNN may be the same DNN that was included in the 12th identification information and sent / received in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure, or may be included in the 22nd identification information and sent / received. It may be the same DNN as the DNN.
- the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI transmitted / received in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the 13th identification information in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure, and the 23rd. It may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the identification information of.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure different from the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure may be another PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type.
- a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
- the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type.
- a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv4 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
- each device does not have to establish the PDU session.
- each device may perform processing based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment refusal message, or perform processing based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment refusal message.
- the fourth procedure may be completed.
- the program that operates on the apparatus according to the present invention may be a program that controls a Central Processing Unit (CPU) or the like to operate a computer so as to realize the functions of the embodiments according to the present invention.
- the program or the information handled by the program is temporarily stored in volatile memory such as Random Access Memory (RAM), non-volatile memory such as flash memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or other storage device system.
- volatile memory such as Random Access Memory (RAM), non-volatile memory such as flash memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or other storage device system.
- the program for realizing the function of the embodiment according to the present invention may be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. It may be realized by loading the program recorded on this recording medium into a computer system and executing it.
- the term "computer system” as used herein is a computer system built into a device and includes hardware such as an operating system and peripheral devices.
- the "computer-readable recording medium” is a semiconductor recording medium, an optical recording medium, a magnetic recording medium, a medium that dynamically holds a program for a short time, or another recording medium that can be read by a computer. Is also good.
- each functional block or various features of the device used in the above-described embodiment can be implemented or executed by an electric circuit, for example, an integrated circuit or a plurality of integrated circuits.
- Electrical circuits designed to perform the functions described herein can be general purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), or others.
- Programmable Logic Devices Discrete Gate or Transistor Logic, Discrete Hardware Components, or Combinations thereof.
- the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor, a conventional processor, a controller, a microcontroller, or a state machine.
- the electric circuit described above may be composed of a digital circuit or an analog circuit. Further, when an integrated circuit technology that replaces the current integrated circuit appears due to the progress of semiconductor technology, one or a plurality of aspects of the present invention can also use a new integrated circuit according to the technology.
- the invention of the present application is not limited to the above-described embodiment.
- an example of the device has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the stationary or non-movable electronic device installed indoors or outdoors, for example, an AV device or a kitchen device. , Cleaning / washing equipment, air conditioning equipment, office equipment, vending machines, and other terminal devices or communication devices such as living equipment.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
In a 5G system (5GS), control processing of User Equipment (UE) and control processing of a control device in a core network are unclear when the UE moves between public land mobile networks (PLMNs) and/or non-public networks (NPNs). Provided is a communication means for, in a 5G system (5GS), transitioning the state of User Equipment (UE) to a new state when the UE has moved between public land mobile networks (PLMNs), moved between non-public networks (NPNs), or moved between a PLMN and an NPN. Moreover, provided is a communication means for, in a 5GS, canceling a restriction of UE when the UE has moved between PLMNs, moved between NPNs, or moved between a PLMN and an NPN, the restriction having been executed by a control device in a core network.
Description
本開示は、UE(User Equipment)、及び通信制御方法に関する。本願は、2020年5月21日に日本で出願された特願2020-088865号に基づき優先権を主張し、その内容をここに援用する。
This disclosure relates to UE (User Equipment) and communication control method. This application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2020-088865 filed in Japan on May 21, 2020, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
3GPP(3rd Generation Partnership Project)では、次世代、すなわち第5世代(5G)の移動通信システムである5GS(5G System)のシステムアーキテクチャについての検討が開始されており、新しい手続きや新しい機能のサポートについて議論が行われている(非特許文献1、非特許文献2、非特許文献3、及び非特許文献4参照)。
The 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project) has begun studying the system architecture of the next generation, that is, the 5GS (5G System), which is the 5th generation (5G) mobile communication system, and will support new procedures and new functions. Discussions are taking place (see Non-Patent Document 1, Non-Patent Document 2, Non-Patent Document 3, and Non-Patent Document 4).
例えば、多種多様なサービスに応じた、継続的な移動通信サービスをサポートする為の通信手続きの最適化及び多様化や、通信手続きの最適化及び多様化に合わせたシステムアーキテクチャの最適化等も要求条件として挙げられている。
For example, optimization and diversification of communication procedures to support continuous mobile communication services for a wide variety of services, optimization of communication procedures, and optimization of system architecture according to diversification are also required. It is listed as a condition.
5GS(5G System)では、多種多様なサービスを提供するために、新たなコアネットワークである5GCN(5G Core Network)が検討されている。尚、5GSでは、公衆網であるPLMN (Public Land Mobile Network)とは別に定義された、NPN (Non-Public Network) のような、特定の利用者が特定の目的で利用することが可能な非公開ネットワークの提供と、非公開ネットワークを実現する為の機能も検討されている。
In 5GS (5G System), a new core network, 5GCN (5G Core Network), is being considered in order to provide a wide variety of services. In 5GS, it is not possible for a specific user to use it for a specific purpose, such as NPN (Non-Public Network), which is defined separately from the public network PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network). The provision of public networks and the functions for realizing private networks are also being considered.
しかし、UE(User Equipment)がNPNに登録された場合における、コアネットワークの制御装置の処理とUEの処理とは明確になっていない。
However, when the UE (User Equipment) is registered in the NPN, the processing of the control device of the core network and the processing of the UE are not clear.
本発明の一態様は、以上のような事情を鑑みてなされたものであり、その目的は、5GSにおける、UEがNPNに登録された際の、コアネットワークの制御装置の処理とUEの処理の実現方法を提供することである。
One aspect of the present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is the processing of the control device of the core network and the processing of the UE when the UE is registered in the NPN in 5GS. It is to provide a realization method.
本発明の一態様のUE(User Equipment;端末装置)は、下位レイヤから、RRC(Radio Resource Control)コネクションがサスペンドされたことを示すインディケーションを受信する送受信部と、前記インディケーションの受信に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED(5G Mobility Management CONNECTED) mode with RRC inactive indicationに遷移する制御部とを備え、前記UEがSNPN(Stand-alone Non-Public Network)に登録されている場合、前記制御部は、PLMN(Public land mobile network)の選択に基づいて、前記5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから、5GMM-IDLE(5G Mobility Management IDLE) modeに遷移する、ことを特徴とする。
The UE (User Equipment; terminal device) of one aspect of the present invention is based on a transmission / reception unit that receives an indication indicating that an RRC (Radio Resource Control) connection has been suspended from a lower layer, and a transmission / reception unit that receives the indication. When the UE is registered in the SNPN (Stand-alone Non-Public Network), the control unit is provided with a control unit that transitions to 5GMM-CONNECTED (5G Mobility Management CONNECTED) mode with RRC inactive indication. Based on the selection of PLMN (Public land mobile network), the transition from the above 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE (5G Mobility Management IDLE) mode is characterized.
本発明の一態様のUE(User Equipment;端末装置)の通信制御方法は、下位レイヤから、RRC(Radio Resource Control)コネクションがサスペンドされたことを示すインディケーションを受信するステップと、前記インディケーションの受信に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED(5G Mobility Management CONNECTED) mode with RRC inactive indicationに遷移するステップとを有し、前記UEがSNPN(Stand-alone Non-Public Network)に登録されている場合、前記UEは、PLMN(Public land mobile network)の選択に基づいて、前記5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから、5GMM-IDLE(5G Mobility Management IDLE) modeに遷移する、ことを特徴とする。
The UE (User Equipment; terminal device) communication control method of one aspect of the present invention includes a step of receiving an indication indicating that an RRC (Radio Resource Control) connection has been suspended from a lower layer, and a step of receiving the indication indicating that the RRC (Radio Resource Control) connection has been suspended. If the UE has a step to transition to 5GMM-CONNECTED (5G Mobility Management CONNECTED) mode with RRC inactive indication based on reception, and the UE is registered in the SNPN (Stand-alone Non-Public Network), the UE Is characterized by transitioning from the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to the 5GMM-IDLE (5G Mobility Management IDLE) mode based on the selection of PLMN (Public land mobile network).
本発明の一態様によれば、5GSにおいて、UEがPLMN間やNPN間の移動を行った際の、コアネットワーク内の制御装置の制御処理と、UEの制御処理とを実現することが可能となる。さらに、5GSにおいて、PLMNとSNPNとの間の移動を行った際の、コアネットワーク内の制御装置の制御処理と、UEの制御処理とを実現することも可能となる。
According to one aspect of the present invention, in 5GS, it is possible to realize the control process of the control device in the core network and the control process of the UE when the UE moves between PLMNs and NPNs. Become. Furthermore, in 5GS, it is also possible to realize the control processing of the control device in the core network and the control processing of the UE when moving between the PLMN and the SNPN.
図面を参照しながら、本発明を実施する為の最良の形態について、説明する。
The best mode for carrying out the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
[1. システムの概要]
まず、図1は、各実施形態で使用される移動通信システム1の概略を説明する為の図であり、図2は、その移動通信システム1の詳細構成を説明する為の図である。 [1. System overview]
First, FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining the outline of themobile communication system 1 used in each embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a detailed configuration of the mobile communication system 1.
まず、図1は、各実施形態で使用される移動通信システム1の概略を説明する為の図であり、図2は、その移動通信システム1の詳細構成を説明する為の図である。 [1. System overview]
First, FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining the outline of the
図1には、移動通信システム1は、UE_A10、アクセスネットワーク_A80、コアネットワーク_A90、PDN(Packet Data Network)_A5、アクセスネットワーク_B120、コアネットワーク_B190、DN(Data Network)_A6により構成されることが記載されている。
In FIG. 1, the mobile communication system 1 is composed of UE_A10, access network_A80, core network_A90, PDN (Packet Data Network) _A5, access network _B120, core network _B190, and DN (Data Network) _A6. It is stated that
以下では、これらの装置・機能について、UE、アクセスネットワーク_A、コアネットワーク_A、PDN、アクセスネットワーク_B、コアネットワーク_B、DN等のように、記号を省略して記載する場合がある。
In the following, these devices / functions may be described by omitting symbols such as UE, access network_A, core network_A, PDN, access network_B, core network_B, DN, etc. ..
また、図2には、UE_A10、E-UTRAN80、MME40、SGW35、PGW-U30、PGW-C32、PCRF60、HSS50、5G AN120、AMF140、UPF130、SMF132、PCF160、UDM150等の装置・機能、及びこれらの装置・機能を互いに接続するインターフェースが記載されている。
In addition, Fig. 2 shows the devices / functions of UE_A10, E-UTRAN80, MME40, SGW35, PGW-U30, PGW-C32, PCRF60, HSS50, 5GAN120, AMF140, UPF130, SMF132, PCF160, UDM150, etc. Interfaces that connect devices and functions to each other are described.
以下では、これらの装置・機能について、UE、E-UTRAN、MME、SGW、PGW-U、PGW-C、PCRF、HSS、5G AN、AMF、UPF、SMF、PCF、UDM等のように、記号を省略して記載する場合がある。
In the following, these devices / functions are referred to as UE, E-UTRAN, MME, SGW, PGW-U, PGW-C, PCRF, HSS, 5GAN, AMF, UPF, SMF, PCF, UDM, etc. May be omitted.
尚、4GシステムであるEPS(Evolved Packet System)は、アクセスネットワーク_A及びコアネットワーク_Aを含んで構成されるが、さらにUE及び/又はPDNが含まれても良い。また、5Gシステムである5GS(5G System)は、UE、アクセスネットワーク_B及びコアネットワーク_Bを含んで構成されるが、さらにDNが含まれても良い。
The EPS (Evolved Packet System), which is a 4G system, is configured to include an access network_A and a core network_A, but may further include a UE and / or a PDN. Further, the 5GS (5G System), which is a 5G system, is configured to include a UE, an access network_B, and a core network_B, but may further include a DN.
UEは、3GPPアクセス(3GPPアクセスネットワーク、3GPP ANとも称する)及び/又はnon-3GPPアクセス(non-3GPPアクセスネットワーク、non-3GPP ANとも称する)を介して、ネットワークサービスに対して接続可能な装置である。UEは、携帯電話やスマートフォン等の無線通信が可能な端末装置であってよく、EPSにも5GSにも接続可能な端末装置であってよい。UEは、UICC(Universal Integrated Circuit Card)やeUICC(Embedded UICC)を備えてもよい。尚、UEのことをユーザ装置と表現してもよいし、端末装置と表現してもよい。
UE is a device that can connect to network services via 3GPP access (3GPP access network, also called 3GPPAN) and / or non-3GPP access (non-3GPP access network, also called non-3GPPAN). be. The UE may be a terminal device capable of wireless communication such as a mobile phone or a smartphone, and may be a terminal device capable of connecting to EPS or 5GS. The UE may be equipped with a UICC (Universal Integrated Circuit Card) or an eUICC (Embedded UICC). The UE may be expressed as a user device or a terminal device.
また、アクセスネットワーク_Aは、E-UTRAN(Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network)及び/又は無線LANアクセスネットワークに対応する。E-UTRANには、1以上のeNB(evolved Node B)45が配置される。尚、以下では、eNB45は、eNBのように記号を省略して記載する場合がある。また、複数のeNBがある場合は、各eNBは、例えばX2インターフェースにより、互いに接続されている。また、無線LANアクセスネットワークには、1以上のアクセスポイントが配置される。
In addition, the access network_A corresponds to E-UTRAN (Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network) and / or wireless LAN access network. One or more eNB (evolved Node B) 45 are arranged in E-UTRAN. In the following, eNB45 may be described by omitting a symbol like eNB. If there are a plurality of eNBs, each eNB is connected to each other by, for example, an X2 interface. In addition, one or more access points are arranged in the wireless LAN access network.
また、アクセスネットワーク_Bは、5Gアクセスネットワーク(5G AN)に対応する。5G ANは、NG-RAN(NG Radio Access Network)及び/又はnon-3GPP アクセスネットワークで構成される。NG-RANには、1以上のgNB(NR NodeB)122が配置される。尚、以下では、gNB122は、eNBのように記号を省略して記載する場合がある。gNBは、NR(New Radio)ユーザプレーンと制御プレーンをUEに提供するノードであり、5GCNに対してNGインターフェース(N2インターフェース又はN3インターフェースを含む)を介して接続するノードである。すなわち、gNBは、5GSのために新たに設計された基地局装置であり、4GシステムであるEPSで使用されていた基地局装置(eNB)とは異なる機能を有する。また、複数のgNBがある場合は、各gNBは、例えばXnインターフェースにより、互いに接続している。
In addition, access network_B corresponds to 5G access network (5GAN). 5GAN is composed of NG-RAN (NG Radio Access Network) and / or non-3GPP access network. One or more gNB (NR Node B) 122s are placed in the NG-RAN. In the following, gNB122 may be described by omitting a symbol like eNB. The gNB is a node that provides the NR (New Radio) user plane and the control plane to the UE, and is a node that connects to the 5GCN via an NG interface (including an N2 interface or an N3 interface). That is, gNB is a base station device newly designed for 5GS and has a different function from the base station device (eNB) used in EPS, which is a 4G system. When there are a plurality of gNBs, each gNB is connected to each other by, for example, an Xn interface.
また、以下では、E-UTRANやNG-RANは、3GPPアクセスと称することがある。また、無線LANアクセスネットワークやnon-3GPP ANは、non-3GPPアクセスと称することがある。また、アクセスネットワーク_Bに配置されるノードを、まとめてNG-RANノードとも称することがある。
In the following, E-UTRAN and NG-RAN may be referred to as 3GPP access. In addition, wireless LAN access network and non-3GPP AN may be referred to as non-3GPP access. In addition, the nodes arranged in the access network_B may be collectively referred to as NG-RAN nodes.
また、以下では、アクセスネットワーク_A、及び/又はアクセスネットワーク_B、及び/又はアクセスネットワーク_Aに含まれる装置、及び/又はアクセスネットワーク_Bに含まれる装置は、アクセスネットワーク、又はアクセスネットワーク装置と称する場合がある。
In the following, the device included in the access network_A and / or the access network_B and / or the access network_A, and / or the device included in the access network_B is the access network or the access network device. May be called.
また、コアネットワーク_Aは、EPC(Evolved Packet Core)に対応する。EPCには、例えば、MME(Mobility Management Entity)、SGW(Serving Gateway)、PGW(Packet Data Network Gateway)-U、PGW-C、PCRF(Policy and Charging Rules Function)、HSS(Home Subscriber Server)等が配置される。
In addition, core network_A corresponds to EPC (Evolved Packet Core). EPC includes, for example, MME (Mobility Management Entity), SGW (Serving Gateway), PGW (Packet Data Network Gateway) -U, PGW-C, PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function), HSS (Home Subscriber Server), etc. Be placed.
また、コアネットワーク_Bは、5GCN(5G Core Network)に対応する。5GCNには、例えば、AMF(Access and Mobility Management Function)、UPF(User Plane Function)、SMF(Session Management Function)、PCF(Policy Control Function)、UDM(Unified Data Management)等が配置される。ここで、5GCNは、5GCと表現されてもよい。
In addition, core network_B corresponds to 5GCN (5G Core Network). For example, AMF (Access and Mobility Management Function), UPF (User Plane Function), SMF (Session Management Function), PCF (Policy Control Function), UDM (Unified Data Management) and the like are arranged in 5GCN. Here, 5GCN may be expressed as 5GC.
また、以下では、コアネットワーク_A、及び/又はコアネットワーク_B、コアネットワーク_Aに含まれる装置、及び/又はコアネットワーク_Bに含まれる装置は、コアネットワーク、又はコアネットワーク装置と称する場合がある。
In the following, the core network_A and / or the core network_B, the device included in the core network_A, and / or the device included in the core network_B are referred to as a core network or a core network device. There is.
コアネットワーク(コアネットワーク_A及び/又はコアネットワーク_B)は、アクセスネットワーク(アクセスネットワーク_A及び/又はアクセスネットワーク_B)と、PDN及び/又はDNとを接続した移動体通信事業者(Mobile Network Operator; MNO)が運用するIP移動通信ネットワークの事であってもよいし、移動通信システム1を運用、管理する移動体通信事業者の為のコアネットワークでもよいし、MVNO(Mobile Virtual Network Operator)、MVNE(Mobile Virtual Network Enabler)等の仮想移動通信事業者や仮想移動体通信サービス提供者の為のコアネットワークでもよい。
The core network (core network_A and / or core network_B) is a mobile network operator (Mobile) that connects the access network (access network_A and / or access network_B) with the PDN and / or DN. It may be an IP mobile communication network operated by Network Operator; MNO), it may be a core network for a mobile communication operator that operates and manages mobile communication system 1, or it may be an MVNO (Mobile Virtual Network Operator). ), MVNE (Mobile Virtual Network Enabler), etc. may be a core network for virtual mobile communication operators and virtual mobile communication service providers.
また、図1では、PDNとDNが同一である場合が記載されているが、異なっていても良い。PDNは、UEに通信サービスを提供するDN(Data Network)であってよい。尚、DNは、パケットデータサービス網として構成されてもよいし、サービス毎に構成されてもよい。さらに、PDNは、接続された通信端末を含んでもよい。従って、PDNと接続する事は、PDNに配置された通信端末やサーバ装置と接続する事であってもよい。さらに、PDNとの間でユーザデータを送受信する事は、PDNに配置された通信端末やサーバ装置とユーザデータを送受信する事であってもよい。尚、PDNのことをDNと表現してもよいし、DNのことをPDNと表現してもよい。
Also, in Fig. 1, the case where PDN and DN are the same is described, but they may be different. The PDN may be a DN (Data Network) that provides a communication service to the UE. The DN may be configured as a packet data service network or may be configured for each service. Further, the PDN may include a connected communication terminal. Therefore, connecting to the PDN may be connecting to a communication terminal or server device arranged in the PDN. Further, sending and receiving user data to and from the PDN may be sending and receiving user data to and from a communication terminal or server device arranged in the PDN. Note that PDN may be expressed as DN, and DN may be expressed as PDN.
また、以下では、アクセスネットワーク_A、コアネットワーク_A、PDN、アクセスネットワーク_B、コアネットワーク_B、DNの少なくとも一部、及び/又はこれらに含まれる1以上の装置を、ネットワーク又はネットワーク装置と呼称する場合がある。つまり、ネットワーク及び/又はネットワーク装置が、メッセージを送受信する、及び/又は手続きを実行するということは、アクセスネットワーク_A、コアネットワーク_A、PDN、アクセスネットワーク_B、コアネットワーク_B、DNの少なくとも一部、及び/又はこれらに含まれる1以上の装置が、メッセージを送受信する、及び/又は手続きを実行することを意味する。
In the following, access network_A, core network_A, PDN, access network_B, core network_B, at least a part of DN, and / or one or more devices included in these are referred to as a network or network device. May be called. That is, the fact that the network and / or the network device sends and receives messages and / or executes the procedure means that the access network_A, core network_A, PDN, access network_B, core network_B, and DN are used. It means that at least a part and / or one or more devices contained therein send / receive messages and / or perform procedures.
また、UEは、アクセスネットワークに接続することができる。また、UEは、アクセスネットワークを介して、コアネットワークと接続する事ができる。さらに、UEは、アクセスネットワーク及びコアネットワークを介して、PDN又はDNに接続する事ができる。すなわち、UEは、PDN又はDNとの間で、ユーザデータを送受信(通信)する事ができる。ユーザデータを送受信する際は、IP(Internet Protocol)通信だけでなく、non-IP通信を用いてもよい。
Also, the UE can connect to the access network. The UE can also connect to the core network via the access network. In addition, the UE can connect to the PDN or DN via the access network and core network. That is, the UE can send / receive (communicate) user data with the PDN or DN. When sending and receiving user data, not only IP (Internet Protocol) communication but also non-IP communication may be used.
ここで、IP通信とは、IPを用いたデータ通信の事であり、IPパケットにより、データの送受信が行われる。IPパケットは、IPヘッダとペイロード部で構成される。ペイロード部には、EPSに含まれる装置・機能や、5GSに含まれる装置・機能が送受信するデータが含まれてよい。また、non-IP通信とは、IPを用いないデータ通信の事であり、IPパケットの構造とは異なる形式により、データの送受信が行われる。例えば、non-IP通信は、IPヘッダが付与されていないアプリケーションデータの送受信によって実現されるデータ通信でもよいし、マックヘッダやEthernet(登録商標)フレームヘッダ等の別のヘッダを付与してUEが送受信するユーザデータを送受信してもよい。
Here, IP communication is data communication using IP, and data is transmitted and received by IP packets. An IP packet is composed of an IP header and a payload part. The payload section may include devices / functions included in EPS and data transmitted / received by devices / functions included in 5GS. In addition, non-IP communication is data communication that does not use IP, and data is transmitted and received in a format different from the structure of IP packets. For example, non-IP communication may be data communication realized by sending and receiving application data to which an IP header is not added, or a UE may add another header such as a Mac header or an Ethernet (registered trademark) frame header. User data to be sent and received may be sent and received.
[2. 各装置の構成]
次に、各実施形態で使用される各装置(UE、及び/又はアクセスネットワーク装置、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置)の構成について、図を用いて説明する。尚、各装置は、物理的なハードウェアとして構成されても良いし、汎用的なハードウェア上に構成された論理的な(仮想的な)ハードウェアとして構成されても良いし、ソフトウェアとして構成されても良い。また、各装置の持つ機能の少なくとも一部(全部を含む)が、物理的なハードウェア、論理的なハードウェア、ソフトウェアとして構成されても良い。 [2. Configuration of each device]
Next, the configuration of each device (UE and / or access network device and / or core network device) used in each embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Each device may be configured as physical hardware, may be configured as logical (virtual) hardware configured on general-purpose hardware, or may be configured as software. May be done. Further, at least a part (including all) of the functions of each device may be configured as physical hardware, logical hardware, or software.
次に、各実施形態で使用される各装置(UE、及び/又はアクセスネットワーク装置、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置)の構成について、図を用いて説明する。尚、各装置は、物理的なハードウェアとして構成されても良いし、汎用的なハードウェア上に構成された論理的な(仮想的な)ハードウェアとして構成されても良いし、ソフトウェアとして構成されても良い。また、各装置の持つ機能の少なくとも一部(全部を含む)が、物理的なハードウェア、論理的なハードウェア、ソフトウェアとして構成されても良い。 [2. Configuration of each device]
Next, the configuration of each device (UE and / or access network device and / or core network device) used in each embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Each device may be configured as physical hardware, may be configured as logical (virtual) hardware configured on general-purpose hardware, or may be configured as software. May be done. Further, at least a part (including all) of the functions of each device may be configured as physical hardware, logical hardware, or software.
尚、以下で登場する各装置・機能内の各記憶部(記憶部_A340、記憶部_A440、記憶部_B540、記憶部_A640、記憶部_B740)は、例えば、半導体メモリ、SSD(Solid State Drive)、HDD(Hard Disk Drive)等で構成されている。また、各記憶部は、出荷段階からもともと設定されていた情報だけでなく、自装置・機能以外の装置・機能(例えば、UE、及び/又はアクセスネットワーク装置、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置、及び/又はPDN、及び/又はDN)との間で、送受信した各種の情報を記憶する事ができる。また、各記憶部は、後述する各種の通信手続き内で送受信する制御メッセージに含まれる識別情報、制御情報、フラグ、パラメータ等を記憶することができる。また、各記憶部は、これらの情報をUE毎に記憶してもよい。また、各記憶部は、5GSとEPSとの間のインターワークをした場合には、5GS及び/又はEPS内に含まれる装置・機能との間で送受信した制御メッセージやユーザデータを記憶することができる。このとき、N26インターフェースを介して送受信されたものだけでなく、N26インターフェースを介さずに送受信されたものも記憶することができる。
In addition, each storage unit (storage unit_A340, storage unit_A440, storage unit_B540, storage unit_A640, storage unit_B740) in each device / function appearing below may be, for example, a semiconductor memory or SSD (semiconductor memory unit). It consists of Solid State Drive), HDD (Hard Disk Drive), etc. In addition, each storage unit has not only the information originally set from the shipping stage, but also devices / functions other than its own device / function (for example, UE and / or access network device, and / or core network device, and /. Or, various information transmitted / received to / from PDN and / or DN) can be stored. In addition, each storage unit can store identification information, control information, flags, parameters, and the like included in control messages transmitted and received in various communication procedures described later. Further, each storage unit may store such information for each UE. In addition, each storage unit may store control messages and user data sent and received between 5GS and / or devices / functions included in EPS when interwork is performed between 5GS and EPS. can. At this time, not only those transmitted / received via the N26 interface but also those transmitted / received without the N26 interface can be stored.
[2.1. UEの装置構成]
まず、UE(User Equipment)の装置構成例について、図3を用いて説明する。UEは、制御部_A300、アンテナ310、送受信部_A320、記憶部_A340で構成されている。制御部_A300、送受信部_A320、記憶部_A340は、バスを介して接続されている。送受信部_A320は、アンテナ310と接続している。 [2.1. UE device configuration]
First, an example of a UE (User Equipment) device configuration will be described with reference to FIG. The UE is composed of a control unit_A300, anantenna 310, a transmission / reception unit_A320, and a storage unit_A340. The control unit_A300, the transmission / reception unit_A320, and the storage unit_A340 are connected via a bus. The transmitter / receiver_A320 is connected to the antenna 310.
まず、UE(User Equipment)の装置構成例について、図3を用いて説明する。UEは、制御部_A300、アンテナ310、送受信部_A320、記憶部_A340で構成されている。制御部_A300、送受信部_A320、記憶部_A340は、バスを介して接続されている。送受信部_A320は、アンテナ310と接続している。 [2.1. UE device configuration]
First, an example of a UE (User Equipment) device configuration will be described with reference to FIG. The UE is composed of a control unit_A300, an
制御部_A300は、UE全体の動作・機能を制御する機能部である。制御部_A300は、必要に応じて、記憶部_A340に記憶されている各種プログラムを読み出して実行する事により、UEにおける各種の処理を実現する。
Control unit_A300 is a functional unit that controls the operation and functions of the entire UE. The control unit_A300 realizes various processes in the UE by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_A340 as needed.
送受信部_A320は、アンテナを介して、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局装置(eNB又はgNB)と無線通信する為の機能部である。すなわち、UEは、送受信部_A320を用いて、アクセスネットワーク装置、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置、及び/又はPDN、及び/又はDNとの間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。
The transmission / reception unit_A320 is a functional unit for wireless communication with the base station device (eNB or gNB) in the access network via the antenna. That is, the UE may send / receive user data and / or control information to / from the access network device and / or the core network device and / or the PDN and / or DN by using the transmission / reception unit_A320. can.
図2を参照して詳細に説明すると、UEは、送受信部_A320を用いることにより、LTE-Uuインターフェースを介して、E-UTRAN内の基地局装置(eNB)と通信することができる。また、UEは、送受信部_A320を用いることにより、5G AN内の基地局装置(gNB)と通信することができる。また、UEは、送受信部_A320を用いることにより、N1インターフェースを介してAMFとNAS(Non-Access-Stratum)メッセージの送受信をすることができる。ただし、N1インターフェースは論理的なものであるため、実際には、UEとAMFの間の通信は、5G ANを介して行われる。
Explaining in detail with reference to FIG. 2, the UE can communicate with the base station device (eNB) in the E-UTRAN via the LTE-Uu interface by using the transmission / reception unit_A320. In addition, the UE can communicate with the base station device (gNB) in the 5GAN by using the transmission / reception unit_A320. In addition, the UE can send and receive NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) messages to and from the AMF via the N1 interface by using the transmitter / receiver _A320. However, since the N1 interface is logical, communication between the UE and AMF is actually done via 5GAN.
記憶部_A340は、UEの各動作に必要なプログラム、ユーザデータ、制御情報等を記憶する為の機能部である。
The storage unit_A340 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of the UE.
[2.2. gNBの装置構成]
次に、gNBの装置構成例について、図4を用いて説明する。gNB は、制御部_B500、アンテナ510、ネットワーク接続部_B520、送受信部_B530、記憶部_B540で構成されている。制御部_B500、ネットワーク接続部_B520、送受信部_B530、記憶部_B540は、バスを介して接続されている。送受信部_B530は、アンテナ510と接続している。 [2.2. GNB device configuration]
Next, an example of the device configuration of gNB will be described with reference to FIG. The gNB is composed of a control unit_B500, anantenna 510, a network connection unit_B520, a transmission / reception unit_B530, and a storage unit_B540. The control unit_B500, network connection unit_B520, transmission / reception unit_B530, and storage unit_B540 are connected via a bus. The transmitter / receiver_B530 is connected to the antenna 510.
次に、gNBの装置構成例について、図4を用いて説明する。gNB は、制御部_B500、アンテナ510、ネットワーク接続部_B520、送受信部_B530、記憶部_B540で構成されている。制御部_B500、ネットワーク接続部_B520、送受信部_B530、記憶部_B540は、バスを介して接続されている。送受信部_B530は、アンテナ510と接続している。 [2.2. GNB device configuration]
Next, an example of the device configuration of gNB will be described with reference to FIG. The gNB is composed of a control unit_B500, an
制御部_B500は、gNB全体の動作・機能を制御する機能部である。制御部_B500は、必要に応じて、記憶部_B540に記憶されている各種プログラムを読み出して実行する事により、gNBにおける各種の処理を実現する。
Control unit_B500 is a functional unit that controls the operation and function of the entire gNB. The control unit_B500 realizes various processes in gNB by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_B540 as needed.
ネットワーク接続部_B520は、gNBが、AMF及び/又はUPFと通信する為の機能部である。すなわち、gNBは、ネットワーク接続部_B520を用いて、AMF及び/又はUPFとの間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。
The network connection part_B520 is a functional part for gNB to communicate with AMF and / or UPF. That is, the gNB can send and receive user data and / or control information to and from the AMF and / or the UPF using the network connection unit_B520.
送受信部_B530は、アンテナ510を介して、UEと無線通信する為の機能部である。すなわち、gNBは、送受信部_B530を用いて、UEとの間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。
The transmission / reception unit_B530 is a functional unit for wireless communication with the UE via the antenna 510. That is, the gNB can transmit / receive user data and / or control information to / from the UE by using the transmission / reception unit_B530.
図2を参照して詳細に説明すると、5G AN内にあるgNBは、ネットワーク接続部_B520を用いることにより、N2インターフェースを介して、AMFと通信することができ、N3インターフェースを介して、UPFと通信することができる。また、gNBは、送受信部_B530を用いることにより、UEと通信することができる。
To explain in detail with reference to FIG. 2, gNB in 5GAN can communicate with AMF via the N2 interface by using the network connection part_B520, and UPF via the N3 interface. Can communicate with. Further, the gNB can communicate with the UE by using the transmission / reception unit_B530.
記憶部_B540は、gNBの各動作に必要なプログラム、ユーザデータ、制御情報等を記憶する為の機能部である。
The storage unit_B540 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of gNB.
[2.3. AMFの装置構成]
次に、AMFの装置構成例について、図5を用いて説明する。AMFは、制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740で構成されている。制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740は、バスを介して接続されている。AMFは、制御プレーンを扱うノードであってよい。 [2.3. AMF device configuration]
Next, an example of the AMF device configuration will be described with reference to FIG. The AMF consists of a control unit_B700, a network connection unit_B720, and a storage unit_B740. The control unit_B700, network connection unit_B720, and storage unit_B740 are connected via a bus. The AMF may be a node that handles the control plane.
次に、AMFの装置構成例について、図5を用いて説明する。AMFは、制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740で構成されている。制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740は、バスを介して接続されている。AMFは、制御プレーンを扱うノードであってよい。 [2.3. AMF device configuration]
Next, an example of the AMF device configuration will be described with reference to FIG. The AMF consists of a control unit_B700, a network connection unit_B720, and a storage unit_B740. The control unit_B700, network connection unit_B720, and storage unit_B740 are connected via a bus. The AMF may be a node that handles the control plane.
制御部_B700は、AMF全体の動作・機能を制御する機能部である。制御部_B700は、必要に応じて、記憶部_B740に記憶されている各種プログラムを読み出して実行する事により、AMFにおける各種の処理を実現する。
Control unit_B700 is a functional unit that controls the operation and functions of the entire AMF. The control unit_B700 realizes various processes in AMF by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_B740 as needed.
ネットワーク接続部_B720は、AMFが、5G AN内の基地局装置(gNB)、及び/又はSMF、及び/又はPCF、及び/又はUDM、及び/又はSCEFと接続する為の機能部である。すなわち、AMFは、ネットワーク接続部_B720を用いて、5G AN内の基地局装置(gNB)、及び/又はSMF、及び/又はPCF、及び/又はUDM、及び/又はSCEFとの間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。
The network connection unit_B720 is a functional unit for AMF to connect to the base station equipment (gNB) in 5GAN and / or SMF, and / or PCF, and / or UDM, and / or SCEF. That is, the AMF uses the network connection _B720 to the user between the base station equipment (gNB) in 5GAN and / or the SMF and / or the PCF, and / or the UDM, and / or the SCEF. Data and / or control information can be sent and received.
図2を参照して詳細に説明すると、5GCN内にあるAMFは、ネットワーク接続部_A620を用いることにより、N2インターフェースを介して、gNBと通信することができ、N8インターフェースを介して、UDMと通信することができ、N11インターフェースを介して、SMFと通信することができ、N15インターフェースを介して、PCFと通信することができる。また、AMFは、ネットワーク接続部_A620を用いることにより、N1インターフェースを介して、UEとNASメッセージの送受信をすることができる。ただし、N1インターフェースは論理的なものであるため、実際には、UEとAMFの間の通信は、5G ANを介して行われる。また、AMFは、N26インターフェースをサポートする場合、ネットワーク接続部_A620を用いることにより、N26インターフェースを介して、MMEと通信することができる。
More specifically with reference to Figure 2, the AMF within the 5GCN can communicate with the gNB via the N2 interface by using the network connection _A620 and with the UDM via the N8 interface. It can communicate, it can communicate with the SMF via the N11 interface, and it can communicate with the PCF via the N15 interface. In addition, AMF can send and receive NAS messages to and from the UE via the N1 interface by using the network connection unit_A620. However, since the N1 interface is logical, communication between the UE and AMF is actually done via 5GAN. In addition, when the AMF supports the N26 interface, it can communicate with the MME via the N26 interface by using the network connection unit_A620.
記憶部_B740は、AMFの各動作に必要なプログラム、ユーザデータ、制御情報等を記憶する為の機能部である。
The storage unit_B740 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of AMF.
尚、AMFは、N2インターフェースを用いたRANとの制御メッセージを交換する機能、N1インターフェースを用いたUEとのNASメッセージを交換する機能、NASメッセージの暗号化及び完全性保護を行う機能、登録管理(Registration management; RM)機能、接続管理(Connection management; CM)機能、到達可能性管理(Reachability management)機能、UE等の移動性管理(Mobility management)機能、UEとSMF間のSM(Session Management)メッセージを転送する機能、アクセス認証(Access Authentication、Access Authorization)機能、セキュリティアンカー機能(SEA; Security Anchor Functionality)、セキュリティコンテキスト管理(SCM; Security Context Management)機能、N3IWF(Non-3GPP Interworking Function)に対するN2インターフェースをサポートする機能、N3IWFを介したUEとのNAS信号の送受信をサポートする機能、N3IWFを介して接続するUEの認証する機能等を有する。
AMF has a function to exchange control messages with RAN using N2 interface, a function to exchange NAS messages with UE using N1 interface, a function to encrypt and protect the integrity of NAS messages, and registration management. (Registration management; RM) function, connection management (CM) function, reachability management (Reachability management) function, mobility management (Mobility management) function such as UE, SM (Session Management) between UE and SMF N2 for message forwarding function, access authentication (Access Authorization, Access Authorization) function, security anchor function (SEA; Security Anchor Functionality), security context management (SCM; Security Context Management) function, N3IWF (Non-3GPP Interworking Function) It has a function to support an interface, a function to support transmission / reception of NAS signals with a UE via N3IWF, a function to authenticate a UE connected via N3IWF, and the like.
また、登録管理では、UEごとのRM状態が管理される。RM状態は、UEとAMFとの間で同期がとられていてもよい。RM状態としては、非登録状態(RM-DEREGISTERED state)と、登録状態(RM-REGISTERED state)がある。RM-DEREGISTERED状態では、UEはネットワークに登録されていないため、AMFにおけるUEコンテキストが、そのUEに対する有効な位置情報やルーティング情報を持っていない為、AMFはUEに到達できない状態である。また、RM-REGISTERED状態では、UEはネットワークに登録されているため、UEはネットワークとの登録が必要なサービスを受信することができる。尚、RM状態は、5GMM状態(5GMM state)と表現されてもよい。この場合、RM-DEREGISTERED状態は、5GMM-DEREGISTERED状態と表現されてもよいし、RM-REGISTERED状態は、5GMM-REGISTERED状態と表現されてもよい。
Also, in registration management, the RM status for each UE is managed. The RM state may be synchronized between the UE and AMF. The RM state includes a non-registered state (RM-DEREGISTERED state) and a registered state (RM-REGISTERED state). In the RM-DEREGISTERED state, the UE is not registered in the network, and the UE context in the AMF does not have valid location information or routing information for the UE, so the AMF cannot reach the UE. Also, in the RM-REGISTERED state, the UE is registered in the network, so the UE can receive services that require registration with the network. The RM state may be expressed as a 5GMM state. In this case, the RM-DEREGISTERED state may be expressed as the 5GMM-DEREGISTERED state, and the RM-REGISTERED state may be expressed as the 5GMM-REGISTERED state.
言い換えると、5GMM-REGISTEREDは、各装置が、5GMMコンテキストを確立した状態であってもよいし、PDUセッションコンテキストを確立した状態であってもよい。尚、各装置が5GMM-REGISTEREDである場合、UE_A10は、ユーザデータや制御メッセージの送受信を開始してもよいし、ページングに対して応答してもよい。さらに、尚、各装置が5GMM-REGISTEREDである場合、UE_A10は、初期登録のための登録手続き以外の登録手続き、及び/又はサービス要求手続きを実行してもよい。
In other words, 5GMM-REGISTERED may be in a state where each device has established a 5GMM context or a state in which a PDU session context has been established. When each device is 5GMM-REGISTERED, UE_A10 may start sending and receiving user data and control messages, or may respond to paging. Further, when each device is 5GMM-REGISTERED, UE_A10 may execute a registration procedure other than the registration procedure for initial registration and / or a service request procedure.
さらに、5GMM-DEREGISTEREDは、各装置が、5GMMコンテキストを確立していない状態であってもよいし、UE_A10の位置情報がネットワークに把握されていない状態であってもよいし、ネットワークがUE_A10に到達不能である状態であってもよい。尚、各装置が5GMM-DEREGISTEREDである場合、UE_A10は、登録手続きを開始してもよいし、登録手続きを実行することで5GMMコンテキストを確立してもよい。
Furthermore, in 5GMM-DEREGISTERED, each device may be in a state where the 5GMM context has not been established, the position information of UE_A10 may not be known to the network, or the network reaches UE_A10. It may be in an impossible state. If each device is 5GMM-DEREGISTERED, UE_A10 may start the registration procedure or establish the 5GMM context by executing the registration procedure.
また、接続管理では、UEごとのCM状態が管理される。CM状態は、UEとAMFとの間で同期がとられていてもよい。CM状態としては、非接続状態(CM-IDLE state)と、接続状態(CM-CONNECTED state)がある。CM-IDLE状態では、UEはRM-REGISTERED状態にあるが、N1インターフェースを介したAMFとの間で確立されるNASシグナリング接続(NAS signaling connection)を持っていない。また、CM-IDLE状態では、UEはN2インターフェースの接続(N2 connection)、及びN3インターフェースの接続(N3 connection)を持っていない。一方、CM-CONNECTED状態では、N1インターフェースを介したAMFとの間で確立されるNASシグナリング接続(NAS signaling connection)を持っている。また、CM-CONNECTED状態では、UEはN2インターフェースの接続(N2 connection)、及び/又はN3インターフェースの接続(N3 connection)を持っていてもよい。
Also, in connection management, the CM status for each UE is managed. The CM state may be synchronized between the UE and AMF. The CM state includes a non-connected state (CM-IDLE state) and a connected state (CM-CONNECTED state). In the CM-IDLE state, the UE is in the RM-REGISTERED state, but does not have a NAS signaling connection established with the AMF via the N1 interface. Also, in the CM-IDLE state, the UE does not have an N2 interface connection (N2 connection) or an N3 interface connection (N3 connection). On the other hand, in the CM-CONNECTED state, it has a NAS signaling connection established with AMF via the N1 interface. Further, in the CM-CONNECTED state, the UE may have an N2 interface connection (N2 connection) and / or an N3 interface connection (N3 connection).
さらに、接続管理では、3GPPアクセスにおけるCM状態と、non-3GPPアクセスにおけるCM状態とで分けて管理されてもよい。この場合、3GPPアクセスにおけるCM状態としては、3GPPアクセスにおける非接続状態(CM-IDLE state over 3GPP access)と、3GPPアクセスにおける接続状態(CM-CONNECTED state over 3GPP access)とがあってよい。さらに、non-3GPPアクセスにおけるCM状態としては、non-3GPPアクセスにおける非接続状態(CM-IDLE state over non-3GPP access)と、non-3GPPアクセスにおける接続状態(CM-CONNECTED state over non-3GPP access)とがあってよい。尚、非接続状態はアイドルモード表現されてもよく、接続状態モードはコネクテッドモードと表現されてもよい。
Furthermore, in connection management, the CM state in 3GPP access and the CM state in non-3GPP access may be managed separately. In this case, the CM state in 3GPP access may be a non-connected state in 3GPP access (CM-IDLE state over 3GPP access) and a connected state in 3GPP access (CM-CONNECTED state over 3GPP access). Furthermore, the CM state in non-3GPP access includes the non-connected state (CM-IDLE state over non-3GPP access) in non-3GPP access and the connection state (CM-CONNECTED state over non-3GPP access) in non-3GPP access. ) And so on. The disconnected state may be expressed as an idle mode, and the connected state mode may be expressed as a connected mode.
尚、CM状態は、5GMMモード(5GMM mode)と表現されてもよい。この場合、非接続状態は、5GMM非接続モード(5GMM-IDLE mode)と表現されてもよいし、接続状態は、5GMM接続モード(5GMM-CONNECTED mode)と表現されてもよい。さらに、3GPPアクセスにおける非接続状態は、3GPPアクセスにおける5GMM非接続モード(5GMM-IDLE mode over 3GPP access)と表現されてもよいし、3GPPアクセスにおける接続状態は、3GPPアクセスにおける5GMM接続モード(5GMM-CONNECTED mode over 3GPP access)と表現されてもよい。さらに、non-3GPPアクセスにおける非接続状態は、non-3GPPアクセスにおける5GMM非接続モード(5GMM-IDLE mode over non-3GPP access)と表現されてもよいし、non-3GPPアクセスにおける接続状態は、non-3GPPアクセスにおける5GMM接続モード(5GMM-CONNECTED mode over non-3GPP access)と表現されてもよい。尚、5GMM非接続モードはアイドルモード表現されてもよく、5GMM接続モードはコネクテッドモードと表現されてもよい。
The CM state may be expressed as 5GMM mode (5GMM mode). In this case, the non-connected state may be expressed as 5GMM non-connected mode (5GMM-IDLE mode), and the connected state may be expressed as 5GMM connected mode (5GMM-CONNECTED mode). Further, the non-connected state in 3GPP access may be expressed as 5GMM non-connected mode (5GMM-IDLE mode over 3GPP access) in 3GPP access, and the connected state in 3GPP access may be expressed as 5GMM connection mode (5GMM-) in 3GPP access. It may be expressed as CONNECTED mode over 3GPP access). Further, the non-connected state in non-3GPP access may be expressed as 5GMM non-connected mode (5GMM-IDLE mode over non-3GPP access) in non-3GPP access, and the connected state in non-3GPP access is non. -3GPP access may be expressed as 5GMM connection mode (5GMM-CONNECTED mode over non-3GPP access). The 5GMM non-connection mode may be expressed as an idle mode, and the 5GMM connection mode may be expressed as a connected mode.
また、AMFは、コアネットワーク_B内に1以上配置されてもよい。また、AMFは、1以上のNSI(Network Slice Instance)を管理するNFでもよい。また、AMFは、複数のNSI間で共有される共有CPファンクション(CCNF; Common CPNF(Control Plane Network Function))でもよい。
Also, one or more AMFs may be placed in the core network_B. In addition, AMF may be an NF that manages one or more NSIs (Network Slice Instances). Further, the AMF may be a shared CP function (CCNF; Common CPNF (Control Plane Network Function)) shared among a plurality of NSIs.
尚、N3IWFは、UEが5GSに対してnon-3GPPアクセスを介して接続する場合に、non-3GPPアクセスと5GCNとの間に配置される装置及び/又は機能である。
Note that N3IWF is a device and / or function that is placed between non-3GPP access and 5GCN when the UE connects to 5GS via non-3GPP access.
[2.4. SMFの装置構成]
次に、SMFの装置構成例について、図5を用いて説明する。SMFは、制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740で構成されている。制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740は、バスを介して接続されている。SMFは、制御プレーンを扱うノードであってよい。 [2.4. SMF device configuration]
Next, an example of the SMF device configuration will be described with reference to FIG. The SMF consists of a control unit_B700, a network connection unit_B720, and a storage unit_B740. The control unit_B700, network connection unit_B720, and storage unit_B740 are connected via a bus. The SMF may be a node that handles the control plane.
次に、SMFの装置構成例について、図5を用いて説明する。SMFは、制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740で構成されている。制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740は、バスを介して接続されている。SMFは、制御プレーンを扱うノードであってよい。 [2.4. SMF device configuration]
Next, an example of the SMF device configuration will be described with reference to FIG. The SMF consists of a control unit_B700, a network connection unit_B720, and a storage unit_B740. The control unit_B700, network connection unit_B720, and storage unit_B740 are connected via a bus. The SMF may be a node that handles the control plane.
制御部_B700は、SMF全体の動作・機能を制御する機能部である。制御部_B700は、必要に応じて、記憶部_B740に記憶されている各種プログラムを読み出して実行する事により、SMFにおける各種の処理を実現する。
Control unit_B700 is a functional unit that controls the operation and functions of the entire SMF. The control unit_B700 realizes various processes in the SMF by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_B740 as needed.
ネットワーク接続部_B720は、SMFが、AMF、及び/又はUPF、及び/又はPCF、及び/又はUDMと接続する為の機能部である。すなわち、SMFは、ネットワーク接続部_B720を用いて、AMF、及び/又はUPF、及び/又はPCF、及び/又はUDMとの間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。
The network connection part_B720 is a functional part for SMF to connect with AMF and / or UPF, and / or PCF, and / or UDM. That is, the SMF can send and receive user data and / or control information between the AMF and / or the UPF, and / or the PCF, and / or the UDM by using the network connection unit_B720.
図2を参照して詳細に説明すると、5GCN内にあるSMFは、ネットワーク接続部_A620を用いることにより、N11インターフェースを介して、AMFと通信することができ、N4インターフェースを介して、UPFと通信することができ、N7インターフェースを介して、PCFと通信することができ、N10インターフェースを介して、UDMと通信することができる。
More specifically with reference to Figure 2, the SMF within the 5GCN can communicate with the AMF via the N11 interface by using the network connection _A620 and with the UPF via the N4 interface. It can communicate, it can communicate with the PCF via the N7 interface, and it can communicate with the UDM via the N10 interface.
記憶部_B740は、SMFの各動作に必要なプログラム、ユーザデータ、制御情報等を記憶する為の機能部である。
The storage unit_B740 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of SMF.
SMFは、PDUセッションの確立・修正・解放等のセッション管理(Session Management)機能、UEに対するIPアドレス割り当て(IP address allocation)及びその管理機能、UPFの選択と制御機能、適切な目的地(送信先)へトラフィックをルーティングする為のUPFの設定機能、NASメッセージのSM部分を送受信する機能、下りリンクのデータが到着したことを通知する機能(Downlink Data Notification)、AMF経由でN2インターフェースを介してANに送信される、AN特有の(ANごとの)SM情報を提供する機能、セッションに対するSSCモード(Session and Service Continuity mode)を決定する機能、ローミング機能等を有する。
SMF has session management functions such as establishment / modification / release of PDU sessions, IP address allocation and management functions for UEs, UPF selection and control functions, and appropriate destinations (destination). ) UPF setting function for routing traffic, function for sending and receiving the SM part of NAS message, function for notifying that downlink data has arrived (Downlink Data Notification), AN via N2 interface via AMF It has a function to provide SM information peculiar to AN (for each AN) sent to, a function to determine the SSC mode (Session and Service Continuity mode) for the session, a roaming function, and the like.
[2.5. UPFの装置構成]
次に、UPFの装置構成例について、図5を用いて説明する。UPFは、制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740で構成されている。制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740は、バスを介して接続されている。UPFは、制御プレーンを扱うノードであってよい。 [2.5. UPF device configuration]
Next, an example of the UPF device configuration will be described with reference to FIG. The UPF consists of a control unit_B700, a network connection unit_B720, and a storage unit_B740. The control unit_B700, network connection unit_B720, and storage unit_B740 are connected via a bus. The UPF may be a node that handles the control plane.
次に、UPFの装置構成例について、図5を用いて説明する。UPFは、制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740で構成されている。制御部_B700、ネットワーク接続部_B720、記憶部_B740は、バスを介して接続されている。UPFは、制御プレーンを扱うノードであってよい。 [2.5. UPF device configuration]
Next, an example of the UPF device configuration will be described with reference to FIG. The UPF consists of a control unit_B700, a network connection unit_B720, and a storage unit_B740. The control unit_B700, network connection unit_B720, and storage unit_B740 are connected via a bus. The UPF may be a node that handles the control plane.
制御部_B700は、UPF全体の動作・機能を制御する機能部である。制御部_B700は、必要に応じて、記憶部_B740に記憶されている各種プログラムを読み出して実行する事により、UPFにおける各種の処理を実現する。
Control unit_B700 is a functional unit that controls the operation and functions of the entire UPF. The control unit_B700 realizes various processes in the UPF by reading and executing various programs stored in the storage unit_B740 as needed.
ネットワーク接続部_B720は、UPFが、5G AN内の基地局装置(gNB)、及び/又はSMF、及び/又はDNと接続する為の機能部である。すなわち、UPFは、ネットワーク接続部_B720を用いて、5G AN内の基地局装置(gNB)、及び/又はSMF、及び/又はDNとの間で、ユーザデータ及び/又は制御情報を送受信することができる。
The network connection unit_B720 is a functional unit for the UPF to connect to the base station device (gNB) and / or SMF and / or DN in 5GAN. That is, the UPF uses the network connection _B720 to send and receive user data and / or control information between the base station equipment (gNB) in 5GAN and / or the SMF and / or the DN. Can be done.
図2を参照して詳細に説明すると、5GCN内にあるUPFは、ネットワーク接続部_A620を用いることにより、N3インターフェースを介して、gNBと通信することができ、N4インターフェースを介して、SMFと通信することができ、N6インターフェースを介して、DNと通信することができ、N9インターフェースを介して、他のUPFと通信することができる。
More specifically with reference to Figure 2, the UPF within the 5GCN can communicate with the gNB via the N3 interface by using the network connection _A620 and with the SMF via the N4 interface. It can communicate, it can communicate with the DN via the N6 interface, and it can communicate with other UPFs via the N9 interface.
記憶部_B740は、UPFの各動作に必要なプログラム、ユーザデータ、制御情報等を記憶する為の機能部である。
The storage unit_B740 is a functional unit for storing programs, user data, control information, etc. required for each operation of UPF.
UPFは、intra-RAT mobility又はinter-RAT mobilityに対するアンカーポイントとしての機能、DNに相互接続するための外部PDUセッションポイントとしての機能(つまり、DNとコアネットワーク_Bとの間のゲートウェイとして、ユーザデータを転送する機能)、パケットのルーティング及び転送する機能、1つのDNに対して複数のトラフィックフローのルーティングをサポートするUL CL(Uplink Classifier)機能、マルチホーム(multi-homed)PDUセッションをサポートするBranching point機能、user planeに対するQoS (Quality of Service) 処理機能、上りリンクトラフィックの検証機能、下りリンクパケットのバッファリング、下りリンクデータ通知(Downlink Data Notification)をトリガする機能等を有する。
The UPF acts as an anchor point for intra-RAT mobility or inter-RAT mobility, as an external PDU session point for interconnecting the DN (ie, as a gateway between the DN and the core network_B). Data forwarding function), packet routing and forwarding function, ULCL (Uplink Classifier) function that supports routing of multiple traffic flows to one DN, and multi-homed PDU session support. It has a branching point function, a QoS (Quality of Service) processing function for userplane, a function for verifying uplink traffic, a function for buffering downlink packets, and a function for triggering downlink data notification (Downlink Data Notification).
また、UPFは、IP通信及び/又はnon-IP通信の為のゲートウェイでもよい。また、UPFは、IP通信を転送する機能を持ってもよく、non-IP通信とIP通信を変換する機能を持っていてもよい。さらに複数配置されるゲートウェイは、コアネットワーク_Bと単一のDNを接続するゲートウェイでもよい。尚、UPFは、他のNFとの接続性を備えてもよく、他のNFを介して各装置に接続してもよい。
The UPF may also be a gateway for IP communication and / or non-IP communication. In addition, the UPF may have a function of transferring IP communication, or may have a function of converting non-IP communication and IP communication. Further, the multiple gateways may be a gateway connecting the core network_B and a single DN. The UPF may have connectivity with other NFs, or may be connected to each device via the other NFs.
尚、ユーザプレーン(user plane)は、UEとネットワークとの間で送受信されるユーザデータ(user data)のことである。ユーザプレーンは、PDNコネクション、又はPDUセッションを用いて送受信されてもよい。さらに、EPSの場合、ユーザプレーンは、LTE-Uuインターフェース、及び/又はS1-Uインターフェース、及び/又はS5インターフェース、及び/又はS8インターフェース、及び/又はSGiインターフェースを用いて送受信されてもよい。さらに、5GSの場合、ユーザプレーンは、UEとNG RANとの間のインターフェース、及び/又はN3インターフェース、及び/又はN9インターフェース、及び/又はN6インターフェースを介して送受信されてもよい。以下、ユーザプレーンは、U-Planeと表現されてもよい。
The user plane is user data transmitted and received between the UE and the network. The user plane may be transmitted and received using a PDN connection or a PDU session. Further, in the case of EPS, the user plane may be transmitted and received using the LTE-Uu interface and / or the S1-U interface and / or the S5 interface and / or the S8 interface and / or the SGi interface. Further, in the case of 5GS, the user plane may be transmitted and received via the interface between the UE and NG RAN and / or the N3 interface and / or the N9 interface and / or the N6 interface. Hereinafter, the user plane may be expressed as a U-Plane.
さらに、制御プレーン(control plane)は、UEの通信制御等を行うために送受信される制御メッセージのことである。制御プレーンは、UEとMMEとの間のNAS (Non-Access-Stratum)シグナリングコネクションを用いて送受信されてもよい。さらに、EPSの場合、制御プレーンは、LTE-Uuインターフェース、及びS1-MMEインターフェースを用いて送受信されてもよい。さらに、5GSの場合、制御プレーンは、UEとNG RANとの間のインターフェース、及びN2インターフェースを用いて送受信されてもよい。以下、制御プレーンは、コントロールプレーンと表現されてもよいし、C-Planeと表現されてもよい。
Furthermore, the control plane is a control message sent and received to control the communication of the UE. The control plane may be transmitted and received using a NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) signaling connection between the UE and the MME. Further, in the case of EPS, the control plane may be transmitted and received using the LTE-Uu interface and the S1-MME interface. Further, in the case of 5GS, the control plane may be transmitted / received using the interface between the UE and NG RAN and the N2 interface. Hereinafter, the control plane may be expressed as a control plane or a C-Plane.
さらに、U-Plane(User Plane; UP)は、ユーザデータを送受信する為の通信路でもよく、複数のベアラで構成されてもよい。さらに、C-Plane(Control Plane; CP)は、制御メッセージを送受信する為の通信路でもよく、複数のベアラで構成されてもよい。
Furthermore, the U-Plane (User Plane; UP) may be a communication path for transmitting and receiving user data, and may be composed of a plurality of bearers. Further, the C-Plane (Control Plane; CP) may be a communication path for transmitting and receiving control messages, and may be composed of a plurality of bearers.
[2.6. その他の装置及び/又は機能の説明]
次に、その他の装置及び/又は機能について説明を行う。 [2.6. Explanation of other devices and / or functions]
Next, other devices and / or functions will be described.
次に、その他の装置及び/又は機能について説明を行う。 [2.6. Explanation of other devices and / or functions]
Next, other devices and / or functions will be described.
PCFは、ポリシールールを提供する機能等を有する。
PCF has a function to provide policy rules.
また、UDMは、認証情報処理(Authentication credential processing)機能、ユーザ識別処理機能、アクセス認証機能、登録/移動性管理機能、加入者情報の管理(subscription management)機能等を有する。
In addition, UDM has an authentication information processing function, a user identification processing function, an access authentication function, a registration / mobility management function, a subscriber information management function, and the like.
また、PCRFは、PGW及び/又はPDNに接続されており、データ配送に対するQoS管理を行う機能等を有する。例えば、UE_A10とPDN間の通信路のQoSの管理を行う。さらに、PCRFは、各装置がユーザデータを送受信する際に用いるPCC(Policy and Charging Control)ルール、及び/又はルーティングルールを作成、及び/又は管理する装置でもよい。
In addition, PCRF is connected to PGW and / or PDN, and has a function of performing QoS management for data delivery. For example, it manages the QoS of the communication path between UE_A10 and PDN. Further, the PCRF may be a device for creating and / or managing PCC (Policy and Charging Control) rules and / or routing rules used by each device when transmitting and receiving user data.
また、HSSは、MME及び/又はSCEFに接続されており、加入者情報の管理を行う機能等を有する。HSSの加入者情報は、例えばMMEのアクセス制御の際に参照される。さらに、HSSは、MMEとは異なる位置管理装置と接続されていてもよい。
In addition, HSS is connected to MME and / or SCEF, and has a function to manage subscriber information. HSS subscriber information is referred to, for example, when controlling access to MME. In addition, the HSS may be connected to a location management device different from the MME.
また、SCEFは、DN及び/又はPDNとMMEとHSSとに接続されており、DN及び/又はPDNとコアネットワーク_Aとを繋ぐゲートウェイとしてユーザデータの転送を行う中継装置としての機能等を有する。尚、SCEFは、non-IP通信の為のゲートウェイでもよい。さらに、SCEFは、non-IP通信とIP通信を変換する機能を持っていてもよい。また、こうしたゲートウェイはコアネットワーク_Aに複数配置されてよい。SCEFはコアネットワークの外側に構成されてもよいし、内側に構成されてもよい。
In addition, SCEF is connected to DN and / or PDN, MME and HSS, and has a function as a relay device that transfers user data as a gateway connecting DN and / or PDN and core network_A. .. SCEF may be a gateway for non-IP communication. Furthermore, SCEF may have a function of converting non-IP communication and IP communication. Also, multiple such gateways may be located in the core network_A. The SCEF may be configured outside or inside the core network.
[3. 各実施形態で用いられる用語・識別情報、手続きの説明]
各実施形態で、少なくとも1つは用いられる用語・識別情報、手続きを予め説明する。 [3. Terminology / identification information used in each embodiment, explanation of procedure]
In each embodiment, at least one term / identification information and procedure to be used will be explained in advance.
各実施形態で、少なくとも1つは用いられる用語・識別情報、手続きを予め説明する。 [3. Terminology / identification information used in each embodiment, explanation of procedure]
In each embodiment, at least one term / identification information and procedure to be used will be explained in advance.
[3.1. 各実施形態で用いられる用語・識別情報の説明]
まず、各実施形態で用いられる、専門性の高い用語や、手続きで使用される識別情報について、予め説明する。 [3.1. Explanation of terms and identification information used in each embodiment]
First, highly specialized terms used in each embodiment and identification information used in the procedure will be described in advance.
まず、各実施形態で用いられる、専門性の高い用語や、手続きで使用される識別情報について、予め説明する。 [3.1. Explanation of terms and identification information used in each embodiment]
First, highly specialized terms used in each embodiment and identification information used in the procedure will be described in advance.
ネットワークとは、アクセスネットワーク_B、コアネットワーク_B、DNのうち、少なくとも一部を指す。また、アクセスネットワーク_B、コアネットワーク_B、DNのうち、少なくとも一部に含まれる1以上の装置を、ネットワーク又はネットワーク装置と称してもよい。つまり、ネットワークがメッセージの送受信及び/又は処理を実行するということは、ネットワーク内の装置(ネットワーク装置、及び/又は制御装置)がメッセージの送受信及び/又は処理を実行することを意味してもよい。逆に、ネットワーク内の装置がメッセージの送受信及び/又は処理を実行するということは、ネットワークがメッセージの送受信及び/又は処理を実行することを意味してもよい。
The network refers to at least a part of the access network_B, core network_B, and DN. Further, one or more devices included in at least a part of the access network_B, the core network_B, and the DN may be referred to as a network or a network device. That is, the fact that the network performs transmission / reception and / or processing of messages may mean that devices (network devices and / or control devices) in the network execute message transmission / reception and / or processing. .. Conversely, the fact that a device in the network performs transmission / reception and / or processing of a message may mean that the network executes transmission / reception and / or processing of a message.
さらに、ネットワークは、PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network)を指してもよいし、後述するNPNを指してもよい。さらに、UEがネットワーク選択を行うと表現した場合、UEがPLMN選択を行うことを示してもよいし、UEがSNPN選択を行うことを示してもよい。
Furthermore, the network may refer to PLMN (Public Land Mobile Network) or NPN, which will be described later. Further, when it is expressed that the UE makes a network selection, it may indicate that the UE makes a PLMN selection, or it may indicate that the UE makes an SNPN selection.
また、登録PLMN (registered PLMN) は、UEが登録されているPLMNのことである。
Also, the registered PLMN (registered PLMN) is the PLMN in which the UE is registered.
また、均等PLMN (equivalent PLMN) は、ネットワークで任意のPLMNと同じPLMNであるように扱われるPLMNのことである。例えば、均等PLMNは、登録PLMNと同じように扱われる、一又は複数のPLMNであってもよい。
Equivalent PLMN is a PLMN that is treated as if it were the same PLMN as any PLMN in the network. For example, an equal PLMN may be one or more PLMNs treated the same as a registered PLMN.
また、SM(セッションマネジメント)メッセージ(NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) SMメッセージとも称する)は、SMのための手続きで用いられるNASメッセージであってよく、AMF_A240を介してUE_A10とSMF_A230の間で送受信される制御メッセージであってよい。さらに、SMメッセージには、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ、PDUセッション完了メッセージ、PDUセッション拒絶メッセージ、PDUセッション変更要求メッセージ、PDUセッション変更受諾メッセージ、PDUセッション変更応答メッセージ等が含まれてもよい。また、SMのための手続きには、PDUセッション確立手続きが含まれてもよい。
The SM (session management) message (also referred to as NAS (Non-Access-Stratum) SM message) may be a NAS message used in the procedure for SM, and is sent and received between UE_A10 and SMF_A230 via AMF_A240. It may be a control message to be performed. In addition, SM messages include PDU session establishment request messages, PDU session establishment acceptance messages, PDU session completion messages, PDU session rejection messages, PDU session change request messages, PDU session change acceptance messages, PDU session change response messages, and the like. You may. The procedure for SM may also include a PDU session establishment procedure.
また、5GS (5G System) サービスは、コアネットワーク_B190を用いて提供される接続サービスでよい。さらに、5GSサービスは、EPSサービスと異なるサービスでもよいし、EPSサービスと同様のサービスでもよい。
Also, the 5GS (5G System) service may be a connection service provided using the core network_B190. Further, the 5GS service may be a service different from the EPS service or a service similar to the EPS service.
また、non 5GSサービスは、5GSサービス以外のサービスでよく、EPSサービス、及び/又はnon EPSサービスが含まれてもよい。
Further, the non5GS service may be a service other than the 5GS service, and may include an EPS service and / or a non-EPS service.
また、シングルレジストレーションモードは、UE_A10が、N1モードとS1モードが利用可能な場合に、5GMM状態とEMM状態に対して、共通の登録状態を維持するモードである。
In addition, the single registration mode is a mode in which UE_A10 maintains a common registration state for the 5GMM state and EMM state when N1 mode and S1 mode are available.
また、デュアルレジストレーションモードは、UE_A10が、N1モードとS1モードが利用可能な場合に、5GMM状態とEMM状態とを独立して登録状態を維持するモードである。尚、UE_A10は、デュアルレジストレーションモードの場合、N1モードのみでネットワークに登録(つまり5GCだけに登録)されていてもよいし、S1モードのみでネットワークに登録(EPCだけに登録)されていてもよいし、N1モードとS1モードの両方でネットワークに登録(5GCとEPCの両方に登録)されていてもよい。
In addition, the dual registration mode is a mode in which UE_A10 maintains the registered state independently of the 5GMM state and the EMM state when the N1 mode and the S1 mode are available. In the case of dual registration mode, UE_A10 may be registered in the network only in N1 mode (that is, registered only in 5GC), or may be registered in the network only in S1 mode (registered only in EPC). Alternatively, it may be registered in the network (registered in both 5GC and EPC) in both N1 mode and S1 mode.
また、5GSとEPCとのインターワークするために、5GCとEPC NASの両方をサポートするUEは、シングルレジストレーションモード、又はデュアルレジストレーションモードで動作することができる。
Also, in order to interwork between 5GS and EPC, UEs that support both 5GC and EPC NAS can operate in single registration mode or dual registration mode.
また、S1モードは、UE_A10に対して、E-UTRANを介したEPCへのアクセスを許可したモードである。言い換えると、S1モードは、S1インターフェースを用いたメッセージの送受信が実行されるモードであってもよい。尚、S1インターフェースは、S1-MMEインターフェース及びS1-Uインターフェースで構成されて良い。
In addition, S1 mode is a mode that allows UE_A10 to access EPC via E-UTRAN. In other words, the S1 mode may be a mode in which messages are sent and received using the S1 interface. The S1 interface may be composed of an S1-MME interface and an S1-U interface.
また、N1モードは、UE_A10に対して、5Gアクセスネットワークを介した5GCへのアクセスを許可したモードである。言い換えると、N1モードは、N1インターフェースを用いたメッセージの送受信が実行されるモードであってもよい。
In addition, N1 mode is a mode that allows UE_A10 to access 5GC via a 5G access network. In other words, the N1 mode may be a mode in which messages are sent and received using the N1 interface.
また、APN (Access Point Name) は、コアネットワーク及び/又はPDN等の外部ネットワークを識別する識別情報でよい。さらに、APNは、コアネットワークA_90を接続するPGW_A30/UPF_A235等のゲートウェイを選択する情報として用いることもできる。
Further, APN (Access Point Name) may be identification information that identifies the core network and / or the external network such as PDN. Furthermore, the APN can also be used as information for selecting a gateway such as PGW_A30 / UPF_A235 to connect the core network A_90.
また、PDN (Packet Data Network) タイプとは、PDNコネクションのタイプを示すものであり、IPv4、IPv6、IPv4v6、non-IPがある。IPv4が指定された場合、IPv4を用いてデータの送受信を行う事を示す。IPv6が指定された場合は、IPv6を用いてデータの送受信を行う事を示す。IPv4v6が指定された場合は、IPv4又はIPv6を用いてデータの送受信を行う事を示す。non-IPが指定された場合は、IPを用いた通信ではなく、IP以外の通信方法によって通信する事を示す。
The PDN (Packet Data Network) type indicates the type of PDN connection, and includes IPv4, IPv6, IPv4v6, and non-IP. When IPv4 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv4. When IPv6 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv6. When IPv4v6 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv4 or IPv6. When non-IP is specified, it indicates that communication is performed by a communication method other than IP, not communication using IP.
また、PDU (Protocol Data Unit/Packet Data Unit) セッションとは、PDU接続性サービスを提供するDNとUEとの間の関連性として定義することができるが、UEと外部ゲートウェイとの間で確立される接続性であってもよい。UEは、5GSにおいて、アクセスネットワーク_B及びコアネットワーク_Bを介したPDUセッションを確立することにより、PDUセッションを用いて、DNとの間のユーザデータの送受信を行うことができる。ここで、この外部ゲートウェイとは、UPF、SCEF等であってよい。UEは、PDUセッションを用いて、DNに配置されるアプリケーションサーバー等の装置と、ユーザデータの送受信を実行する事ができる。
A PDU (Protocol Data Unit / Packet Data Unit) session can be defined as a relationship between a DN that provides a PDU connectivity service and a UE, but it is established between the UE and an external gateway. It may be connectivity. By establishing a PDU session via the access network_B and the core network_B in 5GS, the UE can send and receive user data to and from the DN using the PDU session. Here, the external gateway may be UPF, SCEF, or the like. The UE can use the PDU session to send and receive user data to and from devices such as application servers located on the DN.
尚、各装置(UE、及び/又はアクセスネットワーク装置、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置)は、PDUセッションに対して、1以上の識別情報を対応づけて管理してもよい。尚、これらの識別情報には、DNN、QoSルール、PDUセッションタイプ、アプリケーション識別情報、NSI識別情報、アクセスネットワーク識別情報、及びSSC modeのうち1以上が含まれてもよいし、その他の情報がさらに含まれてもよい。さらに、PDUセッションを複数確立する場合には、PDUセッションに対応づけられる各識別情報は、同じ内容でもよいし、異なる内容でもよい。
Note that each device (UE and / or access network device and / or core network device) may manage one or more identification information in association with each PDU session. It should be noted that these identification information may include one or more of DNN, QoS rule, PDU session type, application identification information, NSI identification information, access network identification information, and SSC mode, and other information. It may be further included. Further, when a plurality of PDU sessions are established, the identification information associated with the PDU session may have the same content or different contents.
また、DNN (Data Network Name) は、コアネットワーク及び/又はDN等の外部ネットワークを識別する識別情報でよい。さらに、DNNは、コアネットワークB190を接続するPGW_A30/UPF_A235等のゲートウェイを選択する情報として用いることもできる。さらに、DNNは、APN(Access Point Name)に相当するものでもよい。
Further, DNN (Data Network Name) may be identification information that identifies the core network and / or the external network such as DN. Furthermore, DNN can also be used as information for selecting a gateway such as PGW_A30 / UPF_A235 to connect the core network B190. Further, the DNN may correspond to an APN (Access Point Name).
また、PDU (Protocol Data Unit/Packet Data Unit) セッションタイプは、PDUセッションのタイプを示すものであり、IPv4、IPv6、Ethernet、Unstructuredがある。IPv4が指定された場合、IPv4を用いてデータの送受信を行うことを示す。IPv6が指定された場合は、IPv6を用いてデータの送受信を行うことを示す。Ethernetが指定された場合は、Ethernetフレームの送受信を行うことを示す。また、Ethernetは、IPを用いた通信を行わないことを示してもよい。Unstructuredが指定された場合は、Point-to-Point(P2P)トンネリング技術を用いて、DNにあるアプリケーションサーバー等にデータを送受信することを示す。P2Pトンネリング技術としては、例えば、UDP/IPのカプセル化技術を用いても良い。尚、PDUセッションタイプには、上記の他にIPが含まれても良い。IPは、UEがIPv4とIPv6の両方を使用可能である場合に指定する事ができる。
The PDU (Protocol Data Unit / Packet Data Unit) session type indicates the type of PDU session, and includes IPv4, IPv6, Ethernet, and Unstructured. When IPv4 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv4. When IPv6 is specified, it indicates that data is sent and received using IPv6. If Ethernet is specified, it indicates that Ethernet frames will be sent and received. Further, Ethernet may indicate that communication using IP is not performed. When Unstructured is specified, it indicates that data is sent / received to the application server etc. in the DN by using the point-to-point (P2P) tunneling technology. As the P2P tunneling technique, for example, a UDP / IP encapsulation technique may be used. The PDU session type may include an IP in addition to the above. IP can be specified if the UE can use both IPv4 and IPv6.
また、ネットワークスライス(NS)とは、特定のネットワーク能力及びネットワーク特性を提供する論理的なネットワークである。UE及び/又はネットワークは、5GSにおいて、ネットワークスライス(NWスライス; NS)をサポートすることができる。
A network slice (NS) is a logical network that provides specific network capabilities and network characteristics. UEs and / or networks can support network slices (NW slices; NS) in 5GS.
また、ネットワークスライスインスタンス(NSI)とは、ネットワーク機能(NF)のインスタンス(実体)と、必要なリソースのセットで構成され、配置されるネットワークスライスを形成する。ここで、NFとは、ネットワークにおける処理機能であって、3GPPで採用又は定義されたものである。NSIはコアネットワーク_B内に1以上構成される、NSの実体である。また、NSIはNST(Network Slice Template)を用いて生成された仮想的なNF(Network Function)により構成されてもよい。ここで、NSTとは、要求される通信サービスや能力(capability)を提供する為のリソース要求に関連付けられ、1以上のNFの論理的表現である。つまり、NSIとは、複数のNFにより構成されたコアネットワーク_B190内の集合体でよい。また、NSIはサービス等によって配送されるユーザデータを分ける為に構成された論理的なネットワークでよい。NSには、1以上のNFが構成されてよい。NSに構成されるNFは、他のNSと共有される装置であってもよいし、そうでなくてもよい。UE、及び/又ネットワーク内の装置は、NSSAI、及び/又はS-NSSAI、及び/又はUE usage type、及び/又は1以上のNSI ID等の登録情報、及び/又はAPNに基づいて、1以上のNSに割り当てられることができる。尚、UE usage typeは、NSIを識別するための使用される、UEの登録情報に含まれるパラメータ値である。UE usage typeはHSSに記憶されていてよい。AMFはUE usage typeに基づきSMFとUPFを選択してもよい。
A network slice instance (NSI) is composed of an instance (entity) of a network function (NF) and a set of necessary resources, and forms a network slice to be arranged. Here, NF is a processing function in the network and is adopted or defined in 3GPP. NSI is an entity of NS composed of one or more in core network_B. Further, NSI may be configured by a virtual NF (Network Function) generated by using NST (Network Slice Template). Here, NST is a logical expression of one or more NFs associated with a resource request for providing the required communication service and capability. In other words, the NSI may be an aggregate in the core network_B190 composed of a plurality of NFs. In addition, NSI may be a logical network configured to separate user data delivered by services and the like. One or more NFs may be configured in NS. The NF configured in the NS may or may not be a device shared with other NSs. UE and / or devices in the network are 1 or more based on NSSAI and / or S-NSSAI and / or UE usage type and / or registration information such as 1 or more NSI IDs and / or APN. Can be assigned to NS. The UE usage type is a parameter value included in the UE registration information used to identify the NSI. The UE usage type may be stored in the HSS. AMF may select SMF and UPF based on UE usage type.
また、S-NSSAI (Single Network Slice Selection Assistance Information) は、NSを識別するための情報である。S-NSSAIは、SST(Slice/Service type)のみで構成されてもよいし、SSTとSD(Slice Differentiator)の両方で構成されてもよい。ここで、SSTとは、機能とサービスの面で期待されるNSの動作を示す情報である。また、SDは、SSTで示される複数のNSIから1つのNSIを選択する際に、SSTを補間する情報であってもよい。S-NSSAIは、PLMNごとに特有な情報であってもよいし、PLMN間で共通化された標準の情報であってもよい。また、ネットワークは、デフォルトS-NSSAIとして、UEの登録情報に1以上のS-NSSAIを記憶してもよい。尚、S-NSSAIがデフォルトS-NSSAIである場合において、UEが登録要求メッセージにおいて有効なS-NSSAIをネットワークに送信しないときは、ネットワークは、UEに関係するNSを提供してもよい。
In addition, S-NSSAI (Single Network Slice Selection Assistance Information) is information for identifying NS. S-NSSAI may be composed of only SST (Slice / Service type) or may be composed of both SST and SD (Slice Differentiator). Here, SST is information indicating the operation of NS expected in terms of functions and services. Further, the SD may be information that interpolates the SST when selecting one NSI from a plurality of NSIs represented by the SST. The S-NSSAI may be information peculiar to each PLMN, or may be standard information shared among PLMNs. Further, the network may store one or more S-NSSAI in the registration information of the UE as the default S-NSSAI. If the S-NSSAI is the default S-NSSAI and the UE does not send a valid S-NSSAI to the network in the registration request message, the network may provide the NS related to the UE.
また、NSSAI (Network Slice Selection Assistance Information) は、S-NSSAIの集まりである。NSSAIに含まれる、各S-NSSAIはアクセスネットワーク又はコアネットワークがNSIを選択するのをアシストする情報である。UEはPLMNごとにネットワークから許可されたNSSAIを記憶してもよい。また、NSSAIは、AMFを選択するのに用いられる情報であってよい。
NSSAI (Network Slice Selection Assistance Information) is a collection of S-NSSAI. Each S-NSSAI included in NSSAI is information that assists the access network or core network in selecting NSI. The UE may memorize the NSSAI permitted by the network for each PLMN. Also, NSSAI may be the information used to select AMF.
また、SSC (Session and Service Continuity) modeは、5Gシステム(5GS)において、システム、及び/又は各装置がサポートするセッションサービス継続(Session and Service Continuity)のモードを示すものである。より詳細には、UE_A10とUPFとの間で確立されたPDUセッションがサポートするセッションサービス継続の種類を示すモードであってもよい。なお、SSC modeはPDUセッション毎に設定されるセッションサービス継続の種類を示すモードであってもよい。さらに、SSC modeは、SSC mode 1、SSC mode 2、SSC mode 3の3つのモードから構成されていてもよい。尚、PDUセッションに対応づけられたSSC modeは、PDUセッションが存続している間は、変更されなくてもよい。
In addition, SSC (Session and Service Continuity) mode indicates the mode of session service continuity (Session and Service Continuity) supported by the system and / or each device in the 5G system (5GS). More specifically, it may be a mode indicating the types of session service continuation supported by the PDU session established between UE_A10 and UPF. The SSC mode may be a mode indicating the type of session service continuation set for each PDU session. Further, the SSC mode may be composed of three modes, SSC mode 1, SSC mode 2, and SSC mode 3. The SSC mode associated with the PDU session does not have to be changed for the life of the PDU session.
また、RRC (Radio Resource Control) コネクションは、UEとアクセスネットワーク内の基地局装置との間で確立されるコネクションである。より詳細には、RRCコネクションは、UEとアクセスネットワーク内の基地局装置との間のUuリファレンスポイントにおいて確立されるコネクションである。RRCコネクションは、無線ベアラで構成されてもよい。さらに、RRCコネクションは、3GPPアクセスにおいて確立されるコネクションであってもよい。さらに、RRCコネクションは、NASレイヤの下のRRCレイヤにおいて確立されるコネクションであってもよい。さらに、RRCコネクションは、RRCレイヤのRRCメッセージの送受信にて、確立、及び/又は解放されるコネクションであってもよい。さらに、RRCコネクションは、RRCレイヤのRRCメッセージの送受信にて、サスペンドされるコネクションであってもよい。
The RRC (Radio Resource Control) connection is a connection established between the UE and the base station device in the access network. More specifically, an RRC connection is a connection established at a Uu reference point between a UE and a base station device in an access network. The RRC connection may be configured with a wireless bearer. Further, the RRC connection may be a connection established in 3GPP access. Further, the RRC connection may be a connection established in the RRC layer below the NAS layer. Further, the RRC connection may be a connection established and / or released by sending and receiving an RRC message of the RRC layer. Further, the RRC connection may be a connection that is suspended by sending and receiving RRC messages of the RRC layer.
また、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationは、RRCレイヤが非有効化(inactive)な状態にも関わらず、NASレイヤの状態がコネクティッド状態であることを示す状態である。言い換えると、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationは、NASシグナリングコネクション、及び/又はNASシグナリングコネクションのコンテキストを維持しつつ、無線ベアラが解放された状態であってもよい。
In addition, 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication is a state indicating that the state of the NAS layer is a connected state even though the RRC layer is inactive. In other words, the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication may be in a state where the radio bearer is released while maintaining the context of the NAS signaling connection and / or the NAS signaling connection.
さらに、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationは、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされた状態であってもよい。より詳細には、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationは、NASレイヤの状態がコネクティッド状態であるが、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされた状態であってもよい。言い換えると、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationは、NASシグナリングコネクション、及び/又はNASシグナリングコネクションのコンテキストを維持しつつ、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされた状態であってもよい。
Furthermore, 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication may be in a state where the RRC connection is suspended. More specifically, in 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication, the NAS layer state is the connected state, but the RRC connection may be suspended. In other words, the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication may be in a suspended state of the RRC connection while maintaining the context of the NAS signaling connection and / or the NAS signaling connection.
ここで、UEは、下位レイヤから、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされたことを示す情報の受信に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED modeから5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationに遷移してもよい。さらに、UEは、下位レイヤからの、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされたことを示す情報の受信に基づいて、3GPPアクセスに対する状態のみを、5GMM-CONNECTED modeから5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationに遷移してもよい。尚、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされたことを示す情報は、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされたことを示すインディケーションであってもよい。
Here, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication from the lower layer based on the reception of information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended. Furthermore, the UE transitions only the state for 3GPP access from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication from the lower layer based on the reception of information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended. May be good. The information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended may be an indication indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended.
また、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationのサポートとは、RRCレイヤが非有効化になったことを示す通知を下位レイヤから受けた場合でも、NASレイヤの状態をコネクティッド状態に維持することがサポートされていることを意味してもよい。さらに、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationの使用とは、RRCレイヤが非有効化になったことを示す通知を下位レイヤから受けた場合でも、NASレイヤの状態をコネクティッド状態に維持することを意味してもよい。
In addition, support for 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication means that the state of the NAS layer can be maintained in the connected state even when a notification indicating that the RRC layer has been disabled is received from the lower layer. It may mean that it is supported. Furthermore, the use of 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication means that the state of the NAS layer is maintained in the connected state even when the notification indicating that the RRC layer has been disabled is received from the lower layer. It may mean.
また、PDU session with suspended user-plane resourcesは、ユーザプレーンリソースが確立、又は再確立され、無線ベアラがサスペンドされたPDUセッションである。ここで、無線ベアラがサスペンドされるタイミングは、UEが5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationに遷移するタイミングであってもよい。さらに、無線ベアラは、データ無線ベアラであってもよい。
Also, PDU session with suspended user-plane resources is a PDU session in which user plane resources are established or re-established and the wireless bearer is suspended. Here, the timing at which the wireless bearer is suspended may be the timing at which the UE transitions to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication. Further, the radio bearer may be a data radio bearer.
トラッキングエリアは、コアネットワークが管理する、UE_A10の位置情報で表すことが可能な単数又は複数の範囲である。トラッキングエリアは、複数のセルで構成されもよい。さらに、トラッキングエリアは、ページング等の制御メッセージがブロードキャストされる範囲でもよいし、UE_A10がハンドオーバー手続きをせずに移動できる範囲でもよい。さらに、トラッキングエリアは、ルーティングエリアでもよいし、ロケーションエリアでもよいし、これらと同様のものであればよい。以下、トラッキングエリアはTA(Tracking Area)であってもよい。
The tracking area is a single or multiple range that can be represented by the location information of UE_A10 managed by the core network. The tracking area may be composed of a plurality of cells. Further, the tracking area may be a range in which a control message such as paging is broadcast, or a range in which UE_A10 can move without performing a handover procedure. Further, the tracking area may be a routing area, a location area, or the same as these. Hereinafter, the tracking area may be TA (Tracking Area).
TAリストは、ネットワークがUE_A10に割り当てた一又は複数のTAが含まれるリストである。なお、UE_A10は、TAリストに含まれる一又は複数のTA内を移動している間は、トラッキングエリア更新手続きを実行することなく移動することができてよい。言い換えると、UE_A10は、TAリストは、UE_A10がトラッキングエリア更新手続きを実行することなく移動できるエリアを示す情報群であってよい。尚、TAリストは、一又複数のTAI (Tracking area identity) で構成されるTAIリストと表現されてもよく、以下、TAIリストは、TAリストを指してもよい。
The TA list is a list that includes one or more TAs assigned to UE_A10 by the network. Note that UE_A10 may be able to move without executing the tracking area update procedure while moving within one or more TAs included in the TA list. In other words, the UE_A10 may be a group of information indicating an area in which the TA list can be moved without performing the tracking area update procedure. The TA list may be expressed as a TAI list composed of one or more TAI (Tracking area identity), and hereinafter, the TAI list may refer to the TA list.
LADN (Local Area Data Network) とは、特定の場所においてのみUEが接続可能なDNであり、特定のDNN(つまりLADN DNN)に対する接続性を提供するものである。LADNは、特定の場所において、特定のDNNに対応づけられたPDUセッションを用いることで接続可能なDNであってよい。さらに、LADNは、特定の場所において、特定のDNNと特定のS-NSSAIとの組合せに対応づけられたPDUセッションを用いることで接続可能なDNであってよい。
LADN (Local Area Data Network) is a DN that a UE can connect to only in a specific location, and provides connectivity to a specific DNN (that is, LADN DNN). The LADN may be a DN that can be connected at a particular location by using a PDU session associated with a particular DNN. Further, the LADN may be a DN that can be connected at a specific location by using a PDU session associated with a specific combination of a specific DNN and a specific S-NSSAI.
LADN情報は、LADNに関連する情報である。LADN情報は、UEが利用可能な特定のLADNを示す情報であってもよい。LADN情報には、LADN DNNと、LADNサービスエリア情報とが含まれてよい。より詳細には、LADN情報には、一又は複数の、LADN毎に存在する情報(以下では、LADNを示す情報と称す)が含まれてよい。さらに、LADNを示す情報には、LADN DNNと、LADNサービスエリア情報とが含まれてよい。ここで、LADN DNNは、LADNを識別する情報であってもよく、LADNとして扱われるDNを識別する情報であってもよく、LADNに対してPDUセッションを確立する際に用いるDNNであってよい。
LADN information is information related to LADN. The LADN information may be information indicating a specific LADN available to the UE. The LADN information may include LADN DNN and LADN service area information. More specifically, the LADN information may include one or more pieces of information existing for each LADN (hereinafter, referred to as information indicating LADN). Further, the information indicating LADN may include LADN DNN and LADN service area information. Here, the LADN DNN may be information that identifies the LADN, may be information that identifies the DN that is treated as the LADN, or may be a DNN that is used when establishing a PDU session for the LADN. ..
尚、LADN情報が従来のLADN情報である場合、LADN情報は、上記で説明した構成の情報であってよい。具体的には、LADN情報が従来のLADN情報である場合、LADNサービスエリアは、従来のLADNサービスエリアであってよい。
If the LADN information is the conventional LADN information, the LADN information may be the information having the configuration described above. Specifically, when the LADN information is conventional LADN information, the LADN service area may be the conventional LADN service area.
逆に、LADN情報が拡張されたLADN情報である場合、LADN情報は、上記で説明した構成の一部が拡張された情報であってよい。具体的には、LADN情報が拡張されたLADN情報である場合、LADNサービスエリアは、拡張されたLADNサービスエリアであってよい。さらに、LADN情報が拡張されたLADN情報である場合、LADNを示す情報は、LADNサービスエリアが有効である期間を示す情報、及び/又はLADNサービスエリアの粒度を示す情報を、さらに含んでもよい。さらに、LADN情報が拡張されたLADN情報である場合、LADNを示す情報は、S-NSSAIを、さらに含んでもよい。
On the contrary, when the LADN information is the extended LADN information, the LADN information may be the information in which a part of the configuration described above is extended. Specifically, if the LADN information is extended LADN information, the LADN service area may be the extended LADN service area. Further, when the LADN information is extended LADN information, the information indicating LADN may further include information indicating the period during which the LADN service area is valid and / or information indicating the particle size of the LADN service area. Further, if the LADN information is extended LADN information, the information indicating LADN may further include S-NSSAI.
LADNサービスエリア (LADN service area) は、LADNに対するPDUセッションの確立が可能なエリアである。LADNサービスエリアは、LADNへの接続が可能なエリアであってもよい。さらに、LADNサービスエリアは、LADNサービスエリア情報によって示されるエリアであってもよい。ここで、LADNサービスエリア情報は、LADNサービスエリアを識別する情報であってよく、トラッキングエリアのセットとして提供されてもよいし、TAI (Tracking area identity) listとして提供されてもよい。
The LADN service area is an area where a PDU session can be established for LADN. The LADN service area may be an area where connection to LADN is possible. Further, the LADN service area may be an area indicated by the LADN service area information. Here, the LADN service area information may be information that identifies the LADN service area, and may be provided as a set of tracking areas or as a TAI (Tracking area identity) list.
尚、LADNサービスエリアが従来のLADNサービスエリアである場合、LADNサービスエリアは、現在、UEが接続しているレジストレーションエリアに属するトラッキングエリアによって構成されるエリアであってよい。言い換えると、LADNサービスエリアが従来のLADNサービスエリアである場合、LADNサービスエリアは、一又は複数のトラッキングエリアによって構成されるエリアであってもよい。逆に、LADNサービスエリアが拡張されたLADNサービスエリアである場合、LADNサービスエリアは、前記トラッキングエリアによって構成されるエリアであってもよいし、前記トラッキングエリア内の一部の基地局によってカバーされるエリアであってもよい。さらに、LADNサービスエリアが拡張されたLADNサービスエリアである場合、LADNサービスエリアは、前記トラッキングエリアによって構成されるエリア以外のサイズのエリアであってもよいし、トラッキングエリアに依存しないエリアであってもよい。言い換えると、LADNサービスエリアが拡張されたLADNサービスエリアである場合、LADNサービスエリアは、一又は複数のトラッキングエリアによって構成されるエリアであってもよいし、一又は複数のトラッキングエリアによって構成されるエリアとは異なるエリアであってもよい。
If the LADN service area is a conventional LADN service area, the LADN service area may be an area composed of tracking areas that belong to the registration area to which the UE is currently connected. In other words, if the LADN service area is a conventional LADN service area, the LADN service area may be an area composed of one or more tracking areas. Conversely, when the LADN service area is an extended LADN service area, the LADN service area may be an area composed of the tracking area, or may be covered by some base stations in the tracking area. Area may be. Further, when the LADN service area is an extended LADN service area, the LADN service area may be an area having a size other than the area configured by the tracking area, or may be an area independent of the tracking area. May be good. In other words, if the LADN service area is an extended LADN service area, the LADN service area may be an area composed of one or more tracking areas, or may be composed of one or more tracking areas. It may be an area different from the area.
さらに、LADNサービスエリアが、一又は複数のトラッキングエリアによって構成されるエリアである場合、LADNサービスエリア情報は、一又は複数のトラッキングエリアIDによって構成されるトラッキングエリアIDリストであってよい。逆に、LADNサービスエリアが、一又は複数のトラッキングエリアによって構成されるエリアとは異なるエリアである場合、LADNサービスエリア情報は、RAN (Radio Access Network) のアシストが必要な情報であってもよく、RANのアシストが必要ではない情報であってもよい。ここで、RANのアシストが必要な情報は、セルの情報であってもよいし、基地局の情報であってもよい。さらに、RANのアシストが必要な情報は、セルIDであってもよいし、基地局IDであってもよい。さらに、RANのアシストが必要な情報は、これらに限らず、RANで定義される情報であってもよい。さらに、RANのアシストが必要ではない情報は、物理的な位置情報であってよく、アプリケーションによって取得可能な位置情報であってもよい。さらに、RANのアシストが必要ではない情報は、これらに限らず、RAN以外で取得可能な情報であってもよい。ここで、RANのことをアクセスネットワークと表現してもよい。逆に、アクセスネットワークのことをRANと称してもよい。
Further, when the LADN service area is an area composed of one or more tracking areas, the LADN service area information may be a tracking area ID list composed of one or more tracking area IDs. On the contrary, when the LADN service area is different from the area composed of one or more tracking areas, the LADN service area information may be information that requires assistance from RAN (Radio Access Network). , Information that does not require RAN assistance may be used. Here, the information that requires RAN assistance may be cell information or base station information. Further, the information that requires RAN assistance may be a cell ID or a base station ID. Further, the information that requires RAN assistance is not limited to these, and may be information defined by RAN. Further, the information that does not require RAN assistance may be physical location information or location information that can be acquired by the application. Further, the information that does not require RAN assistance is not limited to these, and may be information that can be acquired other than RAN. Here, RAN may be expressed as an access network. Conversely, the access network may be referred to as RAN.
LADNサービスエリアの拡張とは、従来のLADNサービスエリアとは異なる粒度のLADNサービスエリアを用いることを意味してもよい。さらに、LADNサービスエリアの拡張とは、従来のLADN情報とは異なる、拡張されたLADN情報を用いることを意味してもよい。さらに、LADNサービスエリアの拡張とは、従来のLADNと異なる、拡張されたLADNに接続すること意味してもよい。
Expansion of the LADN service area may mean using a LADN service area having a particle size different from that of the conventional LADN service area. Further, the expansion of the LADN service area may mean using the expanded LADN information different from the conventional LADN information. Further, the extension of the LADN service area may mean connecting to the extended LADN, which is different from the conventional LADN.
つまり、各装置がLADNサービスエリアの拡張をサポートしている場合、従来のLADNサービスエリアに加え、従来のLADNサービスエリアとは異なる、拡張されたLADNサービスエリアも適応可能であってもよい。さらに、各装置がLADNサービスエリアの拡張をサポートしている場合、従来のLADN情報に加え、従来のLADN情報とは異なる、拡張されたLADN情報も使用可能であってもよい。さらに、各装置がLADNサービスエリアの拡張をサポートしている場合、従来のLADNに加え、従来のLADNと異なる、拡張されたLADNに接続可能であってもよい。
That is, if each device supports the expansion of the LADN service area, the expanded LADN service area, which is different from the conventional LADN service area, may be applicable in addition to the conventional LADN service area. Further, if each device supports the expansion of the LADN service area, the expanded LADN information different from the conventional LADN information may be available in addition to the conventional LADN information. Further, if each device supports the expansion of the LADN service area, it may be possible to connect to the extended LADN different from the conventional LADN in addition to the conventional LADN.
逆に、各装置の内の一部がLADNサービスエリアの拡張をサポートしていない場合、拡張されたLADNサービスエリアの適応が可能ではなく、従来のLADNサービスエリアのみが適応可能であってよい。さらに、各装置の内の一部がLADNサービスエリアの拡張をサポートしていない場合、拡張されたLADN情報の使用が可能ではなく、従来のLADN情報のみが使用可能であってよい。さらに、各装置の内の一部がLADNサービスエリアの拡張をサポートしていない場合、拡張されたLADNへの接続が可能ではなく、従来のLADNへの接続のみが可能であってよい。
Conversely, if some of the devices do not support the expansion of the LADN service area, the expanded LADN service area may not be adaptable and only the conventional LADN service area may be adaptable. Further, if some of the devices do not support the expansion of the LADN service area, the expanded LADN information may not be available and only the traditional LADN information may be available. Further, if some of the devices do not support the expansion of the LADN service area, it may not be possible to connect to the expanded LADN, but only to the conventional LADN.
また、各装置がLADNサービスエリアの拡張の利用制限をサポートしている場合、拡張されたLADNサービスエリアの適応が可能ではなく、従来のLADNサービスエリアのみが適応可能であってよい。さらに、各装置がLADNサービスエリアの拡張の利用制限をサポートしている場合、拡張されたLADN情報の使用が可能ではなく、従来のLADN情報のみが使用可能であってよい。さらに、各装置がLADNサービスエリアの拡張の利用制限をサポートしている場合、拡張されたLADNへの接続が可能ではなく、従来のLADNへの接続のみが可能であってよい。
Further, if each device supports the usage restriction of the extended LADN service area, the extended LADN service area may not be applicable, and only the conventional LADN service area may be applicable. Further, if each device supports the use restriction of the extended LADN service area, the extended LADN information may not be available and only the conventional LADN information may be available. Further, if each device supports the extended usage restrictions of the LADN service area, it may not be possible to connect to the extended LADN, but only to the conventional LADN.
逆に、各装置がLADNサービスエリアの拡張の利用制限をサポートしていない場合、拡張されたLADNサービスエリアも適応可能であってもよい。さらに、各装置がLADNサービスエリアの拡張の利用制限をサポートしていない場合、拡張されたLADN情報も使用可能であってもよい。さらに、各装置がLADNサービスエリアの拡張の利用制限をサポートしていない場合、拡張されたLADNに接続可能であってもよい。
Conversely, if each device does not support the use restrictions for the extended LADN service area, the extended LADN service area may also be adaptable. Further, if each device does not support the use restrictions of the extended LADN service area, the extended LADN information may also be available. In addition, if each device does not support the extended usage restrictions of the LADN service area, it may be possible to connect to the extended LADN.
LADNのためのPDUセッション(PDU session for LADN) は、LADNに関連づけられたDNNに対応づけられたPDUセッションである。LADNのためのPDUセッションは、LADNに対して確立されるPDUセッションであってよい。言い換えると、UEとLADNとの間に確立されるPDUセッションであってもよいし、UEとLADNとの間のユーザデータ通信に用いられるPDUセッションであってもよい。尚、LADNのためのPDUセッションは、LADN service areaにおいてのみ確立可能なPDUセッションであってもよい。言い換えると、UEは、特定の場所において、特定のDNNを用いることで、LADNのためのPDUセッションが確立可能であってよい。さらに、言い換えると、UEは、特定の場所において、特定のDNNと特定のS-NSSAIとの組合せを用いることで、LADNのためのPDUセッションが確立可能であってよい。
A PDU session for LADN (PDU session for LADN) is a PDU session associated with a DNN associated with LADN. The PDU session for LADN may be a PDU session established for LADN. In other words, it may be a PDU session established between the UE and LADN, or it may be a PDU session used for user data communication between the UE and LADN. The PDU session for LADN may be a PDU session that can be established only in the LADN service area. In other words, the UE may be able to establish a PDU session for LADN by using a particular DNN at a particular location. Furthermore, in other words, the UE may be able to establish a PDU session for LADN at a particular location by using a particular combination of a particular DNN and a particular S-NSSAI.
また、Non-Public Network(NPN)は、一般利用を目的とせず、企業など私的利用など、特定の利用者が特定の目的で利用する非公開ネットワークである。NPNにはStand-alone Non-Public Network (SNPN)とPublic network integrated NPNの2種類が存在する。なお、以下にNPNと記載した場合、SNPNとPublic network integrated NPNの両方を意味してよい。
In addition, Non-Public Network (NPN) is a private network that is used by specific users for specific purposes, such as private use such as companies, not for general use. There are two types of NPN: Stand-alone Non-Public Network (SNPN) and Public network integrated NPN. When NPN is described below, it may mean both SNPN and Public network integrated NPN.
SNPNは、NPNオペレータにより運用され、PLMNにより提供される機能部からの影響を受けないネットワークである。言い換えると、SNPNは一般に公開されるPLMNとは独立したNPN専用のネットワークである。SNPNは、SNPN identity (SNPN ID) によって識別されるネットワークであってよい。尚、SNPN IDは、PLMN IDとNetwork identifier (NID) とを組み合わせた情報であってよい。尚、SNPN IDに用いられれるPLMN IDは、プライベートネットワークの為に確保された情報であってもよく、例えばPLMN IDに含まれるMCCは999であってもよい。さらに、UEがSNPNに登録された場合、登録されたSNPNを、登録SNPN、又はRSNPN (registered SNPN) と称してもよい。
SNPN is a network operated by the NPN operator and not affected by the functional parts provided by PLMN. In other words, the SNPN is an NPN-only network independent of the publicly available PLMN. The SNPN may be a network identified by the SNPN identity (SNPN ID). The SNPN ID may be information that is a combination of the PLMN ID and the Network identifier (NID). The PLMN ID used for the SNPN ID may be information reserved for the private network, and for example, the MCC included in the PLMN ID may be 999. Further, when the UE is registered in the SNPN, the registered SNPN may be referred to as a registered SNPN or RSNPN (registered SNPN).
NID (Network identifier) は、ネットワークを識別する情報である。SNPNは、PLMN IDとNIDとを組み合わせた情報により識別されてもよい。NIDは、SNPN内でユニークな情報であってもよいし、世界的にユニークな情報であってもよい。
NID (Network identifier) is information that identifies the network. The SNPN may be identified by a combination of PLMN ID and NID information. The NID may be unique information within the SNPN or may be globally unique information.
Public network integrated NPNはPLMNの機能部を利用して実現されるネットワークである。言い換えると Public network integrated NPNは、PLMN内で仮想的に実現されるNPNである。さらに、Public network integrated NPNは、PLMNを介して作成可能なNPNである。尚、Public network integrated NPNは、ネットワークスライスの機能を用いて実現されてもよい。具体的には、Public network integrated NPNは、NPNのために割り当てられたネットワークスライスを用いることにより実現可能なネットワークであってもよい。この場合、Public network integrated NPNは、S-NSSAIによって識別されてもよいし、S-NSSAIとCAG IDの組み合わせにより識別されてもよい。
Public network integrated NPN is a network realized by using the functional parts of PLMN. In other words, the Public network integrated NPN is an NPN that is virtually realized within the PLMN. Furthermore, Public network integrated NPN is an NPN that can be created via PLMN. The Public network integrated NPN may be realized by using the function of the network slice. Specifically, the Public network integrated NPN may be a feasible network by using the network slice assigned for the NPN. In this case, the Public network integrated NPN may be identified by S-NSSAI or by a combination of S-NSSAI and CAG ID.
さらに、Public network integrated NPNは、DNを用いて実現されてもよい。具体的には、Public network integrated NPNは、NPNのためのDNを用いることにより実現可能なネットワークであってもよい。この場合、Public network integrated NPNは、DNNによって識別されてもよいし、DNNとCAG IDの組み合わせにより識別されてもよい。
Furthermore, Public network integrated NPN may be realized by using DN. Specifically, the Public network integrated NPN may be a feasible network by using a DN for the NPN. In this case, the Public network integrated NPN may be identified by the DNN or by the combination of the DNN and the CAG ID.
CAG(Closed Access Groups) IDは、CAGに関連付けられた1又は複数のセルに接続が許可された登録者(subscriber)のグループを識別する情報である。CAGは、CAG IDにより識別されるグループであってよい。CAGは、Public network integrated NPNを、ネットワークスライスで実現する際に利用されるグループである。CAGは、NPNの為に割り当てられたネットワークスライスに、NPNが許可されないUEから、アクセスを試みないようにするために使用されてもよい。さらに、CAG IDは、PLMN内でユニークな情報である。
CAG (Closed Access Groups) ID is information that identifies a group of subscribers who are allowed to connect to one or more cells associated with CAG. The CAG may be a group identified by the CAG ID. CAG is a group used to realize Public network integrated NPN in network slices. The CAG may be used to prevent attempts to access network slices assigned for NPNs from UEs that do not allow NPNs. Furthermore, the CAG ID is unique information within the PLMN.
SNPNが有効なUE (SNPN enable UE) は、SNPNの利用が設定されたUEである。SNPNが有効なUEは、SNPNに関する情報を、少なくとも1つ記憶していてもよい。言い換えると、SNPNが有効なUEの設定情報には、SNPNの利用が可能であることを示す情報が含まれていてよい。さらに、SNPNが有効なUEは、SNPNアクセスモードをサポートしてよい。言い換えると、SNPNが有効なUEは、SNPNアクセスモードで作動してもよい。
A UE with SNPN enabled (SNPN enable UE) is a UE for which the use of SNPN is set. An SNPN-enabled UE may store at least one piece of information about the SNPN. In other words, the setting information of the UE in which the SNPN is valid may include information indicating that the SNPN can be used. In addition, SNPN-enabled UEs may support SNPN access modes. In other words, a UE with SNPN enabled may operate in SNPN access mode.
SNPNアクセスモード (SNPN access mode) は、SNPNが選択されたモードである。SNPNアクセスモードは、UEがSNPNに登録されたモードであってもよい。さらに、SNPNアクセスモードは、UEがSNPNに接続しているモードであってもよい。言い換えると、SNPNアクセスモードで作動しているUEは、ネットワーク選択時に、SNPNのみを選択してもよい。より詳細には、SNPNアクセスモードで作動しているUEは、ネットワーク選択時に、Uuインターフェースを介したSNPNのみを選択してもよい。言い換えると、SNPNアクセスモードで作動しているUEは、ネットワーク選択時に、PLMNを選択せずに、SNPNを選択してもよい。ここで、SNPNアクセスモードで作動しているUEは、SNPNアクセスモードのUEと表現されてもよい。さらに、SNPNアクセスモードのUEは、SNPNが有効なUEであってもよい。
SNPN access mode (SNPN access mode) is the mode in which SNPN is selected. The SNPN access mode may be a mode in which the UE is registered in the SNPN. Further, the SNPN access mode may be a mode in which the UE is connected to the SNPN. In other words, a UE operating in SNPN access mode may select only SNPN when selecting a network. More specifically, a UE operating in SNPN access mode may select only SNPN via the Uu interface when selecting a network. In other words, a UE operating in SNPN access mode may select SNPN instead of PLMN when selecting a network. Here, a UE operating in the SNPN access mode may be expressed as a UE in the SNPN access mode. Further, the UE in the SNPN access mode may be a UE in which the SNPN is valid.
均等SNPN (equivalent PLMN) は、任意のSNPNと同じSNPNであるように扱われるSNPNのことであってよい。例えば、均等SNPNは、登録SNPNと同じように扱われる、一又は複数のSNPNであってもよい。
Equivalent PLMN may be an SNPN that is treated as if it were the same SNPN as any SNPN. For example, an equal SNPN may be one or more SNPNs that are treated the same as a registered SNPN.
さらに、均等SNPNは、任意のSNPNと同じSNPNであるように扱われるPLMNのことであってよい。例えば、均等SNPNは、登録SNPNと同じように扱われる、一又は複数のPLMNであってもよい。
Furthermore, the equal SNPN may be a PLMN that is treated as if it were the same SNPN as any SNPN. For example, the equal SNPN may be one or more PLMNs treated the same as the registered SNPN.
さらに、均等SNPNは、任意のSNPNと同じPLMN IDで識別される、一又は複数のSNPNであってよいし、PLMNであってもよい。例えば、均等SNPNは、登録SNPNと同じPLMN IDで識別される、一又は複数のSNPNであってよいし、PLMNであってもよい。さらに、均等SNPNは、登録SNPNと同じPLMN IDで識別されるPLMN、及び前記PLMNの均等PLMNであってよい。
Further, the equal SNPN may be one or more SNPNs identified by the same PLMN ID as any SNPN, or may be a PLMN. For example, the equal SNPN may be one or more SNPNs identified by the same PLMN ID as the registered SNPN, or it may be a PLMN. Further, the equal SNPN may be a PLMN identified by the same PLMN ID as the registered SNPN, and an equal PLMN of the PLMN.
第1の識別情報は、RRCコネクションのサスペンドを示す情報である。第1の識別情報は、サスペンド設定情報要素であってもよい。さらに、第1の識別情報は、サスペンドインディケーションであってもよい。さらに、第1の識別情報は、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされること示す識別情報であってもよい。さらに、第1の識別情報は、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされたこと示す識別情報であってもよい。
The first identification information is information indicating the suspension of the RRC connection. The first identification information may be a suspend setting information element. Further, the first identification information may be a suspend indication. Further, the first identification information may be identification information indicating that the RRC connection is suspended. Further, the first identification information may be identification information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended.
さらに、第1の識別情報は、RRCコネクションの状態をRRC_INACTIVE状態に遷移させるための情報であってもよい。言い換えると、第1の識別情報は、RRCレイヤが非有効化な状態に遷移することを示す情報であってもよい。
Further, the first identification information may be information for transitioning the state of the RRC connection to the RRC_INACTIVE state. In other words, the first identification information may be information indicating that the RRC layer transitions to the disabled state.
さらに、第1の識別情報は、ネットワークによって、受信した識別情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報等に基づいて、選択、決定される情報であってもよい。さらに、第1の識別情報は、本手続きにおいて、ネットワークが選択した他の識別情報に基づいて、選択、決定される情報であってもよい。
Further, the first identification information is based on the identification information received by the network and / or the capability information of the network and / or the operator policy and / or the state of the network and / or the registration information of the user. It may be information to be selected and determined. Further, the first identification information may be information selected and determined based on other identification information selected by the network in this procedure.
第11の識別情報は、PDUセッションタイプを示す情報である。第11の識別情報は、UEが要求するPDUセッションタイプを示す情報であってもよい。より詳細には、第11の識別情報は、UEが要求する、本手続きにおいて確立されるPDUセッションに対応づけられるPDUセッションタイプを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第11の識別情報は、UEの設定、及び/又はUEの状態、及び/又はユーザポリシー、及び/又はアプリケーションの要求に基づいて、選択、決定される情報であってもよい。
The eleventh identification information is information indicating the PDU session type. The eleventh identification information may be information indicating the PDU session type requested by the UE. More specifically, the eleventh identification information may be information indicating the PDU session type requested by the UE and associated with the PDU session established in this procedure. Further, the eleventh identification information may be information selected and determined based on the setting of the UE and / or the state of the UE and / or the user policy and / or the request of the application.
ここで、第11の識別情報には、UEによって選択されたPDUセッションタイプが設定されてもよい。具体的には、第11の識別情報には、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4が設定されてもよいし、IPv6が設定されてもよい。さらに、第11の識別情報には、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4v6が設定されてもよい。さらに、第11の識別情報には、PDUセッションタイプとして、Unstructuredが設定されてもよいし、Ethernetが設定されてもよい。尚、第11の識別情報に設定されるPDUセッションタイプはこれらに限らなくてもよい。
Here, the PDU session type selected by the UE may be set in the eleventh identification information. Specifically, IPv4 may be set or IPv6 may be set as the PDU session type in the eleventh identification information. Further, IPv4v6 may be set as the PDU session type in the eleventh identification information. Further, the eleventh identification information may be set to Unstructured or Ethernet as the PDU session type. The PDU session type set in the eleventh identification information is not limited to these.
第12の識別情報は、DNNを示す情報である。第12の識別情報は、UEが要求するDNNを示す情報であってもよい。より詳細には、第12の識別情報は、UEが要求する、本手続きにおいて確立されるPDUセッションに対応づけられるDNNを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第12の識別情報は、UEの設定、及び/又はUEの状態、及び/又はユーザポリシー、及び/又はアプリケーションの要求に基づいて、選択、決定される情報であってもよい。
The twelfth identification information is information indicating DNN. The twelfth identification information may be information indicating the DNN requested by the UE. More specifically, the twelfth identification information may be information indicating the DNN associated with the PDU session established in this procedure requested by the UE. Further, the twelfth identification information may be information selected and determined based on the setting of the UE and / or the state of the UE and / or the user policy and / or the request of the application.
第13の識別情報は、S-NSSAIを示す情報である。第13の識別情報は、UEが要求するS-NSSAIを示す情報であってもよい。より詳細には、第13の識別情報は、UEが要求する、本手続きにおいて確立されるPDUセッションに対応づけられるS-NSSAIを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第13の識別情報は、UEの設定、及び/又はUEの状態、及び/又はユーザポリシー、及び/又はアプリケーションの要求に基づいて、選択、決定される情報であってもよい。さらに、第13の識別情報は、登録手続きにおいて送受信されたNSSAIに含まれるS-NSSAIであってもよいし、UEが記憶しているS-NSSAIであってもよい。
The thirteenth identification information is information indicating S-NSSAI. The thirteenth identification information may be information indicating S-NSSAI requested by the UE. More specifically, the thirteenth identification information may be information indicating the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session established in this procedure, which is requested by the UE. Further, the thirteenth identification information may be information selected and determined based on the setting of the UE and / or the state of the UE and / or the user policy and / or the request of the application. Further, the thirteenth identification information may be the S-NSSAI included in the NSSAI transmitted / received in the registration procedure, or may be the S-NSSAI stored in the UE.
第21の識別情報は、PDUセッションタイプを示す情報である。第21の識別情報は、ネットワークによって選択されたPDUセッションタイプを示す情報であってもよい。より詳細には、第21の識別情報は、ネットワークが選択した、本手続きにおいて確立されるPDUセッションに対応づけられるPDUセッションタイプを示す情報であってもよい。
The 21st identification information is information indicating the PDU session type. The 21st identification information may be information indicating the PDU session type selected by the network. More specifically, the 21st identification information may be information indicating the PDU session type selected by the network and associated with the PDU session established in this procedure.
さらに、第21の識別情報は、ネットワークによって、受信した識別情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報等に基づいて、選択、決定される情報であってもよい。さらに、第21の識別情報は、本手続きにおいて、ネットワークが選択した他の識別情報に基づいて、選択、決定される情報であってもよい。
Further, the 21st identification information is based on the identification information received by the network and / or the capability information of the network and / or the operator policy and / or the state of the network and / or the registration information of the user. It may be information to be selected and determined. Further, the 21st identification information may be information selected and determined based on other identification information selected by the network in this procedure.
ここで、第21の識別情報には、ネットワークによって選択されたPDUセッションタイプが設定されてもよい。具体的には、第21の識別情報には、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4が設定されてもよいし、IPv6が設定されてもよい。さらに、第21の識別情報には、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4v6が設定されてもよい。さらに、第21の識別情報には、PDUセッションタイプとして、Unstructuredが設定されてもよいし、Ethernetが設定されてもよい。尚、第21の識別情報に設定されるPDUセッションタイプはこれらに限らなくてもよい。
Here, the PDU session type selected by the network may be set in the 21st identification information. Specifically, IPv4 may be set or IPv6 may be set as the PDU session type in the 21st identification information. Further, IPv4v6 may be set as the PDU session type in the 21st identification information. Further, the 21st identification information may be set to Unstructured or Ethernet as the PDU session type. The PDU session type set in the 21st identification information is not limited to these.
さらに、第21の識別情報に設定されるPDUセッションタイプは、受信した第11の識別情報に設定されたPDUセッションタイプと同じPDUセッションタイプであってもよいし、受信した第11の識別情報に設定されたPDUセッションタイプとは異なるPDUセッションタイプであってもよい。
Further, the PDU session type set in the 21st identification information may be the same PDU session type as the PDU session type set in the 11th identification information received, or the 11th identification information received may be the same. The PDU session type may be different from the set PDU session type.
第22の識別情報は、DNNを示す情報である。第22の識別情報は、ネットワークによって選択されたDNNを示す情報であってもよい。より詳細には、第22の識別情報は、ネットワークが選択した、本手続きにおいて確立されるPDUセッションに対応づけられるDNNを示す情報であってもよい。
The 22nd identification information is information indicating DNN. The 22nd identification information may be information indicating the DNN selected by the network. More specifically, the 22nd identification information may be network-selected information indicating the DNN associated with the PDU session established in this procedure.
さらに、第22の識別情報は、ネットワークによって、受信した識別情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報等に基づいて、選択、決定される情報であってもよい。さらに、第22の識別情報は、本手続きにおいて、ネットワークが選択した他の識別情報に基づいて、選択、決定される情報であってもよい。
Further, the 22nd identification information is based on the identification information received by the network and / or the capability information of the network and / or the operator policy and / or the state of the network and / or the registration information of the user. It may be information to be selected and determined. Further, the 22nd identification information may be information selected and determined based on other identification information selected by the network in this procedure.
第23の識別情報は、S-NSSAIを示す情報である。第23の識別情報は、ネットワークによって選択されたS-NSSAIを示す情報であってもよい。より詳細には、第23の識別情報は、ネットワークが選択した、本手続きにおいて確立されるPDUセッションに対応づけられるS-NSSAIを示す情報であってもよい。
The 23rd identification information is information indicating S-NSSAI. The 23rd identification information may be information indicating S-NSSAI selected by the network. More specifically, the 23rd identification information may be network-selected information indicating the S-NSSAI associated with the PDU session established in this procedure.
さらに、第23の識別情報は、ネットワークによって、受信した識別情報、及び/又はNSIに対応づけられた情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報等に基づいて、選択、決定される情報であってもよい。さらに、第23の識別情報は、本手続きにおいて、ネットワークが選択した他の識別情報に基づいて、選択、決定される情報であってもよい。
In addition, the 23rd identification information is the identification information received by the network and / or the information associated with the NSI, and / or the capability information of the network, and / or the operator policy, and / or the state of the network, and / Or the information may be selected and determined based on the user's registration information or the like. Further, the 23rd identification information may be information selected and determined based on other identification information selected by the network in this procedure.
第24の識別情報は、UEの要求が許可されない理由を示す理由値である。第24の識別情報は、5GSM(5GS Session Management)理由値であってよい。さらに、第24の識別情報は、UEが要求したPDUセッションタイプが許可されていないことを示す情報であってもよい。言い換えると、第24の識別情報は、UEが要求したPDUセッションタイプ以外のPDUセッションタイプが許可されていることを示す情報であってもよい。
The 24th identification information is a reason value indicating the reason why the UE request is not permitted. The 24th identification information may be a 5GSM (5GS Session Management) reason value. Further, the 24th identification information may be information indicating that the PDU session type requested by the UE is not permitted. In other words, the 24th identification information may be information indicating that a PDU session type other than the PDU session type requested by the UE is permitted.
さらに、第24の識別情報は、UEから受信した識別情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報、及び/又はUEが現在属しているエリア等に基づいて、ネットワークによって、選択、決定される情報であってもよい。
Further, the 24th identification information is the identification information received from the UE and / or the capability information of the network and / or the operator policy and / or the state of the network and / or the user registration information and / or the UE. The information may be selected and determined by the network based on the area to which it currently belongs.
さらに、第24の識別情報は、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す、50番目の5GSM理由値であってもよい。言い換えると、第24の識別情報は、5GSM cause #50 "PDU session type IPv4 only allowed"であってもよい。尚、5GSM cause #50 "PDU session type IPv4 only allowed "は、要求されたIP接続性に対するPDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値であってよい。
Furthermore, the 24th identification information may be the 50th 5GSM reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted as the PDU session type. In other words, the 24th identification information may be 5GSM cause # 50 "PDU session type IPv4 only allowed". Note that 5GSM cause # 50 "PDU session type IPv4 only allowed" may be a reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted as the PDU session type for the requested IP connectivity.
さらに、第24の識別情報は、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す、51番目の5GSM理由値であってもよい。言い換えると、第24の識別情報は、5GSM cause #51 "PDU session type IPv6 only allowed"であってもよい。尚、5GSM cause #51 "PDU session type IPv6 only allowed "は、要求されたIP接続性に対するPDUセッションタイプとして、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値であってよい。
Furthermore, the 24th identification information may be the 51st 5GSM reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted as the PDU session type. In other words, the 24th identification information may be 5GSM cause # 51 "PDU session type IPv6 only allowed". Note that 5GSM cause # 51 "PDU session type IPv6 only allowed" may be a reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted as the PDU session type for the requested IP connectivity.
さらに、第24の識別情報は、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4v6が許可されていないことを示す情報であってもよい。第24の識別情報は、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4が許可されていないことを示す情報であってもよい。第24の識別情報は、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv6が許可されていないことを示す情報であってもよい。
Furthermore, the 24th identification information may be information indicating that IPv4 v6 is not permitted as the PDU session type. The 24th identification information may be information indicating that IPv4 is not permitted as the PDU session type. The 24th identification information may be information indicating that IPv6 is not permitted as the PDU session type.
さらに、第24の識別情報は、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIを用いて、PDUセッションタイプがIPv4のPDUセッションを確立することができないことを示す情報であってもよい。さらに、第24の識別情報は、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIを用いて、PDUセッションタイプがIPv6のPDUセッションを確立することができないことを示す情報であってもよい。
Furthermore, the 24th identification information may be information indicating that the PDU session type cannot establish an IPv4 PDU session using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI. Further, the 24th identification information may be information indicating that the PDU session type cannot establish an IPv6 PDU session using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI.
[3.2. 各実施形態で用いられる手続きの説明]
次に、各実施形態で用いられる手続きについて説明する。尚、各実施形態で用いられる手続きには、登録手続き(Registration procedure)、PDUセッション確立手続き(PDU session establishment procedure)、UE設定更新手続き(Generic UE configuration update procedure)が含まれる。以下、各手続きについて説明していく。 [3.2. Explanation of procedures used in each embodiment]
Next, the procedure used in each embodiment will be described. The procedure used in each embodiment includes a registration procedure (Registration procedure), a PDU session establishment procedure (PDU session establishment procedure), and a UE setting update procedure (Generic UE configuration update procedure). Each procedure will be explained below.
次に、各実施形態で用いられる手続きについて説明する。尚、各実施形態で用いられる手続きには、登録手続き(Registration procedure)、PDUセッション確立手続き(PDU session establishment procedure)、UE設定更新手続き(Generic UE configuration update procedure)が含まれる。以下、各手続きについて説明していく。 [3.2. Explanation of procedures used in each embodiment]
Next, the procedure used in each embodiment will be described. The procedure used in each embodiment includes a registration procedure (Registration procedure), a PDU session establishment procedure (PDU session establishment procedure), and a UE setting update procedure (Generic UE configuration update procedure). Each procedure will be explained below.
尚、各実施形態では、図2に記載されているように、HSSとUDM、PCFとPCRF、SMFとPGW-C、UPFとPGW-Uが、それぞれ同一の装置(つまり、同一の物理的なハードウェア、又は同一の論理的なハードウェア、又は同一のソフトウェア)として構成されている場合を例にとって説明する。しかし、本実施形態に記載される内容は、これらが異なる装置(つまり、異なる物理的なハードウェア、又は異なる論理的なハードウェア、又は異なるソフトウェア)として構成される場合にも適用可能である。例えば、これらの間で、直接データの送受信を行ってもよいし、AMF、MME間のN26インターフェースを介してデータを送受信してもよいし、UEを介してデータを送受信してもよい。
In each embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, HSS and UDM, PCF and PCRF, SMF and PGW-C, and UPF and PGW-U are each the same device (that is, the same physical device). The case where it is configured as hardware, the same logical hardware, or the same software) will be described as an example. However, the content described in this embodiment is also applicable when they are configured as different devices (ie, different physical hardware, or different logical hardware, or different software). For example, data may be transmitted / received directly between them, data may be transmitted / received via the N26 interface between AMF and MME, or data may be transmitted / received via UE.
[3.2.1.登録手続き]
まず、登録手続き (Registration procedure) について、図7を用いて説明する。登録手続きは、5GSにおける手続きである。以下、本手続きとは登録手続きを指す。登録手続きは、UEが主導してアクセスネットワーク_B、及び/又はコアネットワーク_B、及び/又はDNへ登録する為の手続きである。UEは、ネットワークに登録していない状態であれば、例えば、電源投入時等の任意のタイミングで本手続きを実行することができる。言い換えると、UEは、非登録状態(RM-DEREGISTERED state)であれば任意のタイミングで本手続きを開始できる。また、各装置(特にUEとAMF)は、登録手続きの完了に基づいて、登録状態(RM-REGISTERED state)に遷移することができる。 [3.2.1. Registration procedure]
First, the registration procedure will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The registration procedure is a procedure in 5GS. Hereinafter, this procedure refers to the registration procedure. The registration procedure is a procedure for the UE to take the initiative in registering with the access network_B and / or the core network_B and / or the DN. The UE can execute this procedure at any time, for example, when the power is turned on, as long as it is not registered in the network. In other words, the UE can start this procedure at any time if it is in the unregistered state (RM-DEREGISTERED state). In addition, each device (particularly UE and AMF) can transition to the registration state (RM-REGISTERED state) based on the completion of the registration procedure.
まず、登録手続き (Registration procedure) について、図7を用いて説明する。登録手続きは、5GSにおける手続きである。以下、本手続きとは登録手続きを指す。登録手続きは、UEが主導してアクセスネットワーク_B、及び/又はコアネットワーク_B、及び/又はDNへ登録する為の手続きである。UEは、ネットワークに登録していない状態であれば、例えば、電源投入時等の任意のタイミングで本手続きを実行することができる。言い換えると、UEは、非登録状態(RM-DEREGISTERED state)であれば任意のタイミングで本手続きを開始できる。また、各装置(特にUEとAMF)は、登録手続きの完了に基づいて、登録状態(RM-REGISTERED state)に遷移することができる。 [3.2.1. Registration procedure]
First, the registration procedure will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The registration procedure is a procedure in 5GS. Hereinafter, this procedure refers to the registration procedure. The registration procedure is a procedure for the UE to take the initiative in registering with the access network_B and / or the core network_B and / or the DN. The UE can execute this procedure at any time, for example, when the power is turned on, as long as it is not registered in the network. In other words, the UE can start this procedure at any time if it is in the unregistered state (RM-DEREGISTERED state). In addition, each device (particularly UE and AMF) can transition to the registration state (RM-REGISTERED state) based on the completion of the registration procedure.
さらに、登録手続きは、ネットワークにおけるUEの位置登録情報を更新する、及び/又は、UEからネットワークへ定期的にUEの状態を通知する、及び/又は、ネットワークにおけるUEに関する特定のパラメータを更新する為の手続きであってもよい。
In addition, the registration procedure is to update the location registration information of the UE in the network and / or to periodically notify the network of the status of the UE from the UE and / or to update certain parameters about the UE in the network. It may be the procedure of.
UEは、TAを跨ぐモビリティをした際に、登録手続きを開始してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、保持しているTAリストで示されるTAとは異なるTAに移動した際に、登録手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UEは、実行しているタイマーが満了した際に本手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UEは、PDUセッションの切断や無効化が原因で各装置のコンテキストの更新が必要な際に登録手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UEは、UEのPDUセッション確立に関する、能力情報、及び/又はプリファレンスに変化が生じた場合、登録手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UEは、定期的に登録手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UEは、UE設定更新手続きの完了に基づいて、登録手続きを開始してもよい。尚、UEは、これらに限らず、任意のタイミングで登録手続きを実行することができる。
The UE may start the registration procedure when it has mobility across TAs. In other words, the UE may initiate the registration process when it moves to a TA that is different from the TA shown in the TA list it holds. In addition, the UE may initiate this procedure when the running timer expires. In addition, the UE may initiate the registration process when the context of each device needs to be updated due to disconnection or invalidation of the PDU session. In addition, the UE may initiate the registration process if there is a change in capability information and / or preferences regarding the establishment of the UE's PDU session. In addition, the UE may initiate the registration process on a regular basis. Further, the UE may start the registration procedure based on the completion of the UE setting update procedure. The UE is not limited to these, and can execute the registration procedure at any timing.
さらに、UEは、登録状態であっても、定期的に登録手続きを開始してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、タイマーの満了に基づいて、登録手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UEは、LADN情報を記憶している状態で、登録手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、UEは、PDUセッションを確立している状態で、登録手続きを開始してもよい。尚、前記PDUセッションは、LADN情報に対応づけられたPDUセッションであってもよいし、LADNのためのPDUセッションであってもよい。さらに、前記PDUセッションは、NSSAIに対応づけられたPDUセッションであってもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may start the registration procedure on a regular basis even if it is in the registered state. In other words, the UE may initiate the registration process based on the expiration of the timer. Further, the UE may start the registration procedure with the LADN information stored. In addition, the UE may initiate the registration process with the PDU session established. The PDU session may be a PDU session associated with LADN information, or may be a PDU session for LADN. Further, the PDU session may be a PDU session associated with NSSAI.
尚、UEのモビリティに基づいて実行される登録手続きと、定期的に実行される登録手続きとを、モビリティと登録更新のための登録手続きと表現してもよい。言い換えると、モビリティと登録更新のための登録手続きは、UEのモビリティに基づいて実行される登録手続きであってもよく、定期的に実行される登録手続きであってもよい。さらに、モビリティと登録更新のための登録手続きは、UEの設定更新に基づいて実行される登録手続きであってもよい。さらに、モビリティと登録更新のための登録手続きは、ユーザデータを送受信するための通信路を確立するために実行する登録手続きであってもよい。さらに、モビリティと登録更新のための登録手続きは、ネットワークからの要求に基づいて実行される登録手続きであってもよい。さらに、言い換えると、モビリティと登録更新のための登録手続きは、初期の登録手続き以外の登録手続きであってよい。以下、モビリティと登録更新のための登録手続きを、本手続きと表現してもよい。
Note that the registration procedure executed based on the mobility of the UE and the registration procedure executed regularly may be expressed as the registration procedure for mobility and registration renewal. In other words, the registration procedure for mobility and renewal of registration may be a registration procedure performed based on the mobility of the UE, or may be a registration procedure performed periodically. Further, the registration procedure for mobility and registration renewal may be a registration procedure executed based on the setting update of the UE. Further, the registration procedure for mobility and registration renewal may be a registration procedure executed to establish a communication path for transmitting and receiving user data. Further, the registration procedure for mobility and registration renewal may be a registration procedure performed based on a request from the network. Further, in other words, the registration procedure for mobility and registration renewal may be a registration procedure other than the initial registration procedure. Hereinafter, the registration procedure for mobility and registration renewal may be referred to as this procedure.
次に、登録手続きの各ステップを説明していく。尚、以下で説明する登録手続きは、初期の登録手続きであってもよいし、モビリティと登録更新のための登録手続きであってもよい。
Next, we will explain each step of the registration procedure. The registration procedure described below may be an initial registration procedure or a registration procedure for mobility and registration renewal.
まず、UEは、AMFに登録要求(Registration request)メッセージを送信することにより(S800)(S802)(S804)、登録手続きを開始する。具体的には、UEは、登録要求メッセージを含むRRCメッセージを、5G AN(又はgNB)に送信する(S800)。尚、登録要求メッセージは、NASメッセージである。また、RRCメッセージは、UEと5G AN(又はgNB)との間で送受信される制御メッセージであってよい。また、NASメッセージはNASレイヤで処理され、RRCメッセージはRRCレイヤで処理される。尚、NASレイヤはRRCレイヤよりも上位のレイヤである。
First, the UE starts the registration procedure by sending a registration request message to AMF (S800) (S802) (S804). Specifically, the UE sends an RRC message including a registration request message to 5GAN (or gNB) (S800). The registration request message is a NAS message. Further, the RRC message may be a control message transmitted / received between the UE and 5GAN (or gNB). In addition, NAS messages are processed in the NAS layer, and RRC messages are processed in the RRC layer. The NAS layer is a layer higher than the RRC layer.
ここで、UEは、1つ以上の識別情報を、登録要求メッセージ及び/又はRRCメッセージに含めて送信することができるが、これらとは異なる制御メッセージ、例えば、RRCレイヤよりも下位のレイヤ(例えば、MACレイヤ、RLCレイヤ、PDCPレイヤ)の制御メッセージに含めて送信してもよい。尚、UEは、これらの識別情報を、送信することで、UEが各機能をサポートしていることを示してもよいし、UEの要求を示してもよい。さらに、複数の識別情報が送受信される場合、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報は、1以上の識別情報として構成されてもよい。尚、各機能のサポートを示す情報と、各機能の使用の要求を示す情報は、同じ識別情報と送受信されてもよいし、異なる識別情報として送受信されてもよい。
Here, the UE may send one or more identification information by including it in a registration request message and / or an RRC message, but a control message different from these, for example, a layer lower than the RRC layer (for example, an RRC layer). , MAC layer, RLC layer, PDCP layer) may be included in the control message and transmitted. By transmitting these identification information, the UE may indicate that the UE supports each function, or may indicate a request of the UE. Further, when a plurality of identification information is transmitted and received, two or more identification information of these identification information may be configured as one or more identification information. The information indicating the support of each function and the information indicating the request for using each function may be transmitted / received to the same identification information or may be transmitted / received as different identification information.
また、UEは、登録要求メッセージにSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ)を含めて送信することで、又は登録要求メッセージとともにSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ)を送信することで、登録手続き中にPDUセッション確立手続きを開始してもよい。
The UE can also send the registration request message by including the SM message (eg, PDU session establishment request message), or by sending the SM message (eg, PDU session establishment request message) together with the registration request message. The PDU session establishment procedure may be started during the registration procedure.
5G AN(又はgNB)は、登録要求メッセージを含むRRCメッセージを受信すると、登録要求メッセージを転送するAMFを選択する(S802)。尚、5G AN(又はgNB)は、登録要求メッセージ及び/又はRRCメッセージに含まれる情報に基づいて、AMFを選択することができる。5G AN(又はgNB)は、受信したRRCメッセージから登録要求メッセージを取り出し、選択したAMFに、登録要求メッセージを転送する(S804)。
When 5GAN (or gNB) receives an RRC message including a registration request message, it selects the AMF to which the registration request message is forwarded (S802). Note that 5GAN (or gNB) can select AMF based on the information contained in the registration request message and / or RRC message. 5GAN (or gNB) extracts the registration request message from the received RRC message and forwards the registration request message to the selected AMF (S804).
AMFは、登録要求メッセージを受信した場合、第1の条件判別を実行することができる。第1の条件判別とは、ネットワーク(又はAMF)がUEの要求を受諾するか否かを判別するためのものである。AMFは、第1の条件判別が真の場合、図7の(A)の手続きを開始するのに対し、第1の条件判別が偽の場合、図7の(B)の手続きを開始する。
When the AMF receives the registration request message, it can execute the first condition determination. The first conditional determination is for determining whether or not the network (or AMF) accepts the UE's request. The AMF initiates the procedure (A) in FIG. 7 if the first condition determination is true, whereas the AMF initiates the procedure (B) in FIG. 7 if the first condition determination is false.
尚、第1の条件判別は、登録要求メッセージの受信、及び/又は登録要求メッセージに含まれる各識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報、及び/又はAMFが保持するコンテキスト等に基づいて、実行されてもよい。例えば、UEの要求をネットワークが許可する場合、第1の条件判別は真であり、UEの要求をネットワークが許可しない場合、第1の条件判別は偽でよい。また、UEの登録先のネットワーク、及び/又はネットワーク内の装置が、UEの要求する機能をサポートしている場合、第1の条件判別は真であり、UEの要求する機能をサポートしていない場合、第1の条件判別は偽でよい。さらに、送受信される識別情報が許可される場合、第1の条件判別は真であり、送受信される識別情報が許可されない場合、第1の条件判別は偽でよい。尚、第1の条件判別の真偽が決まる条件は前述した条件に限らなくてもよい。
The first condition determination is the reception of the registration request message and / or each identification information contained in the registration request message, and / or the subscriber information, and / or the network capability information, and / or the operator policy, and It may be executed based on / or the state of the network and / or the user's registration information and / or the context held by AMF. For example, if the network allows the UE request, the first condition determination is true, and if the network does not allow the UE request, the first condition determination may be false. Also, if the network to which the UE is registered and / or the devices in the network support the functions required by the UE, the first condition determination is true and does not support the functions required by the UE. In this case, the first condition determination may be false. Further, if the transmitted / received identification information is permitted, the first conditional determination may be true, and if the transmitted / received identification information is not permitted, the first conditional determination may be false. The condition for determining the truth of the first condition determination is not limited to the above-mentioned condition.
まず、第1の条件判別が真の場合について説明する。AMFは、図7の(A)の手続きにおいて、まず第4の条件判別を実行することができる。第4の条件判別は、AMFがSMFとの間でSMメッセージの送受信を実施するか否かを判別するためのものである。
First, the case where the first condition discrimination is true will be described. The AMF can first execute the fourth condition determination in the procedure (A) of FIG. The fourth condition determination is for determining whether or not the AMF sends and receives SM messages to and from the SMF.
尚、第4の条件判別は、AMFがSMメッセージを受信したか否かに基づいて実行されてよい。また、第4の条件判別は、登録要求メッセージにSMメッセージが含まれているかに基づいて、実行されてもよい。例えば、AMFがSMメッセージを受信した場合、及び/又は登録要求メッセージにSMメッセージが含まれていた場合、第4の条件判別は真であってよく、AMFがSMメッセージを受信しなかった場合、及び/又は登録要求メッセージにSMメッセージが含まれていなかった場合、第4の条件判別は偽であってよい。尚、第4の条件判別の真偽が決まる条件は前述した条件に限らなくてもよい。
The fourth condition determination may be executed based on whether or not the AMF has received the SM message. Further, the fourth condition determination may be executed based on whether the registration request message includes the SM message. For example, if the AMF received the SM message and / or if the registration request message contained the SM message, the fourth condition determination may be true and if the AMF did not receive the SM message. And / or if the registration request message does not contain an SM message, the fourth condition determination may be false. The condition for determining the truth of the fourth condition determination is not limited to the above-mentioned condition.
AMFは、第4の条件判別が真の場合には、SMFを選択し、選択されたSMFとの間でSMメッセージの送受信を実行するのに対し、第4の条件判別が偽の場合には、それらを実行しない(S806)。また、AMFは、第4の条件判別が真の場合であっても、SMFから拒絶を示すSMメッセージを受信した場合には、図7の(A)の手続きを中止する場合がある。このとき、AMFは、図7の(B)の手続きを開始することができる。
AMF selects SMF if the fourth condition is true and sends and receives SM messages to and from the selected SMF, whereas AMF is false if the fourth condition is false. , Do not execute them (S806). Further, even if the fourth condition determination is true, the AMF may cancel the procedure of FIG. 7 (A) when it receives an SM message indicating rejection from the SMF. At this time, AMF can start the procedure of (B) in FIG.
尚、AMFは、S806において、SMFとの間でSMメッセージの送受信を行う際に、登録要求メッセージで受信した識別情報をSMFに通知することができる。SMFは、AMFとの間で、SMメッセージの送受信によって、AMFから受信した識別情報を取得することができる。
In S806, when sending and receiving SM messages to and from SMF, AMF can notify SMF of the identification information received in the registration request message. The SMF can acquire the identification information received from the AMF by sending and receiving SM messages to and from the AMF.
次に、AMFは、登録要求メッセージの受信、及び/又はSMFとの間のSMメッセージの送受信の完了に基づいて、登録要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージとして、5G AN(又はgNB)を介して、UEに登録受諾(Registration accept)メッセージを送信する(S808)。例えば、第4の条件判別が偽の場合、AMFは、UEからの登録要求メッセージの受信に基づいて、登録受諾メッセージを送信してもよい。また、第4の条件判別が真の場合、AMFは、SMFとの間のSMメッセージの送受信の完了に基づいて、登録受諾メッセージを送信してもよい。尚、登録受諾メッセージは、N1インターフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであるが、UEと5G AN(gNB)間はRRCメッセージに含まれて送受信される。
The AMF then sends the UE via 5GAN (or gNB) as a response message to the registration request message based on the receipt of the registration request message and / or the completion of sending and receiving the SM message to and from the SMF. Send a Registration accept message (S808). For example, if the fourth condition determination is false, the AMF may send a registration acceptance message based on the receipt of the registration request message from the UE. Further, if the fourth condition determination is true, the AMF may send a registration acceptance message based on the completion of sending and receiving the SM message to and from the SMF. The registration acceptance message is a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface, but it is included in the RRC message and sent and received between the UE and 5GAN (gNB).
AMFは、登録受諾メッセージに1つ以上の識別情報を含めて送信してもよい。尚、AMFは、これらの識別情報を送信することで、ネットワークが各機能をサポートしていることを示してもよいし、UEの要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。さらに、複数の識別情報が送受信される場合、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報は、1以上の識別情報として構成されてもよい。尚、各機能のサポートを示す情報と、各機能の使用の要求を示す情報は、同じ識別情報と送受信されてもよいし、異なる識別情報として送受信されてもよい。
AMF may send one or more identification information in the registration acceptance message. By transmitting these identification information, the AMF may indicate that the network supports each function, or may indicate that the UE request has been accepted. Further, when a plurality of identification information is transmitted and received, two or more identification information of these identification information may be configured as one or more identification information. The information indicating the support of each function and the information indicating the request for using each function may be transmitted / received to the same identification information or may be transmitted / received as different identification information.
尚、AMFは、どの識別情報を登録受諾メッセージに含めるかを、受信した各識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報、及び/又はAMFが保持するコンテキスト等に基づいて、選択、決定してもよい。
In addition, AMF indicates which identification information is included in the registration acceptance message, each identification information received, and / or subscriber information, and / or network capability information, and / or operator policy, and / or network status. , And / or based on the user's registration information and / or the context held by AMF, etc., may be selected and determined.
また、AMFは、登録受諾メッセージにSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ)を含めて送信するか、又は登録受諾メッセージとともにSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ)を送信することができる。ただし、この送信方法は、登録要求メッセージの中にSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ)が含められており、かつ、第4の条件判別が真の場合に、実行されてもよい。また、この送信方法は、登録要求メッセージとともにSMメッセージ(例えば、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ)を含められており、かつ、第4の条件判別が真の場合に、実行されてもよい。AMFは、このような送信方法を行うことにより、登録手続きにおいて、SMのための手続きが受諾されたことを示すことができる。
Further, the AMF can send the registration acceptance message including the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment acceptance message), or send the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment acceptance message) together with the registration acceptance message. However, this transmission method may be executed when the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment request message) is included in the registration request message and the fourth condition determination is true. Further, this transmission method may be executed when the SM message (for example, the PDU session establishment request message) is included together with the registration request message and the fourth condition determination is true. By performing such a transmission method, the AMF can indicate that the procedure for SM has been accepted in the registration procedure.
また、AMFは、受信した各識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報、及び/又はAMFが保持するコンテキスト等に基づいて、登録受諾メッセージを送信することで、UEの要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。
AMF also receives each identification information and / or subscriber information and / or network capability information, and / or operator policy, and / or network status, and / or user registration information, and / or. It may be shown that the request of the UE has been accepted by sending the registration acceptance message based on the context held by the AMF.
さらに、AMFは、登録受諾メッセージに、UEの一部の要求が拒絶されたことを示す情報を含めて送信してもよいし、UEの一部の要求が拒絶されたことを示す情報を送信することで、UEの一部の要求が拒絶された理由を示してもよい。さらに、UEは、UEの一部の要求が拒絶されたことを示す情報を受信することで、UEの一部の要求が拒絶された理由を認識してもよい。尚、拒絶された理由は、AMFが受信した識別情報が示す内容が許可されていないことを示す情報であってもよい。
In addition, the AMF may send the registration acceptance message with information indicating that some of the UE's requests have been rejected, or it may send information indicating that some of the UE's requests have been rejected. This may indicate the reason why some of the UE's requests were rejected. In addition, the UE may recognize why some of the UE's requests have been rejected by receiving information indicating that some of the UE's requests have been rejected. The reason for rejection may be information indicating that the content indicated by the identification information received by AMF is not permitted.
UEは、5G AN(gNB)介して、登録受諾メッセージを受信する(S808)。UEは、登録受諾メッセージを受信することで、登録要求メッセージによるUEの要求が受諾されたこと、及び登録受諾メッセージに含まれる各種の識別情報の内容を認識することができる。
The UE receives the registration acceptance message via 5GAN (gNB) (S808). By receiving the registration acceptance message, the UE can recognize that the UE's request by the registration request message has been accepted and the contents of various identification information contained in the registration acceptance message.
UEは、さらに、登録受諾メッセージに対する応答メッセージとして、登録完了メッセージを、5G AN(gNB)介して、AMFに送信することができる(S810)。尚、UEは、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ等のSMメッセージを受信した場合は、登録完了メッセージに、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージ等のSMメッセージを含めて送信してもよいし、SMメッセージを含めることで、SMのための手続きが完了したことを示してもよい。ここで、登録完了メッセージは、N1インターフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであるが、UEと5G AN(gNB)間はRRCメッセージに含まれて送受信される。
The UE can also send a registration completion message to AMF via 5GAN (gNB) as a response message to the registration acceptance message (S810). When the UE receives an SM message such as a PDU session establishment acceptance message, the UE may send the registration completion message including the SM message such as the PDU session establishment completion message, or by including the SM message. , May indicate that the procedure for SM has been completed. Here, the registration completion message is a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface, but is included in the RRC message and sent and received between the UE and 5GAN (gNB).
AMFは、5G AN(gNB)介して、登録完了メッセージを受信する(S810)。また、各装置は、登録受諾メッセージ、及び/又は登録完了メッセージの送受信に基づき、図7の(A)の手続きを完了する。
AMF receives a registration completion message via 5GAN (gNB) (S810). Further, each device completes the procedure (A) in FIG. 7 based on the transmission / reception of the registration acceptance message and / or the registration completion message.
次に、第1の条件判別が偽の場合について説明する。AMFは、図7の(B)の手続きにおいて、登録要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージとして、5G AN(gNB)を介して、UEに登録拒絶(Registration reject)メッセージを送信する(S812)。ここで、登録拒絶メッセージは、N1インターフェース上で送受信されるNASメッセージであるが、UEと5G AN(gNB)間はRRCメッセージに含まれて送受信される。
Next, the case where the first condition discrimination is false will be described. In the procedure (B) of FIG. 7, the AMF sends a registration rejection message to the UE via 5GAN (gNB) as a response message to the registration request message (S812). Here, the registration refusal message is a NAS message sent and received on the N1 interface, but is included in the RRC message and sent and received between the UE and 5GAN (gNB).
尚、AMFは、登録拒絶メッセージを送信することで、登録要求メッセージによるUEの要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。さらに、AMFは、登録拒絶メッセージに拒絶された理由を示す情報を含めて送信してもよいし、拒絶された理由を送信することで拒絶された理由を示してもよい。さらに、UEは、UEの要求が拒絶された理由を示す情報を受信することで、UEの要求が拒絶された理由を認識してもよい。尚、拒絶された理由は、AMFが受信した識別情報が示す内容が許可されていないことを示す情報であってもよい。
Note that the AMF may indicate that the UE request by the registration request message has been rejected by sending the registration refusal message. In addition, the AMF may send the registration refusal message with information indicating the reason for refusal, or may send the reason for refusal to indicate the reason for refusal. Further, the UE may recognize the reason why the UE's request is rejected by receiving the information indicating the reason why the UE's request is rejected. The reason for rejection may be information indicating that the content indicated by the identification information received by AMF is not permitted.
UEは、5G AN(gNB)介して、登録拒絶メッセージを受信する(S812)。UEは、登録拒絶メッセージを受信することで、登録要求メッセージによるUEの要求が拒絶されたこと、及び登録拒絶メッセージに含まれる各種の識別情報の内容を認識することができる。また、UEは、登録要求メッセージを送信した後、所定の期間が経過しても、登録拒絶メッセージを受信しない場合には、UEの要求が拒絶されたことを認識してもよい。各装置は、登録拒絶メッセージの送受信に基づき、本手続き中の(B)の手続きを完了する。
UE receives a registration refusal message via 5GAN (gNB) (S812). By receiving the registration refusal message, the UE can recognize that the UE's request by the registration request message has been rejected and the contents of various identification information contained in the registration refusal message. Further, the UE may recognize that the request of the UE has been rejected if the registration refusal message is not received even after a predetermined period has elapsed after the registration request message is transmitted. Each device completes the procedure (B) in this procedure based on the transmission / reception of the registration refusal message.
尚、図7の(B)の手続きは、図7の(A)の手続きを中止した場合に開始される場合もある。図7の(A)の手続きにおいて、第4の条件判別が真の場合、AMFは、登録拒絶メッセージに、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージ等の拒絶を意味するSMメッセージを含めて送信してもよいし、拒絶を意味するSMメッセージを含めることで、SMのための手続きが拒絶されたことを示してもよい。その場合、UEは、さらに、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージ等の拒絶を意味するSMメッセージを受信してもよいし、SMのための手続きが拒絶されたことを認識してもよい。
Note that the procedure (B) in Fig. 7 may be started when the procedure in (A) in Fig. 7 is canceled. In the procedure (A) of FIG. 7, if the fourth condition determination is true, the AMF may send the registration refusal message including the SM message indicating rejection such as the PDU session establishment refusal message. , The inclusion of an SM message indicating rejection may indicate that the procedure for SM has been rejected. In that case, the UE may further receive an SM message indicating rejection, such as a PDU session establishment refusal message, or may recognize that the procedure for SM has been rejected.
各装置は、図7の(A)又は(B)の手続きの完了に基づいて、登録手続きを完了する。尚、各装置は、図7の(A)の手続きの完了に基づいて、UEがネットワークに登録された状態(RM_REGISTERED state)に遷移してもよいし、図7の(B)の手続きの完了に基づいて、UEがネットワークに登録されていない状態(RM_DEREGISTERED state)を維持してもよいし、UEがネットワークに登録されていない状態へ遷移してもよい。また、各装置の各状態への遷移は、登録手続きの完了に基づいて行われてもよく、PDUセッションの確立に基づいて行われてもよい。
Each device completes the registration procedure based on the completion of the procedure (A) or (B) in Fig. 7. Each device may transition to the state in which the UE is registered in the network (RM_REGISTERED state) based on the completion of the procedure (A) in FIG. 7, or the procedure in (B) in FIG. 7 is completed. Based on the above, the UE may be maintained in the state of not being registered in the network (RM_DEREGISTERED state), or the UE may be transitioned to the state of not being registered in the network. Further, the transition of each device to each state may be performed based on the completion of the registration procedure or may be performed based on the establishment of the PDU session.
さらに、各装置は、登録手続きの完了に基づいて、登録手続きで送受信した情報に基づいた処理を実施してもよい。例えば、UEの一部の要求が拒絶されたことを示す情報を送受信した場合、UEの要求が拒絶された理由を認識してもよい。さらに、各装置は、UEの要求が拒絶された理由に基づいて、再度本手続きを実施してもよいし、コアネットワーク_Bや別のセルに対して登録手続きを実施してもよい。
Further, each device may perform processing based on the information transmitted / received in the registration procedure based on the completion of the registration procedure. For example, when sending and receiving information indicating that a part of the UE's request has been rejected, the reason why the UE's request has been rejected may be recognized. Further, each device may carry out this procedure again based on the reason why the request of the UE is rejected, or may carry out the registration procedure for the core network_B or another cell.
さらに、UEは、登録手続きの完了に基づいて、登録受諾メッセージ、及び/又は登録拒絶メッセージとともに受信した識別情報を記憶してもよいし、ネットワークの決定を認識してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may store the identification information received with the registration acceptance message and / or the registration refusal message based on the completion of the registration procedure, and may recognize the network decision.
[3.2.2. PDUセッション確立手続き]
次に、DNに対してPDUセッションを確立するために行うPDUセッション確立手続き (PDU session establishment procedure) の概要について、図8を用いて説明する。PDUセッション確立手続きは、5GSにおける手続きである。以下、本手続きとはPDUセッション確立手続きを指す。PDUセッション確立手続きは、各装置がPDUセッションを確立する為の手続きである。尚、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きを、登録手続きが完了して登録状態となった任意のタイミングで開始することができる。また、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きを、登録手続きの中で実行することができてもよい。また、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了に基づいて、PDUセッションを確立してもよい。 [3.2.2. PDU session establishment procedure]
Next, an outline of the PDU session establishment procedure for establishing a PDU session for a DN will be described with reference to FIG. The PDU session establishment procedure is a procedure in 5GS. Hereinafter, this procedure refers to the procedure for establishing a PDU session. The PDU session establishment procedure is a procedure for each device to establish a PDU session. Each device can start the PDU session establishment procedure at any time when the registration procedure is completed and the registration state is reached. In addition, each device may be able to execute the PDU session establishment procedure in the registration procedure. In addition, each device may establish a PDU session based on the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure.
次に、DNに対してPDUセッションを確立するために行うPDUセッション確立手続き (PDU session establishment procedure) の概要について、図8を用いて説明する。PDUセッション確立手続きは、5GSにおける手続きである。以下、本手続きとはPDUセッション確立手続きを指す。PDUセッション確立手続きは、各装置がPDUセッションを確立する為の手続きである。尚、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きを、登録手続きが完了して登録状態となった任意のタイミングで開始することができる。また、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きを、登録手続きの中で実行することができてもよい。また、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了に基づいて、PDUセッションを確立してもよい。 [3.2.2. PDU session establishment procedure]
Next, an outline of the PDU session establishment procedure for establishing a PDU session for a DN will be described with reference to FIG. The PDU session establishment procedure is a procedure in 5GS. Hereinafter, this procedure refers to the procedure for establishing a PDU session. The PDU session establishment procedure is a procedure for each device to establish a PDU session. Each device can start the PDU session establishment procedure at any time when the registration procedure is completed and the registration state is reached. In addition, each device may be able to execute the PDU session establishment procedure in the registration procedure. In addition, each device may establish a PDU session based on the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure.
尚、PDUセッション確立手続きは、UEが主導して開始される手続きであってよいし、UEが要求して開始される手続きであってよい。言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きは、UE要求のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きを複数回実行することにより、複数のPDUセッションを確立することができる。
The PDU session establishment procedure may be a procedure initiated by the UE or a procedure requested and initiated by the UE. In other words, the PDU session establishment procedure may be a UE request PDU session establishment procedure. Each device can establish a plurality of PDU sessions by executing the PDU session establishment procedure a plurality of times.
ここで、PDUセッション確立手続きが、LADNのためのPDUセッションを確立するためのPDUセッション確立手続きである場合、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了に基づいて、LADNのためのPDUセッションを確立してもよい。言い換えると、PDUセッション確立手続きが、LADN DNNを用いたPDUセッション確立手続きである場合、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了に基づいて、LADNのためのPDUセッションを確立してもよい。
Here, if the PDU session establishment procedure is a PDU session establishment procedure for establishing a PDU session for LADN, each device establishes a PDU session for LADN based on the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure. You may. In other words, if the PDU session establishment procedure is a PDU session establishment procedure using LADN DNN, each device may establish a PDU session for LADN based on the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure.
さらに、UEは、LADNへの接続が可能であるエリアに位置している場合、及び/又はLADN service areaに位置している場合、LADNのためのPDUセッションを確立するために、PDUセッション確立手続きを開始してもよい。逆に、UEは、LADN service areaの外に位置している場合、LADNのためのPDUセッションを確立するためのPDUセッション確立手続きの実行が禁止されていてもよい。
In addition, if the UE is located in an area where connection to LADN is possible and / or in the LADN service area, the PDU session establishment procedure to establish a PDU session for LADN. May start. Conversely, if the UE is located outside the LADN service area, execution of the PDU session establishment procedure for establishing a PDU session for LADN may be prohibited.
言い換えると、各装置は、UEがLADNへの接続が可能であるエリアに位置している場合、及び/又はUEがLADN service areaに位置している場合、LADNのためのPDUセッションを確立するために、PDUセッション確立手続きを実行してもよい。逆に、ネットワーク装置は、UEがLADN service areaの外に位置している場合、LADNのためのPDUセッションを確立するためのPDUセッション確立手続きの要求を拒絶してもよい。
In other words, each device establishes a PDU session for LADN if the UE is located in an area where it can connect to LADN and / or if the UE is located in the LADN service area. In addition, the PDU session establishment procedure may be executed. Conversely, the network device may reject the request for a PDU session establishment procedure to establish a PDU session for LADN if the UE is located outside the LADN service area.
まず、UEは、5G AN(gNB)及びAMFを介して、SMFにPDUセッション確立要求(PDU session establishment request)メッセージを含むNASメッセージを送信することにより(S900)(S902)(S904)、PDUセッション確立手続きを開始する。
First, the UE sends a NAS message containing a PDU session establishment request message to the SMF via 5GAN (gNB) and AMF (S900) (S902) (S904), PDU session. Start the establishment procedure.
具体的には、UEは、N1インターフェースを介して、5G AN(gNB)を介して、AMFに、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを含むNASメッセージを送信する(S900)。尚、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを含むNASメッセージは、MMメッセージであってもよい。さらに、MMメッセージは、アップリンクNASトランスポート(UL NAS TRANSPORT)メッセージであってもよい。ここで、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに、識別情報、及び/又は値を含めると表現した場合、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを含むMMメッセージに含めることを意味してもよい。
Specifically, the UE sends a NAS message including a PDU session establishment request message to AMF via 5GAN (gNB) via the N1 interface (S900). The NAS message including the PDU session establishment request message may be an MM message. Further, the MM message may be an uplink NAS transport (UL NAS TRANSPORT) message. Here, when it is expressed that the PDU session establishment request message includes identification information and / or a value, it may mean that it is included in the MM message including the PDU session establishment request message.
ここで、UEは、少なくとも第11から第13の識別情報の内、1つ以上の識別情報を、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ及び/又はNASメッセージに含めて送信することができるが、これらとは異なる制御メッセージ、例えば、RRCレイヤよりも下位のレイヤ(例えば、MACレイヤ、RLCレイヤ、PDCPレイヤ)の制御メッセージに含めて送信してもよい。これらの識別情報は、これらのメッセージに含められることで、UEの要求を示してもよい。さらに、複数の識別情報が送受信される場合、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報は、1以上の識別情報として構成されてもよい。
Here, the UE may transmit at least one of the 11th to 13th identification information including the identification information in the PDU session establishment request message and / or the NAS message, but these are different. It may be included in the control message of a control message, for example, a layer lower than the RRC layer (for example, a MAC layer, an RLC layer, a PDCP layer) and transmitted. These identifications may be included in these messages to indicate the UE's request. Further, when a plurality of identification information is transmitted and received, two or more identification information of these identification information may be configured as one or more identification information.
具体的には、UEは、第11の識別情報を、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含めてもよい。さらに、UEは、少なくとも第11の識別情報を含むPDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、第12の識別情報、及び/又は第13の識別情報をアップリンクNASトランスポートメッセージに含めてもよい。さらに、UEは、前記アップリンクNASトランスポートメッセージを、AMFに送信してもよい(S900)。言い換えると、UEは、第11の識別情報を含むPDUセッション確立要求メッセージと共に、第12の識別情報、及び/又は第13の識別情報をAMFに送信してもよい。さらに言い換えると、UEは、第12の識別情報、及び/又は第13の識別情報と共に、第11の識別情報を含むPDUセッション確立要求メッセージをAMFに送信してもよい。
Specifically, the UE may include the eleventh identification information in the PDU session establishment request message. Further, the UE may include the twelfth identification information and / or the thirteenth identification information in the uplink NAS transport message together with the PDU session establishment request message containing at least the eleventh identification information. In addition, the UE may send the uplink NAS transport message to the AMF (S900). In other words, the UE may send the twelfth identification information and / or the thirteenth identification information to the AMF together with the PDU session establishment request message containing the eleventh identification information. In other words, the UE may send a PDU session establishment request message containing the eleventh identification information to the AMF together with the twelfth identification information and / or the thirteenth identification information.
さらに、UEは、第11の識別情報を送信することで、第11の識別情報が示すPDUセッションタイプのPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの確立の要求を示してもよい。さらに、UEは、第11の識別情報を送信することで、UEが要求するPDUセッションタイプを示してもよい。
Further, the UE may indicate a request for establishment of the PDU session establishment request message of the PDU session type indicated by the eleventh identification information by transmitting the eleventh identification information. Further, the UE may indicate the PDU session type requested by the UE by transmitting the eleventh identification information.
さらに、UEは、第12の識別情報を送信することで、第12の識別情報が示すDNNに対応づけられるPDUセッションの確立の要求を示してもよい。さらに、UEは、第12の識別情報を送信することで、UEが要求するDNNを示してもよい。尚、第12の識別情報は、第12の識別情報と共に送受信される識別情報が示す一又は複数の機能をサポートするDNを識別するDNNであってよい。さらに、第12の識別情報は、登録手続きで受信したDNNであってもよく、LADN DNNであってもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may indicate a request to establish a PDU session associated with the DNN indicated by the twelfth identification information by transmitting the twelfth identification information. Further, the UE may indicate the DNN requested by the UE by transmitting the twelfth identification information. The twelfth identification information may be a DNN that identifies a DN that supports one or more functions indicated by the identification information transmitted and received together with the twelfth identification information. Further, the twelfth identification information may be the DNN received in the registration procedure or may be the LADN DNN.
さらに、UEは、第13の識別情報を送信することで、第13の識別情報が示すS-NSSAIに対応づけられるPDUセッションの確立の要求を示してもよい。さらに、UEは、第13の識別情報を送信することで、UEが要求するS-NSSAIを示してもよい。尚、第13の識別情報は、第13の識別情報と共に送受信される識別情報が示す一又は複数の機能をサポートするNSを識別するS-NSSAIであってよい。
Furthermore, the UE may indicate a request for establishing a PDU session associated with the S-NSSAI indicated by the thirteenth identification information by transmitting the thirteenth identification information. Further, the UE may indicate the S-NSSAI requested by the UE by transmitting the thirteenth identification information. The thirteenth identification information may be S-NSSAI that identifies an NS that supports one or more functions indicated by the identification information transmitted and received together with the thirteenth identification information.
AMFは、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを含むNASメッセージを受信する(S900)と、NASメッセージからPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを取り出すとともに、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージの転送先としてSMFを選択する(S902)。尚、AMFは、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ及び/又はNASメッセージに含まれる各識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報、及び/又はAMFが保持するコンテキスト等に基づいて、転送先のSMFを選択してもよい。
When the AMF receives the NAS message including the PDU session establishment request message (S900), it extracts the PDU session establishment request message from the NAS message and selects SMF as the forwarding destination of the PDU session establishment request message (S902). In addition, AMF shall include each identification information and / or subscriber information contained in the PDU session establishment request message and / or NAS message, and / or network capability information, and / or operator policy, and / or network status. And / or the transfer destination SMF may be selected based on the user's registration information and / or the context held by the AMF.
AMFは、選択したSMFに、N11インターフェースを介して、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを転送する(S904)。
AMF forwards the PDU session establishment request message to the selected SMF via the N11 interface (S904).
SMFは、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを受信(S904)すると、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含まれる各種の識別情報を認識する。そして、SMFは、第3の条件判別を実行する。第3の条件判別は、SMFが、UEの要求を受諾するか否かを判断する為のものである。第3の条件判別において、SMFは第3の条件判別が真であるか偽であるかを判定する。SMFは、第3の条件判別が真の場合、図8の(A)の手続きを開始し、第3の条件判別が偽の場合、図8の(B)の手続きを開始する。
When the SMF receives the PDU session establishment request message (S904), it recognizes various identification information contained in the PDU session establishment request message. Then, the SMF executes the third condition determination. The third condition determination is for the SMF to determine whether or not to accept the UE's request. In the third condition determination, the SMF determines whether the third condition determination is true or false. If the third condition determination is true, the procedure of FIG. 8 (A) is started, and if the third condition determination is false, the procedure of FIG. 8 (B) is started.
尚、第3の条件判別は、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージ、及び/又はPDUセッション確立要求メッセージに含まれる各識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報、及び/又はSMFが保持するコンテキスト等に基づいて、実行されてもよい。例えば、UEの要求をネットワークが許可する場合、第3の条件判別は真でよい。また、UEの要求をネットワークが許可しない場合、第3の条件判別は偽でよい。さらに、UEの接続先のネットワーク、及び/又はネットワーク内の装置が、UEが要求する機能をサポートしている場合、第3の条件判別は真でよく、UEが要求する機能をサポートしていない場合、第3の条件判別は偽でよい。さらに、送受信される識別情報が許可される場合、第3の条件判別は真であり、送受信される識別情報が許可されない場合、第3の条件判別は偽でよい。尚、第3の条件判別の真偽が決まる条件は前述した条件に限らなくてもよい。
The third condition determination is the PDU session establishment request message and / or each identification information included in the PDU session establishment request message, and / or the subscriber information, and / or the network capability information, and / or the operator policy. , And / or based on the state of the network, and / or the user's registration information, and / or the context held by the SMF, etc. For example, if the network allows the UE request, the third condition may be true. Also, if the network does not allow the UE request, the third condition determination may be false. Furthermore, if the network to which the UE is connected and / or the devices in the network support the functions required by the UE, the third condition determination may be true and does not support the functions required by the UE. In this case, the third condition determination may be false. Further, if the transmitted / received identification information is permitted, the third condition determination may be true, and if the transmitted / received identification information is not permitted, the third condition determination may be false. The condition for determining the truth of the third condition determination is not limited to the above-mentioned condition.
次に、第3の条件判別が真の場合のステップ、すなわち図8の(A)の手続きの各ステップを説明する。SMFは、PDUセッションの確立先のUPFを選択し、選択したUPFに、N4インターフェースを介して、セッション確立要求メッセージを送信し(S906)、図8の(A)の手続きを開始する。
Next, the steps when the third condition determination is true, that is, each step of the procedure (A) in FIG. 8 will be described. The SMF selects the UPF to which the PDU session is established, sends a session establishment request message to the selected UPF via the N4 interface (S906), and starts the procedure of (A) in FIG.
ここで、SMFは、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージの受信に基づいて取得した各識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報、及び/又はSMFが保持するコンテキスト等に基づいて、1以上のUPFを選択してもよい。尚、複数のUPFが選択された場合、SMFは、各々のUPFに対してセッション確立要求メッセージを送信してもよい。
Here, the SMF obtains each identification information and / or subscriber information and / or network capability information acquired based on the reception of the PDU session establishment request message, and / or the operator policy, and / or the network status. And / or one or more UPFs may be selected based on the user's registration information and / or the context held by the SMF. When a plurality of UPFs are selected, the SMF may send a session establishment request message to each UPF.
UPFは、N4インターフェースを介して、SMFからセッション確立要求メッセージを受信し(S906)、PDUセッションのためのコンテキストを作成する。さらに、UPFは、セッション確立要求メッセージを受信、及び/又はPDUセッションのためのコンテキストの作成に基づいて、N4インターフェースを介して、SMFにセッション確立応答メッセージを送信する(S908)。
The UPF receives the session establishment request message from the SMF (S906) via the N4 interface and creates a context for the PDU session. In addition, the UPF receives the session establishment request message and / or sends the session establishment response message to the SMF via the N4 interface based on the creation of the context for the PDU session (S908).
SMFは、セッション確立要求メッセージに対する応答メッセージとして、N4インターフェースを介して、UPFからセッション確立応答メッセージを受信する(S908)。SMFは、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージの受信、及び/又はUPFの選択、及び/又はセッション確立応答メッセージの受信に基づいて、UEに割り当てるアドレスのアドレス割り当てを行ってよい。
The SMF receives the session establishment response message from the UPF via the N4 interface as a response message to the session establishment request message (S908). The SMF may assign an address to the UE based on the reception of the PDU session establishment request message and / or the selection of the UPF and / or the reception of the session establishment response message.
SMFは、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージの受信、及び/又はUPFの選択、及び/又はセッション確立応答メッセージの受信、及び/又はUEに割り当てるアドレスのアドレス割り当ての完了に基づいて、AMFを介して、UEにPDUセッション確立受諾(PDU session establishment accept)メッセージを送信する(S910)(S912)。
The SMF receives the PDU session establishment request message and / or selects the UPF and / or receives the session establishment response message and / or the UE via the AMF based on the completion of the address assignment of the address assigned to the UE. Sends a PDU session establishment acceptance message to (S910) (S912).
具体的には、SMFは、N11インターフェースを介して、AMFにPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを送信すると(S910)、PDUセッション確立要求メッセージを受信したAMFは、N1インターフェースを介して、UEにPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを含むNASメッセージを送信する(S912)。尚、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージは、NASメッセージであり、PDUセッション確立要求に対する応答メッセージであってよい。さらに、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージは、N1インターフェースを、MMメッセージに含まれて送受信されてもよい。さらに、MMメッセージは、NASメッセージであってよく、ダウンリンクNASトランスポート(DL NAS TRANSPORT)メッセージであってもよい。ここで、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに、識別情報、及び/又は値を含めると表現した場合、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを含むMMメッセージに含めることを意味してもよい。また、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージは、PDUセッションの確立が受諾されたことを示すことができる。
Specifically, when the SMF sends a PDU session establishment acceptance message to the AMF via the N11 interface (S910), the AMF that receives the PDU session establishment request message establishes a PDU session to the UE via the N1 interface. Send a NAS message containing an acceptance message (S912). The PDU session establishment acceptance message may be a NAS message and may be a response message to the PDU session establishment request. In addition, the PDU session establishment acceptance message may be sent and received by including the N1 interface in the MM message. Further, the MM message may be a NAS message or a downlink NAS transport (DL NAS TRANSPORT) message. Here, when it is expressed that the PDU session establishment acceptance message includes identification information and / or a value, it may mean that it is included in the MM message including the PDU session establishment acceptance message. In addition, the PDU session establishment acceptance message can indicate that the PDU session establishment has been accepted.
ここで、SMF及びAMFは、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを送信することで、PDUセッション確立要求によるUEの要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。
Here, the SMF and AMF may indicate that the UE request by the PDU session establishment request has been accepted by sending the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
SMF及びAMFは、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに、少なくとも第21から第24の識別情報の内、1つ以上の識別情報を含めて送信してもよい。尚、SMF及びAMFは、これらの識別情報を送信することで、ネットワークが各機能をサポートしていることを示してもよいし、UEの要求が受諾されたことを示してもよい。さらに、複数の識別情報が送受信される場合、これらの識別情報の2以上の識別情報は、1以上の識別情報として構成されてもよい。尚、各機能のサポートを示す情報と、各機能の使用の要求を示す情報は、同じ識別情報と送受信されてもよいし、異なる識別情報として送受信されてもよい。
The SMF and AMF may send the PDU session establishment acceptance message including at least one of the 21st to 24th identification information. In addition, SMF and AMF may indicate that the network supports each function by transmitting these identification information, or may indicate that the request of the UE has been accepted. Further, when a plurality of identification information is transmitted and received, two or more identification information of these identification information may be configured as one or more identification information. The information indicating the support of each function and the information indicating the request for using each function may be transmitted / received to the same identification information or may be transmitted / received as different identification information.
さらに、SMF及びAMFは、第21の識別情報を送信することで、第21の識別情報が示すPDUセッションタイプのPDUセッションの確立要求の受諾を示してもよいし、前記PDUセッションが確立されることを示してもよい。さらに、SMF及びAMFは、第21の識別情報を送信すること、ネットワークが選択、決定したPDUセッションタイプを示してもよい。尚、第21の識別情報が示すPDUセッションタイプは、受信した第11の識別情報と同じPDUセッションタイプであってもよいし、受信した第11の識別情報とは異なるPDUセッションタイプであってもよい。
Further, the SMF and AMF may indicate acceptance of the PDU session establishment request of the PDU session type indicated by the 21st identification information by transmitting the 21st identification information, and the PDU session is established. You may show that. In addition, the SMF and AMF may indicate the PDU session type selected and determined by the network to send the 21st identification information. The PDU session type indicated by the 21st identification information may be the same PDU session type as the received 11th identification information, or may be a PDU session type different from the received 11th identification information. good.
さらに、SMF及びAMFは、第22の識別情報を送信することで、第22の識別情報が示すDNNに対応づけられるPDUセッションの確立要求の受諾を示してもよいし、前記PDUセッションが確立されることを示してもよい。さらに、SMF及びAMFは、第22の識別情報を送信すること、ネットワークが選択、決定したDNNを示してもよい。尚、第22の識別情報は、第22の識別情報と共に送受信される識別情報が示す一又は複数の機能をサポートするDNを識別するDNNであってよい。さらに、第22の識別情報は、登録手続きで送信したDNNであってもよく、LADN DNNであってもよい。
Further, the SMF and AMF may indicate the acceptance of the request for establishing the PDU session associated with the DNN indicated by the 22nd identification information by transmitting the 22nd identification information, or the PDU session is established. It may be shown that. In addition, the SMF and AMF may indicate the DNN selected and determined by the network to transmit the 22nd identification information. The 22nd identification information may be a DNN that identifies a DN that supports one or more functions indicated by the identification information transmitted and received together with the 22nd identification information. Further, the 22nd identification information may be the DNN transmitted in the registration procedure or may be the LADN DNN.
さらに、SMF及びAMFは、第23の識別情報を送信することで、第23の識別情報が示すS-NSSAIに対応づけられるPDUセッションの確立要求の受諾を示してもよいし、前記PDUセッションが確立されることを示してもよい。さらに、SMF及びAMFは、第23の識別情報を送信すること、ネットワークが選択、決定したS-NSSAIを示してもよい。尚、第23の識別情報は、第23の識別情報と共に送受信される識別情報が示す一又は複数の機能をサポートするNSを識別するS-NSSAIであってよい。さらに、第23の識別情報は、登録手続きで送信したS-NSSAIであってもよい。
Further, the SMF and AMF may indicate acceptance of the request for establishing the PDU session associated with the S-NSSAI indicated by the 23rd identification information by transmitting the 23rd identification information, or the PDU session may indicate acceptance. It may be shown to be established. In addition, the SMF and AMF may indicate that the 23rd identification information is transmitted, the network has selected and determined S-NSSAI. The 23rd identification information may be S-NSSAI that identifies an NS that supports one or more functions indicated by the identification information transmitted and received together with the 23rd identification information. Further, the 23rd identification information may be S-NSSAI transmitted in the registration procedure.
さらに、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報を送信することで、UEの要求の一部が許可されないことを示してもよい。具体的には、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報を送信することで、UEの要求したPDUセッションタイプが許可されないことを示してもよい。
Furthermore, the SMF and / or AMF may send the 24th identification information to indicate that some of the UE's requests are not allowed. Specifically, the SMF and / or AMF may send the 24th identification information to indicate that the PDU session type requested by the UE is not allowed.
さらに、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報を送信することで、UEの要求したPDUセッションタイプとは異なるPDUセッションタイプのみが許可されていることを示してもよい。さらに、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報を送信することで、受信した第11の識別情報が示すPDUセッションタイプとは異なるPDUセッションタイプが、第21の識別情報に設定されていることを示してもよい。
Furthermore, the SMF and / or AMF may send the 24th identification information to indicate that only PDU session types different from the PDU session type requested by the UE are allowed. Further, by transmitting the 24th identification information, the SMF and / or the AMF sets the PDU session type different from the PDU session type indicated by the 11th identification information received as the 21st identification information. You may indicate that you are.
具体的には、第11の識別情報示すPDUセッションタイプが、IPv4v6、又はIPv6で、許可されたPDUセッションタイプがIPv4の場合、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第21の識別情報に、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4を設定してもよい。さらに、この場合、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報に、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値を設定してもよい。さらに、この場合、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報を送信することで、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示してもよい。さらに、この場合、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報を送信することで、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv6、及び/又はIPv4v6が許可されていないことを示してもよい。
Specifically, if the PDU session type indicating the eleventh identification information is IPv4v6 or IPv6 and the permitted PDU session type is IPv4, SMF and / or AMF will use the PDU session in the 21st identification information. IPv4 may be set as the type. Further, in this case, the SMF and / or the AMF may set the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted in the 24th identification information. Further, in this case, the SMF and / or the AMF may transmit the 24th identification information to indicate that only IPv4 is permitted as the PDU session type. Further, in this case, the SMF and / or the AMF may transmit the 24th identification information to indicate that IPv6 and / or IPv4v6 are not permitted as the PDU session type.
ここで、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、50番目の5GSM理由値であってよい。さらに、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値であってもよい。言い換えると、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、IPv4のPDUセッションタイプのみが許可されていることを示す理由値であってもよい。
Here, the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted may be the 50th 5GSM reason value. Further, the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted may be the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted as the PDU session type. In other words, the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is allowed may be the reason value indicating that only the PDU session type of IPv4 is allowed.
さらに、第11の識別情報示すPDUセッションタイプが、IPv4v6、又はIPv4で、許可されたPDUセッションタイプがIPv6の場合、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第21の識別情報に、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv6を設定してもよい。さらに、この場合、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報に、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値を設定してもよい。さらに、この場合、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報を送信することで、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示してもよい。さらに、この場合、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報を送信することで、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4、及び/又はIPv4v6が許可されていないことを示してもよい。
Further, if the PDU session type indicating the 11th identification information is IPv4v6 or IPv4 and the permitted PDU session type is IPv6, SMF and / or AMF will be added to the 21st identification information as the PDU session type. IPv6 may be set. Further, in this case, the SMF and / or the AMF may set the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted in the 24th identification information. Further, in this case, the SMF and / or the AMF may transmit the 24th identification information to indicate that only IPv6 is permitted as the PDU session type. Further, in this case, the SMF and / or the AMF may transmit the 24th identification information to indicate that IPv4 and / or IPv4 v6 are not permitted as the PDU session type.
ここで、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、51番目の5GSM理由値であってよい。さらに、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値であってもよい。言い換えると、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、IPv6のPDUセッションタイプのみが許可されていることを示す理由値であってもよい。
Here, the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted may be the 51st 5GSM reason value. Further, the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted may be a reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted as the PDU session type. In other words, the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is allowed may be the reason value indicating that only the PDU session type of IPv6 is allowed.
尚、SMF及びAMFは、少なくとも第21から第24の識別情報の内、1つ以上の識別情報をPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含めるかを、受信した各識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報、及び/又はAMFが保持するコンテキスト等に基づいて、選択、決定してもよい。
In addition, SMF and AMF each received identification information and / or subscriber information, and whether to include one or more identification information in the PDU session establishment acceptance message from at least the 21st to 24th identification information, and It may be selected and determined based on / or network capability information and / or operator policy, and / or network status, and / or user registration information, and / or AMF-held context.
また、SMF及びAMFは、選択した、及び/又は許可したPDUセッションIDをPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含めることができる。また、SMF及びAMFは、選択した、及び/又は許可したPDUセッションのタイプを示すPDUセッションタイプを指定することができる。PDUセッションタイプとしては、上述の通り、IPv4、IPv6、IPv4v6、Ethernet、Unstructuredのいずれかを指定することができる。また、SMF及びAMFは、選択した、及び/又は許可したPDUセッションのSSCモードをPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含めることができる。
Also, SMF and AMF can include the selected and / or allowed PDU session ID in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. SMF and AMF can also specify a PDU session type that indicates the type of PDU session selected and / or allowed. As the PDU session type, any one of IPv4, IPv6, IPv4v6, Ethernet, and Unstructured can be specified as described above. The SMF and AMF can also include the SSC mode of the selected and / or allowed PDU session in the PDU session establishment acceptance message.
さらに、SMF及びAMFは、承認されたQoSルール群をPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに含めることができる。尚、承認されたQoSルール群には一又複数のQoSルールが含まれてよい。さらに、本手続きにおいて、QoSフロー、及び/又はユーザプレーン無線ベアラが複数確立される場合、承認されたQoSルール群には複数のQoSルールが含まれてもよい。逆に本手続きにおいて、QoSフロー、及び/又はユーザプレーン無線ベアラが1つのみ確立される場合、承認されたQoSルール群には1つのQoSルールが含まれてもよい。
Furthermore, SMF and AMF can include the approved QoS rule group in the PDU session establishment acceptance message. The approved QoS rule group may include one or more QoS rules. Further, if a plurality of QoS flows and / or user plane radio bearers are established in this procedure, the approved QoS rule group may include a plurality of QoS rules. Conversely, if only one QoS flow and / or user plane radio bearer is established in this procedure, the approved QoS rule group may include one QoS rule.
さらに、SMFは、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに、UEの一部の要求が拒絶されたことを示す情報を含めて送信してもよいし、UEの一部の要求が拒絶されたことを示す情報を送信することで、UEの一部の要求が拒絶された理由を示してもよい。さらに、UEは、UEの一部の要求が拒絶されたことを示す情報を受信することで、UEの一部の要求が拒絶された理由を認識してもよい。尚、拒絶された理由は、SMFが受信した識別情報が示す内容が許可されていないことを示す情報であってもよい。
In addition, the SMF may send the PDU session establishment acceptance message with information indicating that some requests from the UE have been rejected, or information indicating that some requests from the UE have been rejected. May indicate why some of the UE's requests were rejected. In addition, the UE may recognize why some of the UE's requests have been rejected by receiving information indicating that some of the UE's requests have been rejected. The reason for rejection may be information indicating that the content indicated by the identification information received by the SMF is not permitted.
UEは、SMFからPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを受信する(S910)(S912)。具体的には、UEは、SMFからAMFに、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージが送信された後に(S910)、N1インターフェースを介して、AMFからPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを含むNASメッセージを受信する(S912)。UEは、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ、及び/又はPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを含むNASメッセージの受信に基づいて、AMFを介してSMFにPDUセッション確立完了(PDU session establishment complete)メッセージを送信してもよい(S914)(S916)。UEは、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージを受信することで、PDUセッション確立要求によるUEの要求が受諾されたことを検出することができる。
The UE receives the PDU session establishment acceptance message from the SMF (S910) (S912). Specifically, the UE receives the NAS message including the PDU session establishment acceptance message from the AMF via the N1 interface after the PDU session establishment acceptance message is sent from the SMF to the AMF (S910). .. The UE may send a PDU session establishment complete message to the SMF via AMF based on the receipt of the PDU session establishment acceptance message and / or the NAS message including the PDU session establishment acceptance message. (S914) (S916). By receiving the PDU session establishment acceptance message, the UE can detect that the UE's request by the PDU session establishment request has been accepted.
具体的には、UEは、N1インターフェースを介して、AMFにPDUセッション確立完了メッセージを送信する(S914)。AMFは、UEからPDUセッション確立完了メッセージを受信すると、N11インターフェースを介して、SMFにPDUセッション確立完了メッセージを送信する(S916)。
Specifically, the UE sends a PDU session establishment completion message to the AMF via the N1 interface (S914). When the AMF receives the PDU session establishment completion message from the UE, it sends the PDU session establishment completion message to the SMF via the N11 interface (S916).
尚、AMFがSMFに送信するPDUセッション確立完了メッセージは、S910でSMFからAMFに送信されたPDUセッション確立受諾メッセージに対する応答メッセージであってよい。また、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージは、NASメッセージであってよい。また、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージは、PDUセッション確立手続きが完了することを示すメッセージであればよい。
The PDU session establishment completion message sent by AMF to SMF may be a response message to the PDU session establishment acceptance message sent from SMF to AMF by S910. Further, the PDU session establishment completion message may be a NAS message. Further, the PDU session establishment completion message may be any message indicating that the PDU session establishment procedure is completed.
SMFは、N11インターフェースを介して、AMFからPDUセッション確立完了メッセージを受信すると(S916)、第2の条件判別を実行することができる。第2の条件判別は、送受信されるN4インターフェース上のメッセージの種類を決定する為ものである。第2の条件判別が真の場合、SMFは、N4インターフェースを介して、UPFにセッション変更要求メッセージを送信すると(S918)、その応答メッセージとして、UPFから送信されるセッション変更受諾メッセージを受信する(S920)。第2の条件判別が偽の場合、SMFは、N4インターフェースを介して、UPFにセッション確立要求メッセージを送信すると(S918)、その応答メッセージとして、UPFから送信されるセッション変更受諾メッセージを受信する(S920)。
When the SMF receives the PDU session establishment completion message from the AMF via the N11 interface (S916), the SMF can execute the second condition determination. The second condition determination is to determine the type of message sent and received on the N4 interface. If the second condition determination is true, the SMF sends a session change request message to the UPF via the N4 interface (S918) and receives a session change acceptance message sent by the UPF as its response message (S918). S920). If the second condition determination is false, the SMF sends a session establishment request message to the UPF via the N4 interface (S918) and receives a session change acceptance message sent by the UPF as its response message (S918). S920).
尚、第2の条件判別は、PDUセッションのためのN4インターフェース上のセッションが確立されているか否かに基づいて、実行されてもよい。例えば、PDUセッションのためのN4インターフェース上のセッションが確立されている場合、第2の条件判別は真であってよく、PDUセッションのためのN4インターフェース上のセッションが確立されていない場合、第2の条件判別は偽であってよい。尚、第2の条件判別の真偽が決まる条件は前述した条件に限らなくてもよい。
Note that the second condition determination may be executed based on whether or not a session on the N4 interface for the PDU session has been established. For example, if the session on the N4 interface for the PDU session is established, the second condition determination may be true, and if the session on the N4 interface for the PDU session is not established, the second condition is true. The condition determination of is false. The condition for determining the truth of the second condition determination is not limited to the above-mentioned condition.
各装置は、PDUセッション確立完了メッセージの送受信、及び/又はセッション変更応答メッセージの送受信、及び/又はセッション確立応答メッセージの送受信に基づいて、PDUセッション確立手続き中の(A)の手続きを完了する。本手続中の(A)の手続きが完了したとき、UEは、DNに対するPDUセッションが確立している状態にいる。ここで、PDUセッション確立手続きが、LADNのためのPDUセッションを確立するためのPDUセッション確立手続きである場合、各装置は、本手続中の(A)の手続きの完了に基づいて、LADNのためのPDUセッションを確立してもよい。
Each device completes the procedure (A) during the PDU session establishment procedure based on the transmission / reception of the PDU session establishment completion message and / or the transmission / reception of the session change response message and / or the transmission / reception of the session establishment response message. When the procedure (A) during this procedure is completed, the UE is in a state where a PDU session for the DN has been established. Here, if the PDU session establishment procedure is a PDU session establishment procedure for establishing a PDU session for LADN, each device is for LADN based on the completion of procedure (A) during this procedure. PDU session may be established.
次に、PDUセッション確立手続き中の(B)の手続きの各ステップを説明する。SMFは、AMFを介して、UEにPDUセッション確立拒絶(PDU session establishment reject)メッセージを送信する(S922)(S924)。具体的には、SMFは、N11インターフェースを介して、AMFにPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを送信する(S922)。AMFは、N11インターフェースを介して、SMFからPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを受信すると(S922)、N1インターフェースを用いて、UEにPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを送信する(S924)。
Next, each step of the procedure (B) during the PDU session establishment procedure will be described. The SMF sends a PDU session establishment reject message to the UE via the AMF (S922) (S924). Specifically, the SMF sends a PDU session establishment rejection message to the AMF via the N11 interface (S922). When the AMF receives a PDU session establishment request message from the SMF via the N11 interface (S922), it sends a PDU session establishment rejection message to the UE using the N1 interface (S924).
尚、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージは、NASメッセージであってよいし、SMFからUEに対して送信されるSMメッセージであってもよい。また、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージは、PDUセッションの確立が拒絶されたことを示すメッセージであればよい。さらに、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージは、N1インターフェースを、MMメッセージに含まれて送受信されてもよい。さらに、MMメッセージは、NASメッセージであってよく、ダウンリンクNASトランスポート(DL NAS TRANSPORT)メッセージであってもよい。ここで、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに、識別情報、及び/又は値を含めると表現した場合、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを含むMMメッセージに含めることを意味してもよい。
The PDU session establishment refusal message may be a NAS message or an SM message transmitted from the SMF to the UE. Further, the PDU session establishment refusal message may be any message indicating that the establishment of the PDU session has been rejected. In addition, the PDU session establishment refusal message may be sent and received by including the N1 interface in the MM message. Further, the MM message may be a NAS message or a downlink NAS transport (DL NAS TRANSPORT) message. Here, when it is expressed that the PDU session establishment refusal message includes identification information and / or a value, it may mean that it is included in the MM message including the PDU session establishment refusal message.
ここで、SMFは、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを送信することで、PDUセッション確立要求によるUEの要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよい。さらに、SMFは、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに拒絶された理由を示す情報を含めて送信してもよいし、拒絶された理由を送信することで拒絶された理由を示してもよい。さらに、UEは、UEの要求が拒絶された理由を示す情報を受信することで、UEの要求が拒絶された理由を認識してもよい。尚、拒絶された理由は、SMFが受信した識別情報が示す内容が許可されていないことを示す情報であってもよい。
Here, the SMF may indicate that the UE request by the PDU session establishment request has been rejected by sending the PDU session establishment refusal message. In addition, the SMF may send the PDU session establishment rejection message with information indicating the reason for rejection, or may send the reason for rejection to indicate the reason for rejection. Further, the UE may recognize the reason why the UE's request is rejected by receiving the information indicating the reason why the UE's request is rejected. The reason for rejection may be information indicating that the content indicated by the identification information received by the SMF is not permitted.
SMF、及び/又はAMFは、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに、少なくとも第24の識別情報、及び/又はバックオフタイマー値を含めて送信してもよいし、第24識別情報、及び/又はバックオフタイマー値を送信することで、UEの要求が拒絶されたことを示してもよいし、UEの要求が拒絶された理由を示してもよい。
The SMF and / or AMF may send the PDU session establishment rejection message with at least the 24th identification information and / or the backoff timer value, and the 24th identification information and / or the backoff timer. By sending a value, it may indicate that the UE's request has been rejected, or it may indicate why the UE's request has been rejected.
さらに、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報を送信することで、UEの要求が許可されないことを示してもよい。具体的には、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報を送信することで、UEの要求したPDUセッションタイプが許可されないことを示してもよい。
Furthermore, the SMF and / or AMF may send the 24th identification information to indicate that the UE request is not permitted. Specifically, the SMF and / or AMF may send the 24th identification information to indicate that the PDU session type requested by the UE is not allowed.
具体的には、第11の識別情報示すPDUセッションタイプが、IPv4v6、又はIPv6で、許可されたPDUセッションタイプがIPv4の場合、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報に、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値を設定してもよい。さらに、この場合、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報を送信することで、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示してもよい。さらに、この場合、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報を送信することで、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv6、及び/又はIPv4v6が許可されていないことを示してもよい。
Specifically, if the PDU session type indicating the 11th identification information is IPv4v6 or IPv6, and the permitted PDU session type is IPv4, SMF and / or AMF will use IPv4 only for the 24th identification information. You may set a reason value to indicate that is allowed. Further, in this case, the SMF and / or the AMF may transmit the 24th identification information to indicate that only IPv4 is permitted as the PDU session type. Further, in this case, the SMF and / or the AMF may transmit the 24th identification information to indicate that IPv6 and / or IPv4v6 are not permitted as the PDU session type.
ここで、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、50番目の5GSM理由値であってよい。さらに、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値であってもよい。言い換えると、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、IPv4のPDUセッションタイプのみが許可されていることを示す理由値であってもよい。
Here, the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted may be the 50th 5GSM reason value. Further, the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted may be the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted as the PDU session type. In other words, the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is allowed may be the reason value indicating that only the PDU session type of IPv4 is allowed.
さらに、第11の識別情報示すPDUセッションタイプが、IPv4v6、又はIPv4で、許可されたPDUセッションタイプがIPv6の場合、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報に、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値を設定してもよい。さらに、この場合、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報を送信することで、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示してもよい。さらに、この場合、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、第24の識別情報を送信することで、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4、及び/又はIPv4v6が許可されていないことを示してもよい。
Furthermore, if the PDU session type indicating the 11th identification information is IPv4v6 or IPv4 and the permitted PDU session type is IPv6, SMF and / or AMF are only allowed to use IPv6 for the 24th identification information. You may set a reason value indicating that it is. Further, in this case, the SMF and / or the AMF may transmit the 24th identification information to indicate that only IPv6 is permitted as the PDU session type. Further, in this case, the SMF and / or the AMF may transmit the 24th identification information to indicate that IPv4 and / or IPv4 v6 are not permitted as the PDU session type.
ここで、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、51番目の5GSM理由値であってよい。さらに、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値であってもよい。言い換えると、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、IPv6のPDUセッションタイプのみが許可されていることを示す理由値であってもよい。
Here, the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted may be the 51st 5GSM reason value. Further, the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted may be a reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted as the PDU session type. In other words, the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is allowed may be the reason value indicating that only the PDU session type of IPv6 is allowed.
さらに、SMF、及び/又はAMFはバックオフタイマー値を送信することで、UEに、バックオフタイマー値を送信する値に設定することを指示してもよいし、送信した値を設定したバックオフタイマーを開始することを指示してもよい。
In addition, the SMF and / or AMF may instruct the UE to set the backoff timer value to the value to be transmitted by transmitting the backoff timer value, or the backoff with the transmitted value set. You may instruct to start the timer.
尚、SMF、及び/又はAMFは、少なくとも第24の識別情報をPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含めるかを、受信した各識別情報、及び/又は加入者情報、及び/又はネットワークの能力情報、及び/又はオペレータポリシー、及び/又はネットワークの状態、及び/又はユーザの登録情報、及び/又はAMFが保持するコンテキスト等に基づいて、選択、決定してもよい。
It should be noted that the SMF and / or AMF should include at least the 24th identification information in the PDU session establishment refusal message, each identification information received, and / or the subscriber information, and / or the network capability information, and /. Alternatively, it may be selected and determined based on the operator policy and / or the state of the network and / or the user's registration information and / or the context held by the AMF.
UEは、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージを受信することで、PDUセッション確立要求によるUEの要求が拒絶されたこと、及びPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含まれる各種の識別情報の内容を認識することができる。
By receiving the PDU session establishment refusal message, the UE can recognize that the UE request by the PDU session establishment request has been rejected and the contents of various identification information included in the PDU session establishment refusal message.
各装置は、図8の(A)又は(B)の手続きの完了に基づいて、PDUセッション確立手続きを完了する。尚、各装置は、図8の(A)の手続きの完了に基づいて、PDUセッションが確立された状態に遷移してもよいし、図8の(B)の手続きの完了に基づいて、PDUセッション確立手続きが拒絶されたことを認識してもよいし、PDUセッションが確立されていない状態に遷移してもよい。さらに、UEは、図8の(A)の手続きが完了することで、確立したPDUセッションを用いて、DNと通信することができる。
Each device completes the PDU session establishment procedure based on the completion of the procedure (A) or (B) in FIG. In addition, each device may transition to the state in which the PDU session is established based on the completion of the procedure of FIG. 8 (A), or the PDU is based on the completion of the procedure of FIG. 8 (B). You may recognize that the session establishment procedure has been rejected, or you may transition to a state where the PDU session has not been established. Furthermore, the UE can communicate with the DN using the established PDU session by completing the procedure (A) in FIG.
さらに、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了に基づいて、PDUセッション確立手続きで送受信した情報に基づいた処理を実施してもよい。例えば、各装置は、UEの一部の要求が拒絶されたことを示す情報を送受信した場合、UEの要求が拒絶された理由を認識してもよい。さらに、各装置は、UEの要求が拒絶された理由に基づいて、再度本手続きを実施してもよいし、別のセルに対してPDUセッション確立手続きを実施してもよい。
Further, each device may perform processing based on the information transmitted / received in the PDU session establishment procedure based on the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure. For example, if each device sends and receives information indicating that some of the UE's requests have been rejected, it may recognize the reason why the UE's request was rejected. Further, each device may perform this procedure again based on the reason why the request of the UE is rejected, or may perform the PDU session establishment procedure for another cell.
さらに、UEは、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了に基づいて、PDUセッション確立受諾メッセージ、及び/又はPDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージとともに受信した識別情報を記憶してもよいし、ネットワークの決定を認識してもよい。
In addition, the UE may store the identification information received with the PDU session establishment acceptance message and / or the PDU session establishment rejection message based on the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure, and may recognize the network decision. good.
例えば、各装置は、第21の識別情報を送受信した場合、第21の識別情報が示すPDUセッションタイプのPDUセッションを確立してもよい。さらに、UEは、第21の識別情報を受信した場合、第21の識別情報が示すPDUセッションタイプのPDUセッションが確立されることを認識してもよい。さらに、UEは、第21の識別情報を受信した場合、ネットワークが選択、決定したPDUセッションタイプを認識してもよい。
For example, when each device sends and receives the 21st identification information, it may establish a PDU session of the PDU session type indicated by the 21st identification information. Further, the UE may recognize that when the 21st identification information is received, a PDU session of the PDU session type indicated by the 21st identification information is established. In addition, the UE may recognize the PDU session type selected and determined by the network when it receives the 21st identification.
さらに、各装置は、第22の識別情報を送受信した場合、第22の識別情報が示すDNNに対応づけられるPDUセッションを確立してもよい。さらに、UEは、第22の識別情報を受信した場合、第22の識別情報が示すDNNに対応づけられるPDUセッションが確立されることを認識してもよい。さらに、UEは、第22の識別情報を受信した場合、ネットワークが選択、決定したDNNを認識してもよい。尚、第22の識別情報は、第22の識別情報と共に送受信される識別情報が示す一又は複数の機能をサポートするDNを識別するDNNであってよい。さらに、第22の識別情報は、登録手続きで受信したDNNであってもよく、LADN DNNであってもよい。
Further, each device may establish a PDU session associated with the DNN indicated by the 22nd identification information when the 22nd identification information is transmitted / received. Further, the UE may recognize that when the 22nd identification information is received, the PDU session associated with the DNN indicated by the 22nd identification information is established. In addition, the UE may recognize the DNN selected and determined by the network when it receives the 22nd identification information. The 22nd identification information may be a DNN that identifies a DN that supports one or more functions indicated by the identification information transmitted and received together with the 22nd identification information. Further, the 22nd identification information may be the DNN received in the registration procedure or may be the LADN DNN.
さらに、各装置は、第23の識別情報を送受信した場合、第23の識別情報が示すS-NSSAIに対応づけられるPDUセッションを確立してもよい。さらに、UEは、第23の識別情報を受信した場合、第23の識別情報が示すS-NSSAIに対応づけられるPDUセッションが確立されることを認識してもよい。さらに、UEは、第23の識別情報を受信した場合、ネットワークが選択、決定したS-NSSAIを認識してもよい。尚、第23の識別情報は、第23の識別情報と共に送受信される識別情報が示す一又は複数の機能をサポートするNSを識別するS-NSSAIであってよい。さらに、第23の識別情報は、登録手続きで受信したS-NSSAIであってもよく、S-NSSAIであってもよい。
Further, each device may establish a PDU session associated with the S-NSSAI indicated by the 23rd identification information when the 23rd identification information is transmitted / received. Further, the UE may recognize that when the 23rd identification information is received, the PDU session associated with the S-NSSAI indicated by the 23rd identification information is established. Further, the UE may recognize the S-NSSAI selected and determined by the network when it receives the 23rd identification information. The 23rd identification information may be S-NSSAI that identifies an NS that supports one or more functions indicated by the identification information transmitted and received together with the 23rd identification information. Further, the 23rd identification information may be the S-NSSAI received in the registration procedure or the S-NSSAI.
さらに、UEは、第24の識別情報を受信した場合、UEの要求の一部が許可されないこと認識してもよい。具体的には、UEは、第24の識別情報を受信した場合、UEの要求したPDUセッションタイプが許可されないことを認識してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、第24の識別情報を受信した場合、UEの要求したPDUセッションタイプ以外のPDUセッションタイプのPDUセッションが確立されることを認識してもよい。
Furthermore, when the UE receives the 24th identification information, it may recognize that a part of the UE's request is not permitted. Specifically, the UE may recognize that the PDU session type requested by the UE is not allowed when it receives the 24th identification information. In other words, the UE may recognize that when it receives the 24th identification information, a PDU session of a PDU session type other than the PDU session type requested by the UE is established.
さらに、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値が設定された第24の識別情報を受信した場合、UEは、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4のみが許可されていることを認識してもよい。さらに、この場合、UEは、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv6、及び/又はIPv4v6が許可されていないことを示してもよい。
In addition, the UE may recognize that only IPv4 is allowed as the PDU session type if it receives a 24th identification with a reason value that indicates that only IPv4 is allowed. .. Further, in this case, the UE may indicate that IPv6 and / or IPv4v6 are not allowed as the PDU session type.
ここで、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、50番目の5GSM理由値であってよい。さらに、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値であってもよい。言い換えると、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、IPv4のPDUセッションタイプのみが許可されていることを示す理由値であってもよい。
Here, the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted may be the 50th 5GSM reason value. Further, the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted may be the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted as the PDU session type. In other words, the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is allowed may be the reason value indicating that only the PDU session type of IPv4 is allowed.
さらに、IPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値が設定された第24の識別情報を受信した場合、UEは挙動Aを実施してもよい。より詳細には、IPv4v6が設定された第11の識別情報を送信し、IPv4が設定された第21の識別情報、及びIPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値が設定された第24の識別情報を受信した場合、UEは挙動Aを実施してもよい。言い換えると、IPv4v6のPDUセッションタイプを要求し、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとIPv4のみが許可されていることを示す理由値が設定された第24の識別情報を受信した場合、UEは挙動Aを実施してもよい。
Furthermore, when the UE receives the 24th identification information in which the reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted is set, the UE may execute the behavior A. More specifically, the eleventh identification information configured with IPv4v6 is transmitted, the 21st identification information configured with IPv4, and the 24th identification information set with a reason value indicating that only IPv4 is permitted. Upon receiving the identification information, the UE may perform behavior A. In other words, the UE behaves when it requests an IPv4 v6 PDU session type and receives a PDU session type with IPv4 and a 24th identification with a reason value indicating that only IPv4 is allowed. A may be carried out.
尚、挙動Aは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が禁止されていることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Aは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が禁止されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Aは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きが開始されないように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Aは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が禁止された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Behavior A is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set is prohibited. There may be. Further, behavior A is a behavior that prohibits the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. You may. Further, behavior A may be a behavior that uses the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and a PDU session type in which IPv6 is set so that a new PDU session establishment procedure is not started. .. Furthermore, behavior A is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set is prohibited. You may.
さらに、UEは、挙動Aを実施している間、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が禁止されていてよい。さらに、UEは、挙動Aを実施している間、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が禁止されるように設定されていてもよい。さらに、UEは、挙動Aを実施している間、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が禁止された状態であってもよい。
In addition, the UE is prohibited from initiating a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type while performing Behavior A. You may be. In addition, the UE is prohibited from initiating a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type while performing Behavior A. It may be set to. In addition, the UE is prohibited from initiating a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type while performing Behavior A. It may be in a state of being.
さらに、挙動Aは、UEが新しいPLMNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよいし、UEが新しいSNPNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよい。より詳細には、UEがPLMNに登録されている場合、挙動Aは、UEが均等PLMN以外のPLMNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよいし、UEがSNPNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよい。さらに、UEがSNPNに登録されている場合、挙動Aは、UEが均等SNPN以外のSNPNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよいし、UEがPLMNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよい。
Further, the behavior A may be carried out until the UE is registered in the new PLMN, or may be carried out until the UE is registered in the new SNPN. More specifically, if the UE is registered in the PLMN, behavior A may be performed until the UE is registered in a PLMN other than the equal PLMN, or until the UE is registered in the SNPN. It may be carried out. Furthermore, if the UE is registered in the SNPN, behavior A may be performed until the UE is registered in a SNPN other than the equal SNPN, or until the UE is registered in the PLMN. May be good.
言い換えると、UEがSNPNアクセスモードで作動していない場合、挙動Aは、UEが均等PLMN以外のPLMNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよいし、UEがSNPNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよい。さらに、UEがSNPNアクセスモードで作動している場合、挙動Aは、UEが均等SNPN以外のSNPNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよいし、UEがPLMNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよい。
In other words, if the UE is not operating in SNPN access mode, behavior A may be performed until the UE is registered with a PLMN other than the equal PLMN, or until the UE is registered with the SNPN. It may be carried out. Furthermore, if the UE is operating in SNPN access mode, behavior A may be performed until the UE is registered with a non-equal SNPN, or until the UE is registered with the PLMN. May be done.
さらに、挙動Aは、PDUセッションタイプが変更されるまでの間実施されてもよい。さらに、挙動Aは、UEのスイッチがオフにされるまでの間実施されてもよいし、USIMが取り除かれるまでの間実施されてもよい。
Furthermore, behavior A may be performed until the PDU session type is changed. Further, behavior A may be performed until the UE is switched off or until the USIM is removed.
尚、均等PLMN以外のPLMNとは、均等PLMNのリストにないPLMNであってよい。言い換えると、UEが均等PLMN以外のPLMNに登録されるとは、UEが、均等PLMNのリストにない新しいPLMNに登録されることを示してもよい。
The PLMN other than the equal PLMN may be a PLMN that is not on the list of equal PLMNs. In other words, registering a UE with a non-equal PLMN may indicate that the UE is registered with a new PLMN that is not on the list of equal PLMNs.
さらに、均等PLMN以外のPLMNとは、均等PLMNのリストに含まれないPLMNであってよい。言い換えると、UEが均等PLMN以外のPLMNに登録されるとは、UEが、均等PLMNのリストに含まれない新しいPLMNに登録されることを示してもよい。
Furthermore, the PLMN other than the equal PLMN may be a PLMN that is not included in the list of equal PLMNs. In other words, registering a UE with a PLMN other than the equal PLMN may indicate that the UE is registered with a new PLMN that is not on the list of equal PLMNs.
さらに、均等SNPN以外のSNPNとは、均等SNPNのリストにないSNPNであってよい。言い換えると、UEが均等SNPN以外のSNPNに登録されるとは、UEが、均等SNPNのリストにない新しいSNPNに登録されることを示してもよい。
Furthermore, the SNPN other than the equal SNPN may be an SNPN that is not on the list of equal SNPNs. In other words, registering a UE with a non-equal SNPN may indicate that the UE is registered with a new SNPN that is not on the list of equal SNPNs.
さらに、均等SNPN以外のSNPNとは、均等SNPNのリストに含まれないSNPNであってよい。言い換えると、UEが均等SNPN以外のSNPNに登録されるとは、UEが、均等SNPNのリストに含まれない新しいSNPNに登録されることを示してもよい。
Further, the SNPN other than the equal SNPN may be an SNPN that is not included in the list of equal SNPNs. In other words, registering a UE with an SNPN other than the equal SNPN may indicate that the UE is registered with a new SNPN that is not included in the list of equal SNPNs.
ここで、同じDNNとは、本手続きにて、第12の識別情報に含めて送受信されたDNNと同じDNNであってよいし、第22の識別情報に含めて送受信されたDNNと同じDNNであってもよい。さらに、同じS-NSSAIとは、本手続きにて、第13の識別情報に含めて送受信されたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIであってよいし、第23の識別情報に含めて送受信されたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIであってもよい。
Here, the same DNN may be the same DNN as the DNN included in the 12th identification information and transmitted / received in this procedure, or the same DNN as the DNN included in the 22nd identification information and transmitted / received. There may be. Further, the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI included in the 13th identification information and transmitted / received in this procedure, and may be included in the 23rd identification information and transmitted / received. It may be the same S-NSSAI as S-NSSAI.
さらに、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、本手続きとは別のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。言い換えると、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、本手続きの完了後に実施されるPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。さらに言い換えると、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、本手続きの完了後に実施される、別のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
Furthermore, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure different from this procedure. In other words, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of this procedure. In other words, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be another PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of this procedure.
さらに、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。言い換えると、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、UE要求のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
In addition, the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type. In other words, a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
さらに、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値が設定された第24の識別情報を受信した場合、UEは、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv6のみが許可されていることを認識してもよい。さらに、この場合、UEは、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv4、及び/又はIPv4v6が許可されていないことを示してもよい。
In addition, the UE may recognize that only IPv6 is allowed as the PDU session type if it receives a 24th identification with a reason value that indicates that only IPv6 is allowed. .. Further, in this case, the UE may indicate that IPv4 and / or IPv4 v6 are not allowed as the PDU session type.
ここで、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、51番目の5GSM理由値であってよい。さらに、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、PDUセッションタイプとして、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値であってもよい。言い換えると、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値は、IPv6のPDUセッションタイプのみが許可されていることを示す理由値であってもよい。
Here, the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted may be the 51st 5GSM reason value. Further, the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted may be a reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted as the PDU session type. In other words, the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is allowed may be the reason value indicating that only the PDU session type of IPv6 is allowed.
さらに、IPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値が設定された第24の識別情報を受信した場合、UEは挙動Bを実施してもよい。より詳細には、IPv4v6が設定された第11の識別情報を送信し、IPv6が設定された第21の識別情報、及びIPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値が設定された第24の識別情報を受信した場合、UEは挙動Bを実施してもよい。言い換えると、IPv4v6のPDUセッションタイプを要求し、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとIPv6のみが許可されていることを示す理由値が設定された第24の識別情報を受信した場合、UEは挙動Bを実施してもよい。
Furthermore, when the UE receives the 24th identification information in which the reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted is set, the UE may execute the behavior B. More specifically, the eleventh identification information configured with IPv4v6 is transmitted, the 21st identification information configured with IPv6, and the 24th identification information set with a reason value indicating that only IPv6 is permitted. Upon receiving the identification information, the UE may perform behavior B. In other words, the UE behaves when it requests an IPv4 v6 PDU session type and receives a PDU session type with IPv6 configured and a 24th identification with a reason value indicating that only IPv6 is allowed. B may be carried out.
尚、挙動Bは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が禁止されていることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Bは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が禁止されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Bは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きが開始されないように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Bは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が禁止された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Behavior B is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is prohibited. There may be. Further, behavior B is a behavior that prohibits the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. You may. Further, behavior B may be a behavior that uses the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and a PDU session type in which IPv4 is set so that a new PDU session establishment procedure is not started. .. Furthermore, behavior B is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is prohibited. You may.
さらに、UEは、挙動Bを実施している間、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が禁止されていてよい。さらに、UEは、挙動Bを実施している間、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が禁止されるように設定されていてもよい。さらに、UEは、挙動Bを実施している間、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が禁止された状態であってもよい。
In addition, the UE is prohibited from initiating a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv4 configured PDU session type while performing Behavior B. You may be. In addition, the UE is prohibited from initiating a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv4 configured PDU session type while performing Behavior B. It may be set to. In addition, the UE is prohibited from initiating a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv4 configured PDU session type while performing Behavior B. It may be in a state of being.
さらに、挙動Bは、UEが新しいPLMNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよいし、UEが新しいSNPNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよい。より詳細には、UEがPLMNに登録されている場合、挙動Bは、UEが均等PLMN以外のPLMNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよいし、UEがSNPNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよい。さらに、UEがSNPNに登録されている場合、挙動Bは、UEが均等SNPN以外のSNPNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよいし、UEがPLMNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよい。
Furthermore, behavior B may be carried out until the UE is registered in the new PLMN, or may be carried out until the UE is registered in the new SNPN. More specifically, if the UE is registered in the PLMN, behavior B may be performed until the UE is registered in a PLMN other than the equal PLMN, or until the UE is registered in the SNPN. It may be carried out. Furthermore, if the UE is registered in the SNPN, behavior B may be performed until the UE is registered in a SNPN other than the equal SNPN, or until the UE is registered in the PLMN. May be good.
言い換えると、UEがSNPNアクセスモードで作動していない場合、挙動Bは、UEが均等PLMN以外のPLMNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよいし、UEがSNPNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよい。さらに、UEがSNPNアクセスモードで作動している場合、挙動Bは、UEが均等SNPN以外のSNPNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよいし、UEがPLMNに登録されるまでの間実施されてもよい。
In other words, if the UE is not operating in SNPN access mode, behavior B may be performed until the UE is registered with a PLMN other than the equal PLMN, or until the UE is registered with the SNPN. It may be carried out. Furthermore, if the UE is operating in SNPN access mode, behavior B may be performed until the UE is registered with a non-equal SNPN, or until the UE is registered with the PLMN. May be done.
さらに、挙動Bは、PDUセッションタイプが変更されるまでの間実施されてもよい。さらに、挙動Bは、UEのスイッチがオフにされるまでの間実施されてもよいし、USIMが取り除かれるまでの間実施されてもよい。
Furthermore, behavior B may be performed until the PDU session type is changed. Further, behavior B may be performed until the UE is switched off or until the USIM is removed.
尚、均等PLMN以外のPLMNとは、均等PLMNのリストにないPLMNであってよい。言い換えると、UEが均等PLMN以外のPLMNに登録されるとは、UEが、均等PLMNのリストにない新しいPLMNに登録されることを示してもよい。
The PLMN other than the equal PLMN may be a PLMN that is not on the list of equal PLMNs. In other words, registering a UE with a non-equal PLMN may indicate that the UE is registered with a new PLMN that is not on the list of equal PLMNs.
さらに、均等PLMN以外のPLMNとは、均等PLMNのリストに含まれないPLMNであってよい。言い換えると、UEが均等PLMN以外のPLMNに登録されるとは、UEが、均等PLMNのリストに含まれない新しいPLMNに登録されることを示してもよい。
Furthermore, the PLMN other than the equal PLMN may be a PLMN that is not included in the list of equal PLMNs. In other words, registering a UE with a PLMN other than the equal PLMN may indicate that the UE is registered with a new PLMN that is not on the list of equal PLMNs.
さらに、均等SNPN以外のSNPNとは、均等SNPNのリストにないSNPNであってよい。言い換えると、UEが均等SNPN以外のSNPNに登録されるとは、UEが、均等SNPNのリストにない新しいSNPNに登録されることを示してもよい。
Furthermore, the SNPN other than the equal SNPN may be an SNPN that is not on the list of equal SNPNs. In other words, registering a UE with a non-equal SNPN may indicate that the UE is registered with a new SNPN that is not on the list of equal SNPNs.
さらに、均等SNPN以外のSNPNとは、均等SNPNのリストに含まれないSNPNであってよい。言い換えると、UEが均等SNPN以外のSNPNに登録されるとは、UEが、均等SNPNのリストに含まれない新しいSNPNに登録されることを示してもよい。
Further, the SNPN other than the equal SNPN may be an SNPN that is not included in the list of equal SNPNs. In other words, registering a UE with an SNPN other than the equal SNPN may indicate that the UE is registered with a new SNPN that is not included in the list of equal SNPNs.
ここで、同じDNNとは、本手続きにて、第12の識別情報に含めて送受信されたDNNと同じDNNであってよいし、第22の識別情報に含めて送受信されたDNNと同じDNNであってもよい。さらに、同じS-NSSAIとは、本手続きにて、第13の識別情報に含めて送受信されたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIであってよいし、第23の識別情報に含めて送受信されたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIであってもよい。
Here, the same DNN may be the same DNN as the DNN included in the 12th identification information and transmitted / received in this procedure, or the same DNN as the DNN included in the 22nd identification information and transmitted / received. There may be. Further, the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI included in the 13th identification information and transmitted / received in this procedure, and may be included in the 23rd identification information and transmitted / received. It may be the same S-NSSAI as S-NSSAI.
さらに、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、本手続きとは別のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。言い換えると、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、本手続きの完了後に実施されるPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。さらに言い換えると、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、本手続きの完了後に実施される、別のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
Furthermore, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure different from this procedure. In other words, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of this procedure. In other words, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be another PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of this procedure.
さらに、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。言い換えると、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、UE要求のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
In addition, the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type. In other words, a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv4 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
さらに、UEは、バックオフタイマー値を受信した場合、バックオフタイマー値をバックオフタイマーに設定してもよいし、受信したバックオフタイマー値を設定したバックオフタイマーを開始してもよい。ここで、UEは、バックオフタイマー値を受信した場合であっても、第24の識別情報を受信した場合、受信したバックオフタイマー値を無視してもよく、バックオフタイマーを開始しなくてもよい。逆に、UEは、バックオフタイマー値、及び第24の識別情報を受信した場合であっても、受信したバックオフタイマー値をバックオフタイマーに設定してもよく、受信したバックオフタイマー値を設定したバックオフタイマーを開始してもよい。
Further, when the UE receives the back-off timer value, the UE may set the back-off timer value to the back-off timer, or may start the back-off timer in which the received back-off timer value is set. Here, even if the UE receives the backoff timer value, if it receives the 24th identification information, the received backoff timer value may be ignored and the backoff timer may not be started. May be good. Conversely, the UE may set the received backoff timer value as the backoff timer even when the backoff timer value and the 24th identification information are received, and the received backoff timer value may be set. You may start the set backoff timer.
さらに、UEは、第24の識別情報を受信した場合、本手続きの完了後、本手続きの完了、及び/又は第24の識別情報の受信に基づいて、他の条件でPDUセッション確立手続きを開始してよい。なお、UEがバックタイマを実行している場合、バックオフタイマーのカウントが満了後に、他の条件でPDUセッション確立手続きを開始してよい。
Furthermore, if the UE receives the 24th identification information, after the completion of this procedure, the UE starts the PDU session establishment procedure under other conditions based on the completion of this procedure and / or the reception of the 24th identification information. You can do it. If the UE is executing the back timer, the PDU session establishment procedure may be started under other conditions after the count of the back-off timer has expired.
ここで、UEが他の条件でPDUセッション確立手続きを開始するということは、例えば、UEが先に送信したDNNとは異なるDNNをDNN情報要素に設定しネットワークに送信することでPDUセッション確立手続きを開始することであってもよい。さらに、UEが他の条件でPDUセッション確立手続きを開始するということは、UEが先に送信したS-NSSAIとは異なるS-NSSAIをS-NSSAI情報要素に設定しネットワークに送信することでPDUセッション確立手続きを開始することであってもよい。
Here, the fact that the UE starts the PDU session establishment procedure under other conditions means that, for example, the PDU session establishment procedure is performed by setting a DNN different from the DNN transmitted earlier by the UE in the DNN information element and transmitting it to the network. May be started. Furthermore, the fact that the UE starts the PDU session establishment procedure under other conditions means that the S-NSSAI, which is different from the S-NSSAI sent earlier by the UE, is set in the S-NSSAI information element and sent to the network. It may be to start the session establishment procedure.
さらに、UEが他の条件でPDUセッション確立手続きを開始するということは、UEが先に送信したPDUセッションタイプとは異なるPDUセッションタイプをPDUセッションタイプ情報要素に設定しネットワークに送信することでPDUセッション確立手続きを開始することであってもよい。さらに、UEが他の条件でPDUセッション確立手続きを開始するということは、UEが位置するエリアを変更してからPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信することでPDUセッション確立手続きを開始することであってもよい。
Furthermore, the fact that the UE initiates the PDU session establishment procedure under other conditions means that the PDU session type that is different from the PDU session type that the UE sent earlier is set in the PDU session type information element and sent to the network. It may be to start the session establishment procedure. Furthermore, when the UE starts the PDU session establishment procedure under other conditions, it means that the PDU session establishment procedure is started by changing the area where the UE is located and then sending the PDU session establishment request message. May be good.
さらに、UEが他の条件でPDUセッション確立手続きを開始するということは、UEがDNNを用いずに、PDUセッション確立手続きを開始することであってもよい。さらに、UEが他の条件でPDUセッション確立手続きを開始するということは、UEがS-NSSAIを用いずに、PDUセッション確立手続きを開始することであってもよい。
Furthermore, the fact that the UE starts the PDU session establishment procedure under other conditions may mean that the UE starts the PDU session establishment procedure without using the DNN. Furthermore, the fact that the UE starts the PDU session establishment procedure under other conditions may mean that the UE starts the PDU session establishment procedure without using S-NSSAI.
UEは、第24の識別情報を受信した場合、本手続きの完了後、UEが要求したDNN、及び/又はS-NSSAI、及び/又はPDUセッションタイプを用いたPDUセッション確立手続きが、開始されない状態、又は停止された状態、又は禁止された状態に遷移してよい。ここで、UEが要求したDNN、及び/又はS-NSSAI、及び/又はPDUセッションタイプを用いたPDUセッション確立手続きとは、UEが先に要求したDNN、及び/又はS-NSSAI、及び/又はPDUセッションタイプを含むPDUセッション確立要求メッセージを送信することで開始されるPDUセッション確立手続きの事であってよい。言い換えると、第24の識別情報を受信した場合、UEは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAI、及び/又は同じPDUセッションタイプを用いたPDUセッション確立手続きが禁止されていてもよいし、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと共に、同じPDUセッションタイプを含むPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信が禁止されていてもよい。
When the UE receives the 24th identification information, after the completion of this procedure, the PDU session establishment procedure using the DNN and / or S-NSSAI and / or PDU session type requested by the UE is not started. , Or may transition to a stopped state or a prohibited state. Here, the PDU session establishment procedure using the DNN and / or S-NSSAI and / or PDU session type requested by the UE is the DNN and / or S-NSSAI and / or the UE requested earlier. It may be a PDU session establishment procedure initiated by sending a PDU session establishment request message containing a PDU session type. In other words, upon receiving the 24th identification, the UE may be prohibited from PDU session establishment procedures using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and / or the same PDU session type. With the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI, sending PDU session establishment request messages containing the same PDU session type may be prohibited.
UEは、第24の識別情報を受信した場合、本手続きの完了後、一定期間、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAI、及び/又は同じPDUセッションタイプを用いたPDUセッション確立手続きが禁止されている状態に遷移してもよい。さらに、UEは、第24の識別情報を受信した場合、本手続きの完了後、一定期間、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと共に、同じPDUセッションタイプを含むPDUセッション確立要求メッセージの送信が禁止されている状態に遷移してもよい。ここで、一定期間は、バックオフタイマー値で設定される期間であってもよいし、その他ネットワーク又はUEが設定する期間であってよい。
If the UE receives the 24th identification information, the PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and / or the same PDU session type is prohibited for a certain period after the completion of this procedure. It may transition to the state of being. In addition, if the UE receives the 24th identification information, it will send a PDU session establishment request message containing the same PDU session type with the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI for a period of time after the completion of this procedure. You may transition to the prohibited state. Here, the fixed period may be a period set by the back-off timer value, or may be another period set by the network or the UE.
[3.2.3. RRCコネクション解放手続き]
次に、RRCコネクションを解放、又はサスペンドするために行うRRCコネクション解放手続き (RRC connection release procedure) の概要について、図9を用いて説明する。RRCコネクション解放手続きは、5GSにおける手続きである。以下、本手続きとはRRCコネクション解放手続きを指す。RRCコネクション解放手続きは、各装置がRRCコネクションを解放、又はサスペンドする為の手続きである。尚、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局装置は、RRCコネクション解放手続きを、登録手続きが完了して登録状態となった任意のタイミングで開始することができる。また、各装置は、RRCコネクション解放手続きの完了に基づいて、RRCコネクションを解放、又はサスペンドしてもよい。 [3.2.3. RRC connection release procedure]
Next, the outline of the RRC connection release procedure for releasing or suspending the RRC connection will be described with reference to FIG. The RRC connection release procedure is a procedure in 5GS. Hereinafter, this procedure refers to the RRC connection release procedure. The RRC connection release procedure is a procedure for each device to release or suspend an RRC connection. The base station device in the access network can start the RRC connection release procedure at any time when the registration procedure is completed and the registration state is reached. In addition, each device may release or suspend the RRC connection based on the completion of the RRC connection release procedure.
次に、RRCコネクションを解放、又はサスペンドするために行うRRCコネクション解放手続き (RRC connection release procedure) の概要について、図9を用いて説明する。RRCコネクション解放手続きは、5GSにおける手続きである。以下、本手続きとはRRCコネクション解放手続きを指す。RRCコネクション解放手続きは、各装置がRRCコネクションを解放、又はサスペンドする為の手続きである。尚、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局装置は、RRCコネクション解放手続きを、登録手続きが完了して登録状態となった任意のタイミングで開始することができる。また、各装置は、RRCコネクション解放手続きの完了に基づいて、RRCコネクションを解放、又はサスペンドしてもよい。 [3.2.3. RRC connection release procedure]
Next, the outline of the RRC connection release procedure for releasing or suspending the RRC connection will be described with reference to FIG. The RRC connection release procedure is a procedure in 5GS. Hereinafter, this procedure refers to the RRC connection release procedure. The RRC connection release procedure is a procedure for each device to release or suspend an RRC connection. The base station device in the access network can start the RRC connection release procedure at any time when the registration procedure is completed and the registration state is reached. In addition, each device may release or suspend the RRC connection based on the completion of the RRC connection release procedure.
尚、RRCコネクション解放手続きは、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局装置が主導して開始される手続きであってよいし、コアネットワーク装置が要求して開始される手続きであってよい。さらに、RRCコネクション解放手続きは、UEからのRRCメッセージの送信がトリガになって開始される手続きであってもよい。
The RRC connection release procedure may be a procedure that is started by the base station device in the access network, or may be a procedure that is requested and started by the core network device. Further, the RRC connection release procedure may be a procedure that is triggered by the transmission of an RRC message from the UE.
例えば、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局装置、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置は、UEの状態の変化に基づいて、RRCコネクション解放手続きを開始してもよいし、UEの加入者情報の変更に基づいて、RRCコネクション解放手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局装置、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置は、ネットワークの設定の変更に基づいて、RRCコネクション解放手続きを開始してもよいし、ネットワークの状態の変更に基づいて、RRCコネクション解放手続きを開始してもよい。さらに、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局装置、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置は、ユーザデータの送受信部がなくなったことの検知に基づいて、RRCコネクション解放手続きを開始してもよいし、RRCコネクションが不要になったことの検知に基づいて、RRCコネクション解放手続きを開始してもよい。尚、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局装置、及び/又はコアネットワーク装置が、RRCコネクション解放手続きを開始するトリガはこれらに限らなくてよい。
For example, the base station device and / or the core network device in the access network may initiate the RRC connection release procedure based on the change in the state of the UE, or may start the RRC connection release procedure based on the change in the subscriber information of the UE. The RRC connection release procedure may be started. In addition, the base station device and / or the core network device in the access network may initiate the RRC connection release procedure based on the change in network settings, or the RRC connection based on the change in network status. You may start the release procedure. Further, the base station device and / or the core network device in the access network may start the RRC connection release procedure based on the detection that the transmission / reception unit of the user data has disappeared, and the RRC connection becomes unnecessary. The RRC connection release procedure may be started based on the detection of the occurrence. The trigger for the base station device and / or the core network device in the access network to start the RRC connection release procedure is not limited to these.
まず、アクセスネットワーク内の基地局装置(gNB)は、UEにRRC解放 (RRC release) メッセージを送信することにより(S1000)、RRCコネクション解放手続きを開始する。
First, the base station device (gNB) in the access network starts the RRC connection release procedure by sending an RRC release (RRC release) message to the UE (S1000).
具体的には、gNBは、Uuインターフェースを介して、UEに、RRC解放メッセージを送信する(S1000)。尚、RRC解放メッセージは、RRCメッセージであってよい。
Specifically, gNB sends an RRC release message to the UE via the Uu interface (S1000). The RRC release message may be an RRC message.
ここで、gNBは、少なくとも第1の識別情報を、RRC解放メッセージに含めて送信してもよい。これらの識別情報は、これらのメッセージに含められることで、gNBの要求を示してもよい。
Here, gNB may include at least the first identification information in the RRC release message and send it. These identifications may be included in these messages to indicate a gNB request.
さらに、gNBは、第1の識別情報を送信することで、RRCコネクションをサスペンドされることを示してもよい。言い換えると、gNBは、第1の識別情報を送信することで、RRCコネクションの状態を非有効化にしてもよいし、RRCコネクションの状態をサスペンド状態にしてもよい。
Furthermore, gNB may indicate that the RRC connection is suspended by transmitting the first identification information. In other words, gNB may disable the RRC connection state or suspend the RRC connection state by transmitting the first identification information.
さらに、gNBは、第1の識別情報を送信することで、UEに、RRCコネクションをサスペンドするように指示してもよい。さらに、gNBは、第1の識別情報を送信することで、UEに、RRCコネクションの状態を非有効化するように指示してもよいし、RRCコネクションの状態をサスペンドにするように指示してもよい。
Furthermore, gNB may instruct the UE to suspend the RRC connection by transmitting the first identification information. In addition, gNB may instruct the UE to deactivate the state of the RRC connection or suspend the state of the RRC connection by sending the first identification information. May be good.
ここで、RRCコネクションをサスペンドするとは、RRCコネクションを非有効化状態にすることを意味してもよい。さらに、RRCコネクションの状態を非有効化するとは、RRCレイヤの状態を非有効化することを意味してもよい。さらに、RRCコネクションの状態をサスペンドにするとは、RRCレイヤの状態をサスペンドにすることを意味してもよい。
Here, suspending the RRC connection may mean disabling the RRC connection. Further, disabling the state of the RRC connection may mean deactivating the state of the RRC layer. Further, suspending the state of the RRC connection may mean suspending the state of the RRC layer.
さらに、gNBは、第1の識別情報を送信することで、RRC_INACTIVE状態に遷移してもよい。さらに、gNBは、第1の識別情報を送信することで、UEに、RRC_INACTIVE状態に遷移するように指示してもよい。
Furthermore, gNB may transition to the RRC_INACTIVE state by transmitting the first identification information. Further, the gNB may instruct the UE to transition to the RRC_INACTIVE state by transmitting the first identification information.
UEは、RRC解放メッセージを受信する(S900)。UEは、RRC解放メッセージの受信に基づいて、RRC解放メッセージに含まれる識別情報を認識、記憶してもよい。
UE receives the RRC release message (S900). The UE may recognize and store the identification information contained in the RRC release message based on the receipt of the RRC release message.
さらに、UE_Rは、RRC解放メッセージの受信に基づいて、RRCコネクションを解放してもよいし、RRCコネクションをサスペンドしてもよい。さらに、UE_Rは、RRC解放メッセージの受信に基づいて、RRCコネクションの状態を非有効化にしてもよいし、RRCコネクションの状態をサスペンドにしてもよい。
Furthermore, UE_R may release the RRC connection or suspend the RRC connection based on the reception of the RRC release message. In addition, UE_R may disable the state of the RRC connection or suspend the state of the RRC connection based on the receipt of the RRC release message.
さらに、UE_Rは、RRC解放メッセージの受信に基づいて、上位レイヤに、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされたことを示す情報を送信してもよい。さらに、UE_Rは、RRC解放メッセージの受信に基づいて、RRC_INACTIVE状態に遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, UE_R may send information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended to the upper layer based on the reception of the RRC release message. In addition, UE_R may transition to the RRC_INACTIVE state based on the receipt of the RRC release message.
ここで、UE_Rは、UEのRRCレイヤの機能を担う機能部であってもよい。さらに、上位レイヤとは、NASレイヤであってよい。さらに、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされたことを示す情報は、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされたことを示すインディケーションであってもよい。さらに、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされたことを示す情報は、第1の識別情報であってもよい。
Here, UE_R may be a functional unit responsible for the function of the RRC layer of the UE. Further, the upper layer may be a NAS layer. Further, the information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended may be an indication indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended. Further, the information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended may be the first identification information.
さらに、UE_Nは、下位レイヤから、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされたことを示す情報を受信してもよい。さらに、UE_Nは、下位レイヤからの、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされたことを示す情報の受信に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationに遷移してもよい。より詳細には、UE_Nは、下位レイヤからの、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされたことを示す情報の受信に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED modeから5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationに遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, UE_N may receive information from the lower layer indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended. Further, UE_N may transition to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication based on the reception of information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended from the lower layer. More specifically, UE_N may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication based on the reception of information from the lower layer indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended.
ここで、UE_Nは、下位レイヤからの、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされたことを示す情報の受信に基づいて、3GPPアクセスの状態のみを、5GMM-CONNECTED modeから5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationに遷移してもよい。言い換えると、UE_Nは、下位レイヤから、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされたことを示す情報を受信したとしても、non-3GPPアクセスの状態に関しては、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationに遷移しなくてもよい。
Here, UE_N transitions only the 3GPP access status from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication from the lower layer based on the reception of information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended. You may. In other words, UE_N does not have to transition to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication regarding the non-3GPP access status even if it receives information from the lower layer indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended. ..
ここで、UE_Nは、UEのNASレイヤの機能を担う機能部であってもよい。言い換えると、UE_Nは、UEのNASレイヤの機能を担う送受信部であってもよいし、UEのNASレイヤの機能を担う機能部であってもよい。さらに、下位レイヤとは、RRCレイヤであってよい。さらに、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされたことを示す情報は、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされたことを示すインディケーションであってもよい。さらに、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされたことを示す情報は、第1の識別情報であってもよい。
Here, UE_N may be a functional unit responsible for the function of the NAS layer of the UE. In other words, UE_N may be a transmission / reception unit that is responsible for the function of the NAS layer of the UE, or may be a functional unit that is responsible for the function of the NAS layer of the UE. Further, the lower layer may be an RRC layer. Further, the information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended may be an indication indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended. Further, the information indicating that the RRC connection has been suspended may be the first identification information.
各装置は、RRC解放の送受信、及び/又は各状態への遷移に基づいて、RRCコネクション解放手続きを完了する。尚、各装置は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、RRCコネクション解放してもよいし、RRCコネクションをサスペンドしてもよい。さらに、各装置は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、RRCコネクションがサスペンドされた状態に遷移してもよいし、RRCコネクションが非有効化された状態に遷移してもよい。さらに、各装置は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、RRC_INACTIVE状態に遷移してもよい。
Each device completes the RRC connection release procedure based on the transmission / reception of RRC release and / or the transition to each state. In addition, each device may release the RRC connection or suspend the RRC connection based on the completion of this procedure. Further, each device may transition to a suspended state of the RRC connection or a disabled state of the RRC connection based on the completion of this procedure. Further, each device may transition to the RRC_INACTIVE state based on the completion of this procedure.
さらに、各装置は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationに遷移してもよい。より詳細には、各装置は、本手続きの完了に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED modeから5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationに遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, each device may transition to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication based on the completion of this procedure. More specifically, each device may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode to 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication based on the completion of this procedure.
[4. 第1の実施形態]
次に、第1の実施形態について説明する。以下、第1の実施形態を本実施形態と称する。本実施形態では、UEは、第1から4の手続きの中から、一又複数の手続きを選択し、実行する。 [4. First Embodiment]
Next, the first embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, the first embodiment will be referred to as the present embodiment. In this embodiment, the UE selects and executes one or more procedures from the first to fourth procedures.
次に、第1の実施形態について説明する。以下、第1の実施形態を本実施形態と称する。本実施形態では、UEは、第1から4の手続きの中から、一又複数の手続きを選択し、実行する。 [4. First Embodiment]
Next, the first embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, the first embodiment will be referred to as the present embodiment. In this embodiment, the UE selects and executes one or more procedures from the first to fourth procedures.
尚、UEは、第1から4の手続きの内、どの手続きを実行するかを、UEの設定情報、及び/又はネットワークから受信した情報、及び/又はUEのモード、及び/又はUEの能力情報に基づいて決定してもよい。
In addition, the UE determines which of the procedures 1 to 4 is to be executed, the setting information of the UE and / or the information received from the network, and / or the mode of the UE, and / or the capability information of the UE. It may be decided based on.
[4.1. 第1の手続き]
次に、第1の手続きについて、図6を用いて説明する。以下、第1の手続きを本手続きと称する。第1の手続きでは、まず、UEが第1のネットワーク選択を行う(S600)。次に、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、UEは、選択されたネットワークに接続し、登録手続きを開始する(S602)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始した登録手続きを行う(S602)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始したPDUセッション確立手続きを行うことにより(S604)、PDUセッションを確立し、UEとDNとの間で、PDUセッションを用いた通信を行うことができる状態へ遷移する。次に、各装置は、PDUセッションを用いてユーザデータの送受信を行う。 [4.1. First procedure]
Next, the first procedure will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, the first procedure will be referred to as this procedure. In the first procedure, the UE first makes the first network selection (S600). Then, based on the first network selection, the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration process (S602). Next, each device performs the registration procedure initiated by the UE (S602). Next, each device establishes a PDU session by performing the PDU session establishment procedure initiated by the UE (S604), and is in a state where communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN. Transition. Next, each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session.
次に、第1の手続きについて、図6を用いて説明する。以下、第1の手続きを本手続きと称する。第1の手続きでは、まず、UEが第1のネットワーク選択を行う(S600)。次に、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、UEは、選択されたネットワークに接続し、登録手続きを開始する(S602)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始した登録手続きを行う(S602)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始したPDUセッション確立手続きを行うことにより(S604)、PDUセッションを確立し、UEとDNとの間で、PDUセッションを用いた通信を行うことができる状態へ遷移する。次に、各装置は、PDUセッションを用いてユーザデータの送受信を行う。 [4.1. First procedure]
Next, the first procedure will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, the first procedure will be referred to as this procedure. In the first procedure, the UE first makes the first network selection (S600). Then, based on the first network selection, the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration process (S602). Next, each device performs the registration procedure initiated by the UE (S602). Next, each device establishes a PDU session by performing the PDU session establishment procedure initiated by the UE (S604), and is in a state where communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN. Transition. Next, each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session.
次に、各装置は、任意のタイミングにおいて、RRCコネクション解放手続きを行ってもよい(S606)。尚、各装置は、RRCコネクション解放手続きを行わずに、次のステップに進んでもよい。
Next, each device may perform the RRC connection release procedure at any time (S606). Note that each device may proceed to the next step without performing the RRC connection release procedure.
次に、UEは、任意のタイミングにおいて、第2のネットワーク選択を行う(S608)。次に、第2のネットワーク選択に基づいて、UEは、選択されたネットワークに接続し、登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きを開始する(S610)(S612)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始した登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きを行う(S610)(S612)。次に、各装置は、登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きの完了に基づいて、UEとDNとの間で、PDUセッションを用いた通信を行うことができる状態へ遷移する。次に、各装置は、PDUセッションを用いてユーザデータの送受信を行う。以上により、第1の手続きは完了する。
Next, the UE makes a second network selection at any time (S608). Next, based on the second network selection, the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure (S610) (S612). Next, each device performs a UE-initiated registration procedure and / or a PDU session establishment procedure (S610) (S612). Next, each device transitions to a state in which communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN based on the completion of the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure. Next, each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session. With the above, the first procedure is completed.
ここで、UEは、UEの状態の変化に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよいし、UEの設定加入者情報の変更に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよい。さらに、UEは、UEの設定の変更に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよいし、UEの移動に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよい。さらに、UEは、ネットワークから制御メッセージの受信に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよいし、ネットワークからの指示に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよい。ここで、制御メッセージは、NASメッセージであってもよいし、NASメッセージ以外の制御メッセージであってもよい。具体的には、制御メッセージは、非登録要求メッセージであってもよいし、登録拒絶メッセージであってもよい。尚、UEが、第2のネットワーク選択を実行するトリガはこれらに限らなくてよい。
Here, the UE may execute the second network selection based on the change in the state of the UE, or may execute the second network selection based on the change in the setting subscriber information of the UE. good. In addition, the UE may perform a second network selection based on changes in the UE settings, or may perform a second network selection based on the movement of the UE. Further, the UE may perform a second network selection based on the receipt of a control message from the network, or may perform a second network selection based on instructions from the network. Here, the control message may be a NAS message or a control message other than the NAS message. Specifically, the control message may be a non-registration request message or a registration refusal message. The trigger for the UE to execute the second network selection is not limited to these.
尚、第1の手続きでは、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択において、PLMN選択を実施し、PLMNを選択してもよい。より詳細には、UEは、UEの設定情報、及び/又はネットワークから受信した情報、及び/又はUEのモード、及び/又はUEの能力情報に基づいて、第1のネットワーク選択において、PLMNを選択してもよい。具体的には、UEは、SNPNアクセスモードで作動していない場合、第1のネットワーク選択において、PLMN選択を実施し、PLMNを選択してもよい。
In the first procedure, the UE may select PLMN and select PLMN in the first network selection. More specifically, the UE selects PLMN in the first network selection based on the UE configuration information and / or the information received from the network and / or the UE mode and / or the UE capability information. You may. Specifically, when the UE is not operating in the SNPN access mode, it may perform PLMN selection in the first network selection and select PLMN.
さらに、第1の手続きでは、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、PLMNに登録されてもよい。言い換えると、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、PLMNに登録された状態に遷移してもよい。さらに、第1の手続きでは、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択の完了後、PLMNに登録されていてよい。言い換えると、PLMNに登録された状態であってよい。
Furthermore, in the first procedure, the UE may be registered with the PLMN based on the first network selection. In other words, the UE may transition to the PLMN registered state based on the first network selection. Further, in the first procedure, the UE may be registered with the PLMN after the completion of the first network selection. In other words, it may be in the state of being registered in the PLMN.
さらに、第1の手続きでは、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択において、PLMN選択を実施し、PLMNを選択してもよい。より詳細には、UEは、UEの設定情報、及び/又はネットワークから受信した情報、及び/又はUEのモード、及び/又はUEの能力情報に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択において、PLMNを選択してもよい。さらに、UEは、UEの設定情報の変更、及び/又はネットワークから受信した情報、及び/又はUEのモードの変更、及び/又はUEの能力情報の変更に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択において、PLMNを選択してもよい。具体的には、UEは、SNPNアクセスモードで作動していない場合、第2のネットワーク選択において、PLMN選択を実施し、PLMNを選択してもよい。
Further, in the first procedure, the UE may perform PLMN selection in the second network selection and select PLMN. More specifically, the UE selects PLMN in the second network selection based on the UE configuration information and / or the information received from the network and / or the UE mode and / or the UE capability information. You may. In addition, the UE will in the second network selection based on changes in the UE configuration information and / or information received from the network and / or UE mode changes and / or UE capability information. PLMN may be selected. Specifically, when the UE is not operating in the SNPN access mode, it may perform PLMN selection in the second network selection and select PLMN.
また、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択において、PLMNを選択した場合、SNPNアクセスモードが作動されていない状態に遷移してもよい。さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択において、PLMNを選択した場合、SNPNアクセスモードが作動されていない状態に遷移してもよい。
Further, when PLMN is selected in the first network selection, the UE may transition to a state in which the SNPN access mode is not activated. Further, the UE may transition to a state in which the SNPN access mode is not activated when PLMN is selected in the second network selection.
さらに、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、PLMNを選択してもよいし、選択したPLMNに接続してもよいし、その両方を実施してもよい。さらに、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、PLMNが選択された状態に遷移してもよいし、PLMNに登録された状態に遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may select PLMN based on the first network selection, connect to the selected PLMN, or implement both. Further, the UE may transition to the selected state of the PLMN or the state registered in the PLMN based on the first network selection.
さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択に基づいて、新しいPLMNを選択してもよいし、現在のPLMNから新しいPLMNに移動してもよいし、その両方を実施してもよい。さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択に基づいて、新しいPLMNが選択された状態に遷移してもよいし、現在のPLMNに登録された状態から新しいPLMNに登録された状態に遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may select a new PLMN based on the second network selection, move from the current PLMN to the new PLMN, or both. Furthermore, the UE may transition to the selected state of the new PLMN based on the second network selection, or may transition from the state registered in the current PLMN to the state registered in the new PLMN. good.
さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよいし、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移しなくてもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode or from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the second network selection. You don't have to.
具体的には、UEは、均等PLMN以外のPLMNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、均等PLMN以外のPLMNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。より詳細には、UEは、PLMNに登録されている場合、均等PLMN以外のPLMNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。さらに、UEは、SNPNアクセスモードで作動していない場合、均等PLMN以外のPLMNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。
Specifically, the UE may transition to the 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of PLMN other than equal PLMN. In other words, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of PLMN other than equal PLMN. More specifically, when registered in PLMN, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of PLMN other than equal PLMN. Further, when the UE is not operating in the SNPN access mode, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of PLMN other than equal PLMN.
さらに、UEは、均等PLMN以外のPLMNの選択に基づいて、3GPPアクセスの状態のみを、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may transition only the 3GPP access status from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of PLMN other than equal PLMN.
逆に、UEは、均等PLMNであるPLMNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移しなくてもよい。言い換えると、UEは、均等PLMNであるPLMNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移しなくてもよい。より詳細には、UEは、PLMNに登録されている場合、均等PLMNであるPLMNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移しなくてもよい。さらに、UEは、SNPNアクセスモードで作動していない場合、均等PLMNであるPLMNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移しなくてもよい。
On the contrary, the UE does not have to transition to the 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of the PLMN which is the equal PLMN. In other words, the UE does not have to transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of PLMN which is an equal PLMN. More specifically, when registered in the PLMN, the UE does not have to transition from the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to the 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of the PLMN which is an equal PLMN. Further, when the UE is not operating in the SNPN access mode, it is not necessary to transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of PLMN which is an equal PLMN.
尚、均等PLMN以外のPLMNの選択とは、登録PLMN対する均等PLMNではないPLMNが、新しいPLMNとして選択されることを示してもよい。さらに、均等PLMN以外のPLMNの選択とは、登録PLMN対する均等PLMNではないPLMNが新しいPLMNとして選択され、選択された新しいPLMNに、UEが入ることであってもよい。
Note that the selection of a PLMN other than the equal PLMN may indicate that a PLMN that is not an equal PLMN with respect to the registered PLMN is selected as a new PLMN. Further, the selection of a PLMN other than the equal PLMN may mean that a PLMN that is not an equal PLMN with respect to the registered PLMN is selected as the new PLMN, and the UE is included in the selected new PLMN.
さらに、均等PLMNであるPLMNの選択とは、均等PLMNのリストにあるPLMNが、新しいPLMNとして選択されることを示してもよい。さらに、均等PLMNであるPLMNの選択とは、均等PLMNのリストにあるPLMNが、新しいPLMNとして選択され、選択された新しいPLMNに、UEが入ることであってもよい。言い換えると、均等PLMNであるPLMNの選択とは、均等PLMNのリストに含まれるPLMNが新しいPLMNとして選択され、選択された新しいPLMNに、UEが入ることであってもよい。
Further, the selection of the PLMN which is the equal PLMN may indicate that the PLMN in the list of equal PLMNs is selected as the new PLMN. Further, the selection of a PLMN that is an equal PLMN may mean that the PLMN in the list of equal PLMNs is selected as the new PLMN and the UE is included in the selected new PLMN. In other words, the selection of a PLMN that is an equal PLMN may mean that the PLMN contained in the list of equal PLMNs is selected as the new PLMN and the UE is included in the selected new PLMN.
さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク登録に基づいて、挙動Cを実施してもよいし、挙動Aを継続してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may carry out behavior C or continue behavior A based on the second network registration.
具体的には、UEは、均等PLMN以外のPLMNの登録に基づいて、挙動Cを実施してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、挙動Aを実施している場合、均等PLMN以外のPLMNの登録に基づいて、挙動Cを実施してもよい。
Specifically, the UE may carry out behavior C based on the registration of PLMNs other than equal PLMNs. In other words, if the UE is performing behavior A, it may perform behavior C based on the registration of PLMNs other than the equal PLMN.
逆に、UEは、均等PLMNであるPLMNの登録に基づいて、挙動Aを継続してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、挙動Aを実施している場合、均等PLMNであるPLMNの登録に基づいて、挙動Aを継続してもよい。
Conversely, the UE may continue behavior A based on the registration of the PLMN, which is an equal PLMN. In other words, if the UE is performing behavior A, it may continue behavior A based on the registration of the PLMN, which is an equal PLMN.
ここで、挙動Aは、PDUセッション確立手続き中にある挙動Aと同様であってよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止を解除する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除されることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Here, behavior A may be the same as behavior A during the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, the behavior C may be a behavior that lifts the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. .. In addition, behavior C recognizes that the prohibition on starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is lifted. May be. In addition, behavior C is a behavior that sets the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 to be lifted. May be. Furthermore, behavior C is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set is lifted. May be.
さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可される挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可されることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きが開始されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Further, the behavior C may be a behavior that allows the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. Further, behavior C is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is allowed. You may. Further, behavior C is a behavior that is set to allow the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6. You may. Furthermore, even if behavior C is a behavior that sets a new PDU session establishment procedure to be started using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. good. Furthermore, behavior C is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure is permitted using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. You may.
さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク登録に基づいて、挙動Dを実施してもよいし、挙動Bを継続してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may perform behavior D or continue behavior B based on the second network registration.
具体的には、UEは、均等PLMN以外のPLMNの登録に基づいて、挙動Dを実施してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、挙動Bを実施している場合、均等PLMN以外のPLMNの登録に基づいて、挙動Dを実施してもよい。
Specifically, the UE may carry out behavior D based on the registration of PLMNs other than equal PLMNs. In other words, when the UE is implementing the behavior B, the UE may perform the behavior D based on the registration of PLMNs other than the equal PLMN.
逆に、UEは、均等PLMNであるPLMNの登録に基づいて、挙動Bを継続してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、挙動Bを実施している場合、均等PLMNであるPLMNの登録に基づいて、挙動Bを継続してもよい。
On the contrary, the UE may continue the behavior B based on the registration of the PLMN which is the equal PLMN. In other words, if the UE is performing behavior B, it may continue behavior B based on the registration of the PLMN, which is an equal PLMN.
ここで、挙動Bは、PDUセッション確立手続き中にある挙動Bと同様であってよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止を解除する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除されることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Here, behavior B may be the same as behavior B during the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, the behavior D may be a behavior that lifts the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. .. Furthermore, behavior D recognizes that the prohibition on starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is lifted. May be. Furthermore, behavior D is a behavior that sets the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set to be lifted. May be. Furthermore, behavior D is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is lifted. May be.
さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可される挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可されることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きが開始されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Further, the behavior D may be a behavior that allows the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. Further, behavior D is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is allowed. You may. Further, behavior D is a behavior that is set so that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is permitted. You may. Further, even if the behavior D is a behavior that sets a new PDU session establishment procedure to be started using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. good. Furthermore, behavior D is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure is permitted using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. You may.
尚、均等PLMN以外のPLMNの登録とは、登録PLMN対する均等PLMNではない新しいPLMNに登録されることを示してもよい。さらに、均等PLMNであるPLMNの登録とは、均等PLMNのリストにある新しいPLMNに登録されることを示してもよい。
Note that the registration of a PLMN other than the equal PLMN may indicate that the PLMN is registered in a new PLMN that is not the equal PLMN with respect to the registered PLMN. Further, registration of a PLMN that is an equal PLMN may indicate that it is registered in a new PLMN in the list of equal PLMNs.
さらに、同じDNNとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きにて、送受信されたDNNと同じDNNであってよい。言い換えると、同じDNNとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きにて、第12の識別情報に含めて送受信されたDNNと同じDNNであってよいし、第22の識別情報に含めて送受信されたDNNと同じDNNであってもよい。さらに、同じS-NSSAIとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きにて、送受信されたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIであってよい。言い換えると、さらに、同じS-NSSAIとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きにて、第13の識別情報に含めて送受信されたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIであってよいし、第23の識別情報に含めて送受信されたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIであってもよい。
Furthermore, the same DNN may be the same DNN as the sent / received DNN in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the same DNN may be the same DNN that was included in the 12th identification information and sent / received in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure, or may be included in the 22nd identification information and sent / received. It may be the same DNN as the DNN. Further, the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI transmitted / received in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the 13th identification information in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure, and the 23rd. It may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the identification information of.
ここで、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きとは別のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。言い換えると、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きの完了後に実施されるPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。さらに言い換えると、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きの完了後に実施される、別のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
Here, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure different from the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be another PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
さらに、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。言い換えると、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、UE要求のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
In addition, the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type. In other words, a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
さらに、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。言い換えると、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、UE要求のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
In addition, the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type. In other words, a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv4 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
さらに、PDUセッション確立手続きの要求が拒絶された場合、各装置は、PDUセッションを確立しなくてよい。この場合、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了後に、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含まれる情報に基づいた処理を実施してもよいし、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含まれる情報に基づいた処理を実施することで、第1の手続きを完了してもよい。
Furthermore, if the request for the PDU session establishment procedure is rejected, each device does not have to establish the PDU session. In this case, after the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure, each device may perform processing based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment refusal message, or perform processing based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment refusal message. By doing so, the first procedure may be completed.
[4.2. 第2の手続き]
次に、第2の手続きについて、図6を用いて説明する。以下、第2の手続きを本手続きと称する。第2の手続きでは、まず、UEが第1のネットワーク選択を行う(S600)。次に、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、UEは、選択されたネットワークに接続し、登録手続きを開始する(S602)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始した登録手続きを行う(S602)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始したPDUセッション確立手続きを行うことにより(S604)、PDUセッションを確立し、UEとDNとの間で、PDUセッションを用いた通信を行うことができる状態へ遷移する。次に、各装置は、PDUセッションを用いてユーザデータの送受信を行う。 [4.2. Second procedure]
Next, the second procedure will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, the second procedure will be referred to as this procedure. In the second procedure, the UE first makes the first network selection (S600). Then, based on the first network selection, the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration process (S602). Next, each device performs the registration procedure initiated by the UE (S602). Next, each device establishes a PDU session by performing the PDU session establishment procedure initiated by the UE (S604), and is in a state where communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN. Transition. Next, each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session.
次に、第2の手続きについて、図6を用いて説明する。以下、第2の手続きを本手続きと称する。第2の手続きでは、まず、UEが第1のネットワーク選択を行う(S600)。次に、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、UEは、選択されたネットワークに接続し、登録手続きを開始する(S602)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始した登録手続きを行う(S602)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始したPDUセッション確立手続きを行うことにより(S604)、PDUセッションを確立し、UEとDNとの間で、PDUセッションを用いた通信を行うことができる状態へ遷移する。次に、各装置は、PDUセッションを用いてユーザデータの送受信を行う。 [4.2. Second procedure]
Next, the second procedure will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, the second procedure will be referred to as this procedure. In the second procedure, the UE first makes the first network selection (S600). Then, based on the first network selection, the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration process (S602). Next, each device performs the registration procedure initiated by the UE (S602). Next, each device establishes a PDU session by performing the PDU session establishment procedure initiated by the UE (S604), and is in a state where communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN. Transition. Next, each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session.
次に、各装置は、任意のタイミングにおいて、RRCコネクション解放手続きを行ってもよい(S606)。尚、各装置は、RRCコネクション解放手続きを行わずに、次のステップに進んでもよい。
Next, each device may perform the RRC connection release procedure at any time (S606). Note that each device may proceed to the next step without performing the RRC connection release procedure.
次に、UEは、任意のタイミングにおいて、第2のネットワーク選択を行う(S608)。次に、第2のネットワーク選択に基づいて、UEは、選択されたネットワークに接続し、登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きを開始する(S610)(S612)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始した登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きを行う(S610)(S612)。次に、各装置は、登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きの完了に基づいて、UEとDNとの間で、PDUセッションを用いた通信を行うことができる状態へ遷移する。次に、各装置は、PDUセッションを用いてユーザデータの送受信を行う。以上により、第2の手続きは完了する。
Next, the UE makes a second network selection at any time (S608). Next, based on the second network selection, the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure (S610) (S612). Next, each device performs a UE-initiated registration procedure and / or a PDU session establishment procedure (S610) (S612). Next, each device transitions to a state in which communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN based on the completion of the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure. Next, each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session. With the above, the second procedure is completed.
ここで、UEは、UEの状態の変化に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよいし、UEの設定加入者情報の変更に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよい。さらに、UEは、UEの設定の変更に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよいし、UEの移動に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよい。さらに、UEは、ネットワークから制御メッセージの受信に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよいし、ネットワークからの指示に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよい。ここで、制御メッセージは、NASメッセージであってもよいし、NASメッセージ以外の制御メッセージであってもよい。具体的には、制御メッセージは、非登録要求メッセージであってもよいし、登録拒絶メッセージであってもよい。尚、UEが、第2のネットワーク選択を実行するトリガはこれらに限らなくてよい。
Here, the UE may execute the second network selection based on the change in the state of the UE, or may execute the second network selection based on the change in the setting subscriber information of the UE. good. In addition, the UE may perform a second network selection based on changes in the UE settings, or may perform a second network selection based on the movement of the UE. Further, the UE may perform a second network selection based on the receipt of a control message from the network, or may perform a second network selection based on instructions from the network. Here, the control message may be a NAS message or a control message other than the NAS message. Specifically, the control message may be a non-registration request message or a registration refusal message. The trigger for the UE to execute the second network selection is not limited to these.
尚、第2の手続きでは、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択において、PLMN選択を実施し、PLMNを選択してもよい。より詳細には、UEは、UEの設定情報、及び/又はネットワークから受信した情報、及び/又はUEのモード、及び/又はUEの能力情報に基づいて、第1のネットワーク選択において、PLMNを選択してもよい。具体的には、UEは、SNPNアクセスモードで作動していない場合、第1のネットワーク選択において、PLMN選択を実施し、PLMNを選択してもよい。
In the second procedure, the UE may perform PLMN selection in the first network selection and select PLMN. More specifically, the UE selects PLMN in the first network selection based on the UE configuration information and / or the information received from the network and / or the UE mode and / or the UE capability information. You may. Specifically, when the UE is not operating in the SNPN access mode, it may perform PLMN selection in the first network selection and select PLMN.
さらに、第2の手続きでは、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、PLMNに登録されてもよい。言い換えると、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、PLMNに登録された状態に遷移してもよい。さらに、第2の手続きでは、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択の完了後、PLMNに登録されていてよい。言い換えると、PLMNに登録された状態であってよい。
Furthermore, in the second procedure, the UE may be registered with the PLMN based on the first network selection. In other words, the UE may transition to the PLMN registered state based on the first network selection. Further, in the second procedure, the UE may be registered with the PLMN after the completion of the first network selection. In other words, it may be in the state of being registered in the PLMN.
さらに、第2の手続きでは、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択において、SNPN選択を実施し、SNPNを選択してもよい。より詳細には、UEは、UEの設定情報、及び/又はネットワークから受信した情報、及び/又はUEのモード、及び/又はUEの能力情報に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択において、SNPNを選択してもよい。さらに、UEは、UEの設定情報の変更、及び/又はネットワークから受信した情報、及び/又はUEのモードの変更、及び/又はUEの能力情報の変更に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択において、SNPNを選択してもよい。具体的には、UEは、SNPNアクセスモードで作動している場合、第2のネットワーク選択において、PLMN選択の代わりに、SNPN選択を実施し、SNPNを選択してもよい。
Further, in the second procedure, the UE may perform SNPN selection in the second network selection and select SNPN. More specifically, the UE selects the SNPN in the second network selection based on the UE configuration information and / or the information received from the network and / or the UE mode and / or the UE capability information. You may. In addition, the UE will in the second network selection based on changes in the UE configuration information and / or information received from the network and / or UE mode changes and / or UE capability information. SNPN may be selected. Specifically, when operating in the SNPN access mode, the UE may perform SNPN selection and select SNPN instead of PLMN selection in the second network selection.
また、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択において、PLMNを選択した場合、SNPNアクセスモードが作動されていない状態に遷移してもよい。さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択において、SNPNを選択した場合、SNPNアクセスモードが作動されている状態に遷移してもよい。
Further, when PLMN is selected in the first network selection, the UE may transition to a state in which the SNPN access mode is not activated. Further, the UE may transition to the state in which the SNPN access mode is activated when SNPN is selected in the second network selection.
さらに、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、PLMNを選択してもよいし、選択したPLMNに接続してもよいし、その両方を実施してもよい。さらに、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、PLMNが選択された状態に遷移してもよいし、PLMNに登録された状態に遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may select PLMN based on the first network selection, connect to the selected PLMN, or implement both. Further, the UE may transition to the selected state of the PLMN or the state registered in the PLMN based on the first network selection.
さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択に基づいて、SNPNを選択してもよいし、PLMNからSNPNに移動してもよいし、その両方を実施してもよい。さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択に基づいて、SNPNが選択された状態に遷移してもよいし、PLMNに登録された状態からSNPNに登録された状態に遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may select the SNPN based on the second network selection, move from the PLMN to the SNPN, or both. Further, the UE may transition to the selected state of the SNPN based on the second network selection, or may transition from the state registered in the PLMN to the state registered in the SNPN.
さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the second network selection.
具体的には、UEは、SNPNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、SNPNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。より詳細には、UEは、PLMNに登録されている場合、SNPNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。さらに、UEは、SNPNアクセスモードで作動していない場合、SNPNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。
Specifically, the UE may transition to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN. In other words, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN. More specifically, when registered in PLMN, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN. Further, when the UE is not operating in the SNPN access mode, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN.
さらに、UEは、SNPNの選択に基づいて、3GPPアクセスの状態のみを、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may transition only the 3GPP access status from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN.
尚、SNPNの選択とは、新しいSNPNが選択されることを示してもよい。さらに、SNPNの選択とは、新しいSNPNが選択され、選択された新しいSNPNに、UEが入ることであってもよい。
Note that the selection of SNPN may indicate that a new SNPN is selected. Further, the selection of the SNPN may mean that a new SNPN is selected and the UE is included in the selected new SNPN.
さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク登録に基づいて、挙動Cを実施してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may perform behavior C based on the second network registration.
具体的には、UEは、新しいSNPNへの登録に基づいて、挙動Cを実施してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、挙動Aを実施している場合、新しいSNPNへの登録に基づいて、挙動Cを実施してもよい。
Specifically, the UE may perform behavior C based on the registration to the new SNPN. In other words, if the UE is performing behavior A, it may perform behavior C based on its registration with the new SNPN.
ここで、挙動Aは、PDUセッション確立手続き中にある挙動Aと同様であってよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止を解除する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除されることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Here, behavior A may be the same as behavior A during the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, the behavior C may be a behavior that lifts the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. .. In addition, behavior C recognizes that the prohibition on starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is lifted. May be. In addition, behavior C is a behavior that sets the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 to be lifted. May be. Furthermore, behavior C is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set is lifted. May be.
さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可される挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可されることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きが開始されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Further, the behavior C may be a behavior that allows the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. Further, behavior C is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is allowed. You may. Further, behavior C is a behavior that is set to allow the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6. You may. Furthermore, even if behavior C is a behavior that sets a new PDU session establishment procedure to be started using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. good. Furthermore, behavior C is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure is permitted using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. You may.
さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク登録に基づいて、挙動Dを実施してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may perform behavior D based on the second network registration.
具体的には、UEは、新しいSNPNへの登録に基づいて、挙動Dを実施してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、挙動Bを実施している場合、新しいSNPNへの登録に基づいて、挙動Dを実施してもよい。
Specifically, the UE may perform behavior D based on registration with the new SNPN. In other words, if UE is performing behavior B, it may perform behavior D based on its registration with the new SNPN.
ここで、挙動Bは、PDUセッション確立手続き中にある挙動Bと同様であってよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止を解除する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除されることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Here, behavior B may be the same as behavior B during the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, the behavior D may be a behavior that lifts the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. .. Furthermore, behavior D recognizes that the prohibition on starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is lifted. May be. Furthermore, behavior D is a behavior that sets the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set to be lifted. May be. Furthermore, behavior D is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is lifted. May be.
さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可される挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可されることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きが開始されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Further, the behavior D may be a behavior that allows the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. Further, behavior D is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is allowed. You may. Further, behavior D is a behavior that is set so that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is permitted. You may. Further, even if the behavior D is a behavior that sets a new PDU session establishment procedure to be started using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. good. Furthermore, behavior D is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure is permitted using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. You may.
尚、新しいSNPNへの登録とは、新しいSNPNに登録されることを示してもよい。
Note that registration to a new SNPN may indicate registration to a new SNPN.
さらに、同じDNNとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きにて、送受信されたDNNと同じDNNであってよい。言い換えると、同じDNNとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きにて、第12の識別情報に含めて送受信されたDNNと同じDNNであってよいし、第22の識別情報に含めて送受信されたDNNと同じDNNであってもよい。さらに、同じS-NSSAIとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きにて、送受信されたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIであってよい。言い換えると、さらに、同じS-NSSAIとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きにて、第13の識別情報に含めて送受信されたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIであってよいし、第23の識別情報に含めて送受信されたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIであってもよい。
Furthermore, the same DNN may be the same DNN as the sent / received DNN in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the same DNN may be the same DNN that was included in the 12th identification information and sent / received in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure, or may be included in the 22nd identification information and sent / received. It may be the same DNN as the DNN. Further, the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI transmitted / received in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the 13th identification information in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure, and the 23rd. It may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the identification information of.
ここで、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きとは別のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。言い換えると、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きの完了後に実施されるPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。さらに言い換えると、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きの完了後に実施される、別のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
Here, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure different from the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be another PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
さらに、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。言い換えると、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、UE要求のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
In addition, the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type. In other words, a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
さらに、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。言い換えると、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、UE要求のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
In addition, the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type. In other words, a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv4 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
さらに、PDUセッション確立手続きの要求が拒絶された場合、各装置は、PDUセッションを確立しなくてよい。この場合、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了後に、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含まれる情報に基づいた処理を実施してもよいし、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含まれる情報に基づいた処理を実施することで、第2の手続きを完了してもよい。
Furthermore, if the request for the PDU session establishment procedure is rejected, each device does not have to establish the PDU session. In this case, after the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure, each device may perform processing based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment refusal message, or perform processing based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment refusal message. By doing so, the second procedure may be completed.
[4.3. 第3の手続き]
次に、第3の手続きについて、図6を用いて説明する。以下、第3の手続きを本手続きと称する。第3の手続きでは、まず、UEが第1のネットワーク選択を行う(S600)。次に、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、UEは、選択されたネットワークに接続し、登録手続きを開始する(S602)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始した登録手続きを行う(S602)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始したPDUセッション確立手続きを行うことにより(S604)、PDUセッションを確立し、UEとDNとの間で、PDUセッションを用いた通信を行うことができる状態へ遷移する。次に、各装置は、PDUセッションを用いてユーザデータの送受信を行う。 [4.3. Third procedure]
Next, the third procedure will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, the third procedure will be referred to as this procedure. In the third procedure, the UE first makes the first network selection (S600). Then, based on the first network selection, the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration process (S602). Next, each device performs the registration procedure initiated by the UE (S602). Next, each device establishes a PDU session by performing the PDU session establishment procedure initiated by the UE (S604), and is in a state where communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN. Transition. Next, each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session.
次に、第3の手続きについて、図6を用いて説明する。以下、第3の手続きを本手続きと称する。第3の手続きでは、まず、UEが第1のネットワーク選択を行う(S600)。次に、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、UEは、選択されたネットワークに接続し、登録手続きを開始する(S602)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始した登録手続きを行う(S602)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始したPDUセッション確立手続きを行うことにより(S604)、PDUセッションを確立し、UEとDNとの間で、PDUセッションを用いた通信を行うことができる状態へ遷移する。次に、各装置は、PDUセッションを用いてユーザデータの送受信を行う。 [4.3. Third procedure]
Next, the third procedure will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, the third procedure will be referred to as this procedure. In the third procedure, the UE first makes the first network selection (S600). Then, based on the first network selection, the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration process (S602). Next, each device performs the registration procedure initiated by the UE (S602). Next, each device establishes a PDU session by performing the PDU session establishment procedure initiated by the UE (S604), and is in a state where communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN. Transition. Next, each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session.
次に、各装置は、任意のタイミングにおいて、RRCコネクション解放手続きを行ってもよい(S606)。尚、各装置は、RRCコネクション解放手続きを行わずに、次のステップに進んでもよい。
Next, each device may perform the RRC connection release procedure at any time (S606). Note that each device may proceed to the next step without performing the RRC connection release procedure.
次に、UEは、任意のタイミングにおいて、第2のネットワーク選択を行う(S608)。次に、第2のネットワーク選択に基づいて、UEは、選択されたネットワークに接続し、登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きを開始する(S610)(S612)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始した登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きを行う(S610)(S612)。次に、各装置は、登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きの完了に基づいて、UEとDNとの間で、PDUセッションを用いた通信を行うことができる状態へ遷移する。次に、各装置は、PDUセッションを用いてユーザデータの送受信を行う。以上により、第3の手続きは完了する。
Next, the UE makes a second network selection at any time (S608). Next, based on the second network selection, the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure (S610) (S612). Next, each device performs a UE-initiated registration procedure and / or a PDU session establishment procedure (S610) (S612). Next, each device transitions to a state in which communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN based on the completion of the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure. Next, each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session. With the above, the third procedure is completed.
ここで、UEは、UEの状態の変化に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよいし、UEの設定加入者情報の変更に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよい。さらに、UEは、UEの設定の変更に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよいし、UEの移動に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよい。さらに、UEは、ネットワークから制御メッセージの受信に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよいし、ネットワークからの指示に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよい。ここで、制御メッセージは、NASメッセージであってもよいし、NASメッセージ以外の制御メッセージであってもよい。具体的には、制御メッセージは、非登録要求メッセージであってもよいし、登録拒絶メッセージであってもよい。尚、UEが、第2のネットワーク選択を実行するトリガはこれらに限らなくてよい。
Here, the UE may execute the second network selection based on the change in the state of the UE, or may execute the second network selection based on the change in the setting subscriber information of the UE. good. In addition, the UE may perform a second network selection based on changes in the UE settings, or may perform a second network selection based on the movement of the UE. Further, the UE may perform a second network selection based on the receipt of a control message from the network, or may perform a second network selection based on instructions from the network. Here, the control message may be a NAS message or a control message other than the NAS message. Specifically, the control message may be a non-registration request message or a registration refusal message. The trigger for the UE to execute the second network selection is not limited to these.
尚、第3の手続きでは、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択において、SNPN選択を実施し、SNPNを選択してもよい。より詳細には、UEは、UEの設定情報、及び/又はネットワークから受信した情報、及び/又はUEのモード、及び/又はUEの能力情報に基づいて、第1のネットワーク選択において、SNPNを選択してもよい。具体的には、UEは、SNPNアクセスモードで作動している場合、第1のネットワーク選択において、PLMN選択の代わりに、SNPN選択を実施し、SNPNを選択してもよい。
In the third procedure, the UE may perform SNPN selection in the first network selection and select SNPN. More specifically, the UE selects the SNPN in the first network selection based on the UE configuration information and / or the information received from the network and / or the UE mode and / or the UE capability information. You may. Specifically, when operating in the SNPN access mode, the UE may perform SNPN selection instead of PLMN selection in the first network selection and select SNPN.
さらに、第3の手続きでは、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、SNPNに登録されてもよい。言い換えると、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、SNPNに登録された状態に遷移してもよい。さらに、第3の手続きでは、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択の完了後、SNPNに登録されていてよい。言い換えると、SNPNに登録された状態であってよい。
Furthermore, in the third procedure, the UE may be registered with the SNPN based on the first network selection. In other words, the UE may transition to the state registered in the SNPN based on the first network selection. Further, in the third procedure, the UE may be registered with the SNPN after the completion of the first network selection. In other words, it may be in the state of being registered in SNPN.
さらに、第3の手続きでは、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択において、PLMN選択を実施し、PLMNを選択してもよい。より詳細には、UEは、UEの設定情報、及び/又はネットワークから受信した情報、及び/又はUEのモード、及び/又はUEの能力情報に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択において、PLMNを選択してもよい。さらに、UEは、UEの設定情報の変更、及び/又はネットワークから受信した情報、及び/又はUEのモードの変更、及び/又はUEの能力情報の変更に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択において、PLMNを選択してもよい。具体的には、UEは、SNPNアクセスモードで作動していない場合、第2のネットワーク選択において、PLMN選択を実施し、PLMNを選択してもよい。
Further, in the third procedure, the UE may perform PLMN selection in the second network selection and select PLMN. More specifically, the UE selects PLMN in the second network selection based on the UE configuration information and / or the information received from the network and / or the UE mode and / or the UE capability information. You may. In addition, the UE will in the second network selection based on changes in the UE configuration information and / or information received from the network and / or UE mode changes and / or UE capability information. PLMN may be selected. Specifically, when the UE is not operating in the SNPN access mode, it may perform PLMN selection in the second network selection and select PLMN.
また、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択において、SNPNを選択した場合、SNPNアクセスモードが作動されている状態に遷移してもよい。さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択において、PLMNを選択した場合、SNPNアクセスモードが作動されていない状態に遷移してもよい。
Further, when SNPN is selected in the first network selection, the UE may transition to the state in which the SNPN access mode is activated. Further, the UE may transition to a state in which the SNPN access mode is not activated when PLMN is selected in the second network selection.
さらに、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、SNPNを選択してもよいし、選択したSNPNに接続してもよいし、その両方を実施してもよい。さらに、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、SNPNが選択された状態に遷移してもよいし、SNPNに登録された状態に遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may select an SNPN based on the first network selection, connect to the selected SNPN, or both. Further, the UE may transition to the selected state of the SNPN or the state registered in the SNPN based on the first network selection.
さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択に基づいて、PLMNを選択してもよいし、SNPNからPLMNに移動してもよいし、その両方を実施してもよい。さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択に基づいて、PLMNが選択された状態に遷移してもよいし、SNPNに登録された状態からPLMNに登録された状態に遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may select PLMN based on the second network selection, move from SNPN to PLMN, or both. Further, the UE may transition to the selected state of the PLMN based on the second network selection, or may transition from the state registered in the SNPN to the state registered in the PLMN.
さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the second network selection.
具体的には、UEは、PLMNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、PLMNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。より詳細には、UEは、SNPNに登録されている場合、PLMNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。さらに、UEは、SNPNアクセスモードで作動している場合、PLMNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。
Specifically, the UE may transition to the 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the PLMN selection. In other words, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the PLMN selection. More specifically, when registered in the SNPN, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of PLMN. Further, when operating in the SNPN access mode, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of PLMN.
さらに、UEは、PLMNの選択に基づいて、3GPPアクセスの状態のみを、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may transition only the 3GPP access status from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the PLMN selection.
尚、PLMNの選択とは、新しいPLMNが選択されることを示してもよい。さらに、PLMNの選択とは、新しいPLMNが選択され、選択された新しいPLMNに、UEが入ることであってもよい。
Note that the selection of PLMN may indicate that a new PLMN is selected. Further, the selection of PLMN may mean that a new PLMN is selected and the UE is included in the selected new PLMN.
さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク登録に基づいて、挙動Cを実施してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may perform behavior C based on the second network registration.
具体的には、UEは、新しいPLMNへの登録に基づいて、挙動Cを実施してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、挙動Aを実施している場合、新しいPLMNへの登録に基づいて、挙動Cを実施してもよい。
Specifically, the UE may implement behavior C based on the registration in the new PLMN. In other words, if the UE is performing behavior A, it may perform behavior C based on its registration on the new PLMN.
ここで、挙動Aは、PDUセッション確立手続き中にある挙動Aと同様であってよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止を解除する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除されることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Here, behavior A may be the same as behavior A during the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, the behavior C may be a behavior that lifts the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. .. In addition, behavior C recognizes that the prohibition on starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is lifted. May be. In addition, behavior C is a behavior that sets the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 to be lifted. May be. Furthermore, behavior C is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set is lifted. May be.
さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可される挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可されることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きが開始されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Further, the behavior C may be a behavior that allows the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. Further, behavior C is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is allowed. You may. Further, behavior C is a behavior that is set to allow the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6. You may. Furthermore, even if behavior C is a behavior that sets a new PDU session establishment procedure to be started using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. good. Furthermore, behavior C is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure is permitted using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. You may.
さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク登録に基づいて、挙動Dを実施してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may perform behavior D based on the second network registration.
具体的には、UEは、新しいPLMNへの登録に基づいて、挙動Dを実施してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、挙動Bを実施している場合、新しいPLMNへの登録に基づいて、挙動Dを実施してもよい。
Specifically, the UE may perform behavior D based on the registration in the new PLMN. In other words, if the UE is performing behavior B, it may perform behavior D based on its registration in the new PLMN.
ここで、挙動Bは、PDUセッション確立手続き中にある挙動Bと同様であってよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止を解除する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除されることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Here, behavior B may be the same as behavior B during the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, the behavior D may be a behavior that lifts the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. .. Furthermore, behavior D recognizes that the prohibition on starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is lifted. May be. Furthermore, behavior D is a behavior that sets the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set to be lifted. May be. Furthermore, behavior D is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is lifted. May be.
さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可される挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可されることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きが開始されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Further, the behavior D may be a behavior that allows the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. Further, behavior D is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is allowed. You may. Further, behavior D is a behavior that is set so that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is permitted. You may. Further, even if the behavior D is a behavior that sets a new PDU session establishment procedure to be started using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. good. Furthermore, behavior D is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure is permitted using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. You may.
尚、新しいPLMNへの登録とは、新しいPLMNに登録されることを示してもよい。
Note that registration to a new PLMN may indicate registration to a new PLMN.
さらに、同じDNNとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きにて、送受信されたDNNと同じDNNであってよい。言い換えると、同じDNNとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きにて、第12の識別情報に含めて送受信されたDNNと同じDNNであってよいし、第22の識別情報に含めて送受信されたDNNと同じDNNであってもよい。さらに、同じS-NSSAIとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きにて、送受信されたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIであってよい。言い換えると、さらに、同じS-NSSAIとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きにて、第13の識別情報に含めて送受信されたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIであってよいし、第23の識別情報に含めて送受信されたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIであってもよい。
Furthermore, the same DNN may be the same DNN as the sent / received DNN in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the same DNN may be the same DNN that was included in the 12th identification information and sent / received in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure, or may be included in the 22nd identification information and sent / received. It may be the same DNN as the DNN. Further, the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI transmitted / received in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the 13th identification information in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure, and the 23rd. It may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the identification information of.
ここで、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きとは別のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。言い換えると、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きの完了後に実施されるPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。さらに言い換えると、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きの完了後に実施される、別のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
Here, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure different from the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be another PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
さらに、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。言い換えると、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、UE要求のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
In addition, the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type. In other words, a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
さらに、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。言い換えると、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、UE要求のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
In addition, the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type. In other words, a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv4 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
さらに、PDUセッション確立手続きの要求が拒絶された場合、各装置は、PDUセッションを確立しなくてよい。この場合、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了後に、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含まれる情報に基づいた処理を実施してもよいし、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含まれる情報に基づいた処理を実施することで、第3の手続きを完了してもよい。
Furthermore, if the request for the PDU session establishment procedure is rejected, each device does not have to establish the PDU session. In this case, after the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure, each device may perform processing based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment refusal message, or perform processing based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment refusal message. By implementing it, the third procedure may be completed.
[4.4. 第4の手続き]
次に、第4の手続きについて、図6を用いて説明する。以下、第4の手続きを本手続きと称する。第4の手続きでは、まず、UEが第1のネットワーク選択を行う(S600)。次に、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、UEは、選択されたネットワークに接続し、登録手続きを開始する(S602)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始した登録手続きを行う(S602)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始したPDUセッション確立手続きを行うことにより(S604)、PDUセッションを確立し、UEとDNとの間で、PDUセッションを用いた通信を行うことができる状態へ遷移する。次に、各装置は、PDUセッションを用いてユーザデータの送受信を行う。 [4.4. Fourth procedure]
Next, the fourth procedure will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, the fourth procedure is referred to as this procedure. In the fourth procedure, the UE first makes the first network selection (S600). Then, based on the first network selection, the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration process (S602). Next, each device performs the registration procedure initiated by the UE (S602). Next, each device establishes a PDU session by performing the PDU session establishment procedure initiated by the UE (S604), and is in a state where communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN. Transition. Next, each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session.
次に、第4の手続きについて、図6を用いて説明する。以下、第4の手続きを本手続きと称する。第4の手続きでは、まず、UEが第1のネットワーク選択を行う(S600)。次に、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、UEは、選択されたネットワークに接続し、登録手続きを開始する(S602)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始した登録手続きを行う(S602)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始したPDUセッション確立手続きを行うことにより(S604)、PDUセッションを確立し、UEとDNとの間で、PDUセッションを用いた通信を行うことができる状態へ遷移する。次に、各装置は、PDUセッションを用いてユーザデータの送受信を行う。 [4.4. Fourth procedure]
Next, the fourth procedure will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, the fourth procedure is referred to as this procedure. In the fourth procedure, the UE first makes the first network selection (S600). Then, based on the first network selection, the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration process (S602). Next, each device performs the registration procedure initiated by the UE (S602). Next, each device establishes a PDU session by performing the PDU session establishment procedure initiated by the UE (S604), and is in a state where communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN. Transition. Next, each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session.
次に、各装置は、任意のタイミングにおいて、RRCコネクション解放手続きを行ってもよい(S606)。尚、各装置は、RRCコネクション解放手続きを行わずに、次のステップに進んでもよい。
Next, each device may perform the RRC connection release procedure at any time (S606). Note that each device may proceed to the next step without performing the RRC connection release procedure.
次に、UEは、任意のタイミングにおいて、第2のネットワーク選択を行う(S608)。次に、第2のネットワーク選択に基づいて、UEは、選択されたネットワークに接続し、登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きを開始する(S610)(S612)。次に、各装置は、UEが開始した登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きを行う(S610)(S612)。次に、各装置は、登録手続き、及び/又はPDUセッション確立手続きの完了に基づいて、UEとDNとの間で、PDUセッションを用いた通信を行うことができる状態へ遷移する。次に、各装置は、PDUセッションを用いてユーザデータの送受信を行う。以上により、第4の手続きは完了する。
Next, the UE makes a second network selection at any time (S608). Next, based on the second network selection, the UE connects to the selected network and initiates the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure (S610) (S612). Next, each device performs a UE-initiated registration procedure and / or a PDU session establishment procedure (S610) (S612). Next, each device transitions to a state in which communication using the PDU session can be performed between the UE and the DN based on the completion of the registration procedure and / or the PDU session establishment procedure. Next, each device sends and receives user data using a PDU session. With the above, the fourth procedure is completed.
ここで、UEは、UEの状態の変化に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよいし、UEの設定加入者情報の変更に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよい。さらに、UEは、UEの設定の変更に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよいし、UEの移動に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよい。さらに、UEは、ネットワークから制御メッセージの受信に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよいし、ネットワークからの指示に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択を実行してもよい。ここで、制御メッセージは、NASメッセージであってもよいし、NASメッセージ以外の制御メッセージであってもよい。具体的には、制御メッセージは、非登録要求メッセージであってもよいし、登録拒絶メッセージであってもよい。尚、UEが、第2のネットワーク選択を実行するトリガはこれらに限らなくてよい。
Here, the UE may execute the second network selection based on the change in the state of the UE, or may execute the second network selection based on the change in the setting subscriber information of the UE. good. In addition, the UE may perform a second network selection based on changes in the UE settings, or may perform a second network selection based on the movement of the UE. Further, the UE may perform a second network selection based on the receipt of a control message from the network, or may perform a second network selection based on instructions from the network. Here, the control message may be a NAS message or a control message other than the NAS message. Specifically, the control message may be a non-registration request message or a registration refusal message. The trigger for the UE to execute the second network selection is not limited to these.
尚、第4の手続きでは、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択において、SNPN選択を実施し、SNPNを選択してもよい。より詳細には、UEは、UEの設定情報、及び/又はネットワークから受信した情報、及び/又はUEのモード、及び/又はUEの能力情報に基づいて、第1のネットワーク選択において、SNPNを選択してもよい。具体的には、UEは、SNPNアクセスモードで作動している場合、第1のネットワーク選択において、PLMN選択の代わりに、SNPN選択を実施し、SNPNを選択してもよい。
In the fourth procedure, the UE may perform SNPN selection in the first network selection and select SNPN. More specifically, the UE selects the SNPN in the first network selection based on the UE configuration information and / or the information received from the network and / or the UE mode and / or the UE capability information. You may. Specifically, when operating in the SNPN access mode, the UE may perform SNPN selection instead of PLMN selection in the first network selection and select SNPN.
さらに、第4の手続きでは、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、SNPNに登録されてもよい。言い換えると、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、SNPNに登録された状態に遷移してもよい。さらに、第4の手続きでは、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択の完了後、SNPNに登録されていてよい。言い換えると、SNPNに登録された状態であってよい。
Furthermore, in the fourth procedure, the UE may be registered with the SNPN based on the first network selection. In other words, the UE may transition to the state registered in the SNPN based on the first network selection. Further, in the fourth procedure, the UE may be registered with the SNPN after the completion of the first network selection. In other words, it may be in the state of being registered in SNPN.
さらに、第4の手続きでは、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択において、SNPN選択を実施し、SNPNを選択してもよい。より詳細には、UEは、UEの設定情報、及び/又はネットワークから受信した情報、及び/又はUEのモード、及び/又はUEの能力情報に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択において、SNPNを選択してもよい。さらに、UEは、UEの設定情報の変更、及び/又はネットワークから受信した情報、及び/又はUEのモードの変更、及び/又はUEの能力情報の変更に基づいて、第2のネットワーク選択において、SNPNを選択してもよい。具体的には、UEは、SNPNアクセスモードで作動している場合、第2のネットワーク選択において、PLMN選択の代わりに、SNPN選択を実施し、SNPNを選択してもよい。
Further, in the fourth procedure, the UE may perform SNPN selection in the second network selection and select SNPN. More specifically, the UE selects the SNPN in the second network selection based on the UE configuration information and / or the information received from the network and / or the UE mode and / or the UE capability information. You may. In addition, the UE will in the second network selection based on changes in the UE configuration information and / or information received from the network and / or UE mode changes and / or UE capability information. SNPN may be selected. Specifically, when operating in the SNPN access mode, the UE may perform SNPN selection and select SNPN instead of PLMN selection in the second network selection.
また、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択において、SNPNを選択した場合、SNPNアクセスモードが作動されている状態に遷移してもよい。さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択において、SNPNを選択した場合、SNPNアクセスモードが作動されている状態に遷移してもよい。
Further, when SNPN is selected in the first network selection, the UE may transition to the state in which the SNPN access mode is activated. Further, the UE may transition to the state in which the SNPN access mode is activated when SNPN is selected in the second network selection.
さらに、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、SNPNを選択してもよいし、選択したSNPNに接続してもよいし、その両方を実施してもよい。さらに、UEは、第1のネットワーク選択に基づいて、SNPNが選択された状態に遷移してもよいし、SNPNに登録された状態に遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may select an SNPN based on the first network selection, connect to the selected SNPN, or both. Further, the UE may transition to the selected state of the SNPN or the state registered in the SNPN based on the first network selection.
さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択に基づいて、新しいSNPNを選択してもよいし、現在のSNPNから新しいSNPNに移動してもよいし、その両方を実施してもよい。さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択に基づいて、新しいSNPNが選択された状態に遷移してもよいし、現在のSNPNに登録された状態から新しいSNPNに登録された状態に遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may select a new SNPN based on the second network selection, move from the current SNPN to the new SNPN, or both. Furthermore, the UE may transition to the selected state of the new SNPN based on the second network selection, or may transition from the state registered in the current SNPN to the state registered in the new SNPN. good.
さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよいし、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移しなくてもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode or from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the second network selection. You don't have to.
具体的には、UEは、均等SNPN以外のSNPNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、均等SNPN以外のSNPNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。より詳細には、UEは、SNPNに登録されている場合、均等SNPN以外のSNPNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。さらに、UEは、SNPNアクセスモードで作動している場合、均等SNPN以外のSNPNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。
Specifically, the UE may transition to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN other than equal SNPN. In other words, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN other than equal SNPN. More specifically, when registered in the SNPN, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN other than equal SNPN. Further, when operating in the SNPN access mode, the UE may transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN other than equal SNPN.
さらに、UEは、均等SNPN以外のSNPNの選択に基づいて、3GPPアクセスの状態のみを、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may transition only the 3GPP access status from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN other than equal SNPN.
逆に、UEは、均等SNPNであるSNPNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移しなくてもよい。言い換えると、UEは、均等SNPNであるSNPNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移しなくてもよい。より詳細には、UEは、SNPNに登録されている場合、均等SNPNであるSNPNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移しなくてもよい。さらに、UEは、SNPNアクセスモードで作動している場合、均等SNPNであるSNPNの選択に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移しなくてもよい。
On the contrary, the UE does not have to transition to the 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of the SNPN which is the equal SNPN. In other words, the UE does not have to transition from 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of SNPN which is an even SNPN. More specifically, when registered in the SNPN, the UE does not have to transition from the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to the 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of the SNPN which is the equal SNPN. Further, when operating in the SNPN access mode, the UE does not have to transition from the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to the 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of the SNPN which is the equal SNPN.
尚、均等SNPN以外のSNPNの選択とは、登録SNPN対する均等SNPNではないSNPNが、新しいSNPNとして選択されることを示してもよい。さらに、均等SNPN以外のSNPNの選択とは、登録SNPN対する均等SNPNではないSNPNが新しいSNPNとして選択され、選択された新しいSNPNに、UEが入ることであってもよい。
Note that the selection of an SNPN other than the equal SNPN may indicate that the SNPN that is not the equal SNPN for the registered SNPN is selected as the new SNPN. Further, the selection of the SNPN other than the equal SNPN may mean that the SNPN that is not the equal SNPN to the registered SNPN is selected as the new SNPN, and the UE is included in the selected new SNPN.
さらに、均等SNPNであるSNPNの選択とは、均等SNPNのリストにあるSNPNが、新しいSNPNとして選択されることを示してもよい。さらに、均等SNPNであるSNPNの選択とは、均等SNPNのリストにあるSNPNが新しいSNPNとして選択され、選択された新しいSNPNに、UEが入ることであってもよい。言い換えると、均等SNPNであるSNPNの選択とは、均等SNPNのリストに含まれるSNPNが新しいSNPNとして選択され、選択された新しいSNPNに、UEが入ることであってもよい。
Further, the selection of the SNPN which is the equal SNPN may indicate that the SNPN in the list of equal SNPNs is selected as the new SNPN. Further, the selection of the SNPN which is the equal SNPN may mean that the SNPN in the list of equal SNPNs is selected as the new SNPN and the UE is included in the selected new SNPN. In other words, the selection of an SNPN that is an equal SNPN may mean that the SNPN contained in the list of equal SNPNs is selected as the new SNPN and the UE is included in the selected new SNPN.
さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク登録に基づいて、挙動Cを実施してもよいし、挙動Aを継続してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may carry out behavior C or continue behavior A based on the second network registration.
具体的には、UEは、均等SNPN以外のSNPNの登録に基づいて、挙動Cを実施してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、挙動Aを実施している場合、均等SNPN以外のSNPNの登録に基づいて、挙動Cを実施してもよい。
Specifically, the UE may perform behavior C based on the registration of SNPNs other than equal SNPNs. In other words, when performing behavior A, the UE may perform behavior C based on the registration of SNPNs other than equal SNPNs.
逆に、UEは、均等SNPNであるSNPNの登録に基づいて、挙動Aを継続してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、挙動Aを実施している場合、均等SNPNであるSNPNの登録に基づいて、挙動Aを継続してもよい。
On the contrary, the UE may continue the behavior A based on the registration of the SNPN which is the equal SNPN. In other words, if the UE is performing behavior A, it may continue behavior A based on the registration of the SNPN, which is an even SNPN.
ここで、挙動Aは、PDUセッション確立手続き中にある挙動Aと同様であってよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止を解除する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除されることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Here, behavior A may be the same as behavior A during the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, the behavior C may be a behavior that lifts the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. .. In addition, behavior C recognizes that the prohibition on starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is lifted. May be. In addition, behavior C is a behavior that sets the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 to be lifted. May be. Furthermore, behavior C is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set is lifted. May be.
さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可される挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可されることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きが開始されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Cは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Further, the behavior C may be a behavior that allows the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. Further, behavior C is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is allowed. You may. Further, behavior C is a behavior that is set to allow the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6. You may. Furthermore, even if behavior C is a behavior that sets a new PDU session establishment procedure to be started using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. good. Furthermore, behavior C is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure is permitted using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv6 is set. You may.
さらに、UEは、第2のネットワーク登録に基づいて、挙動Dを実施してもよいし、挙動Bを継続してもよい。
Furthermore, the UE may perform behavior D or continue behavior B based on the second network registration.
具体的には、UEは、均等SNPN以外のSNPNの登録に基づいて、挙動Dを実施してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、挙動Bを実施している場合、均等SNPN以外のSNPNの登録に基づいて、挙動Dを実施してもよい。
Specifically, the UE may perform behavior D based on the registration of SNPNs other than equal SNPNs. In other words, when performing behavior B, the UE may perform behavior D based on the registration of SNPNs other than equal SNPNs.
逆に、UEは、均等SNPNであるSNPNの登録に基づいて、挙動Bを継続してもよい。言い換えると、UEは、挙動Bを実施している場合、均等SNPNであるSNPNの登録に基づいて、挙動Bを継続してもよい。
On the contrary, the UE may continue the behavior B based on the registration of the SNPN which is the equal SNPN. In other words, if the UE is performing behavior B, it may continue behavior B based on the registration of the SNPN, which is an even SNPN.
ここで、挙動Bは、PDUセッション確立手続き中にある挙動Bと同様であってよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止を解除する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除されることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始の禁止が解除された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Here, behavior B may be the same as behavior B during the PDU session establishment procedure. Further, the behavior D may be a behavior that lifts the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. .. Furthermore, behavior D recognizes that the prohibition on starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is lifted. May be. Furthermore, behavior D is a behavior that sets the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set to be lifted. May be. Furthermore, behavior D is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the prohibition of starting a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is lifted. May be.
さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可される挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可されることを認識する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きが開始されるように設定する挙動であってもよい。さらに、挙動Dは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きの開始が許可された状態に遷移する挙動であってもよい。
Further, the behavior D may be a behavior that allows the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. Further, behavior D is a behavior that recognizes that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is allowed. You may. Further, behavior D is a behavior that is set so that the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set is permitted. You may. Further, even if the behavior D is a behavior that sets a new PDU session establishment procedure to be started using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. good. Furthermore, behavior D is a behavior that transitions to a state in which the start of a new PDU session establishment procedure is permitted using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type in which IPv4 is set. You may.
尚、均等SNPN以外のSNPNの登録とは、登録SNPN対する均等SNPNではない新しいSNPNに登録されることを示してもよい。さらに、均等SNPNであるSNPNの登録とは、均等SNPNのリストにある新しいSNPNに登録されることを示してもよい。
Note that the registration of an SNPN other than the equal SNPN may indicate that the SNPN is registered in a new SNPN that is not the equal SNPN with respect to the registered SNPN. Further, registration of an SNPN that is an equal SNPN may indicate that it is registered in a new SNPN in the list of equal SNPNs.
さらに、同じDNNとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きにて、送受信されたDNNと同じDNNであってよい。言い換えると、同じDNNとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きにて、第12の識別情報に含めて送受信されたDNNと同じDNNであってよいし、第22の識別情報に含めて送受信されたDNNと同じDNNであってもよい。さらに、同じS-NSSAIとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きにて、送受信されたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIであってよい。言い換えると、さらに、同じS-NSSAIとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きにて、第13の識別情報に含めて送受信されたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIであってよいし、第23の識別情報に含めて送受信されたS-NSSAIと同じS-NSSAIであってもよい。
Furthermore, the same DNN may be the same DNN as the sent / received DNN in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the same DNN may be the same DNN that was included in the 12th identification information and sent / received in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure, or may be included in the 22nd identification information and sent / received. It may be the same DNN as the DNN. Further, the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI transmitted / received in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the same S-NSSAI may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the 13th identification information in the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure, and the 23rd. It may be the same S-NSSAI as the S-NSSAI sent and received included in the identification information of.
ここで、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きとは別のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。言い換えると、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きの完了後に実施されるPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。さらに言い換えると、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、以前に実施したPDUセッション確立手続きの完了後に実施される、別のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
Here, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure different from the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be a PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure. In other words, the new PDU session establishment procedure may be another PDU session establishment procedure performed after the completion of the previously performed PDU session establishment procedure.
さらに、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。言い換えると、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv6が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、UE要求のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
In addition, the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv6 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type. In other words, a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv6 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv6. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
さらに、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。言い換えると、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプとを用いた、新たなPDUセッション確立手続きとは、同じDNN、及び/又は同じS-NSSAIと、IPv4が設定されたPDUセッションタイプに対する、UE要求のPDUセッション確立手続きであってよい。
In addition, the new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and the PDU session type configured with IPv4 is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. It may be a new PDU session establishment procedure for the configured PDU session type. In other words, a new PDU session establishment procedure using the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and an IPv4 configured PDU session type is the same DNN and / or the same S-NSSAI and IPv4. May be the procedure for establishing a PDU session for a UE request for the PDU session type for which is set.
さらに、PDUセッション確立手続きの要求が拒絶された場合、各装置は、PDUセッションを確立しなくてよい。この場合、各装置は、PDUセッション確立手続きの完了後に、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含まれる情報に基づいた処理を実施してもよいし、PDUセッション確立拒絶メッセージに含まれる情報に基づいた処理を実施することで、第4の手続きを完了してもよい。
Furthermore, if the request for the PDU session establishment procedure is rejected, each device does not have to establish the PDU session. In this case, after the completion of the PDU session establishment procedure, each device may perform processing based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment refusal message, or perform processing based on the information contained in the PDU session establishment refusal message. By implementing it, the fourth procedure may be completed.
[5. 変形例]
本発明に関わる装置で動作するプログラムは、本発明に関わる実施形態の機能を実現するように、Central Processing Unit(CPU)等を制御してコンピュータを機能させるプログラムであっても良い。プログラムあるいはプログラムによって取り扱われる情報は、一時的にRandom Access Memory(RAM)等の揮発性メモリあるいはフラッシュメモリ等の不揮発性メモリやHard Disk Drive(HDD)、あるいはその他の記憶装置システムに格納される。 [5. Modification example]
The program that operates on the apparatus according to the present invention may be a program that controls a Central Processing Unit (CPU) or the like to operate a computer so as to realize the functions of the embodiments according to the present invention. The program or the information handled by the program is temporarily stored in volatile memory such as Random Access Memory (RAM), non-volatile memory such as flash memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or other storage device system.
本発明に関わる装置で動作するプログラムは、本発明に関わる実施形態の機能を実現するように、Central Processing Unit(CPU)等を制御してコンピュータを機能させるプログラムであっても良い。プログラムあるいはプログラムによって取り扱われる情報は、一時的にRandom Access Memory(RAM)等の揮発性メモリあるいはフラッシュメモリ等の不揮発性メモリやHard Disk Drive(HDD)、あるいはその他の記憶装置システムに格納される。 [5. Modification example]
The program that operates on the apparatus according to the present invention may be a program that controls a Central Processing Unit (CPU) or the like to operate a computer so as to realize the functions of the embodiments according to the present invention. The program or the information handled by the program is temporarily stored in volatile memory such as Random Access Memory (RAM), non-volatile memory such as flash memory, Hard Disk Drive (HDD), or other storage device system.
尚、本発明に関わる実施形態の機能を実現する為のプログラムをコンピュータが読み取り可能な記録媒体に記録しても良い。この記録媒体に記録されたプログラムをコンピュータシステムに読み込ませ、実行する事によって実現しても良い。ここでいう「コンピュータシステム」とは、装置に内蔵されたコンピュータシステムであって、オペレーティングシステムや周辺機器等のハードウェアを含むものとする。また、「コンピュータが読み取り可能な記録媒体」とは、半導体記録媒体、光記録媒体、磁気記録媒体、短時間動的にプログラムを保持する媒体、あるいはコンピュータが読み取り可能なその他の記録媒体であっても良い。
Note that the program for realizing the function of the embodiment according to the present invention may be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. It may be realized by loading the program recorded on this recording medium into a computer system and executing it. The term "computer system" as used herein is a computer system built into a device and includes hardware such as an operating system and peripheral devices. Further, the "computer-readable recording medium" is a semiconductor recording medium, an optical recording medium, a magnetic recording medium, a medium that dynamically holds a program for a short time, or another recording medium that can be read by a computer. Is also good.
また、上述した実施形態に用いた装置の各機能ブロック、または諸特徴は、電気回路、たとえば、集積回路あるいは複数の集積回路で実装または実行され得る。本明細書で述べられた機能を実行するように設計された電気回路は、汎用用途プロセッサ、デジタルシグナルプロセッサ(DSP)、特定用途向け集積回路(ASIC)、フィールドプログラマブルゲートアレイ(FPGA)、またはその他のプログラマブル論理デバイス、ディスクリートゲートまたはトランジスタロジック、ディスクリートハードウェア部品、またはこれらを組み合わせたものを含んでよい。汎用用途プロセッサは、マイクロプロセッサでもよいし、従来型のプロセッサ、コントローラ、マイクロコントローラ、またはステートマシンであっても良い。前述した電気回路は、デジタル回路で構成されていてもよいし、アナログ回路で構成されていてもよい。また、半導体技術の進歩により現在の集積回路に代替する集積回路化の技術が出現した場合、本発明の一又は複数の態様は当該技術による新たな集積回路を用いる事も可能である。
Further, each functional block or various features of the device used in the above-described embodiment can be implemented or executed by an electric circuit, for example, an integrated circuit or a plurality of integrated circuits. Electrical circuits designed to perform the functions described herein can be general purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSPs), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), or others. Programmable Logic Devices, Discrete Gate or Transistor Logic, Discrete Hardware Components, or Combinations thereof. The general purpose processor may be a microprocessor, a conventional processor, a controller, a microcontroller, or a state machine. The electric circuit described above may be composed of a digital circuit or an analog circuit. Further, when an integrated circuit technology that replaces the current integrated circuit appears due to the progress of semiconductor technology, one or a plurality of aspects of the present invention can also use a new integrated circuit according to the technology.
なお、本願発明は上述の実施形態に限定されるものではない。実施形態では、装置の1例を記載したが、本願発明は、これに限定されるものではなく、屋内外に設置される据え置き型、または非可動型の電子機器、たとえば、AV機器、キッチン機器、掃除・洗濯機器、空調機器、オフィス機器、自動販売機、その他生活機器等の端末装置もしくは通信装置に適用出来る。
The invention of the present application is not limited to the above-described embodiment. In the embodiment, an example of the device has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the stationary or non-movable electronic device installed indoors or outdoors, for example, an AV device or a kitchen device. , Cleaning / washing equipment, air conditioning equipment, office equipment, vending machines, and other terminal devices or communication devices such as living equipment.
以上、この発明の実施形態に関して図面を参照して詳述してきたが、具体的な構成はこの実施形態に限られるものではなく、この発明の要旨を逸脱しない範囲の設計変更等も含まれる。また、本発明は、請求項に示した範囲で種々の変更が可能であり、異なる実施形態にそれぞれ開示された技術的手段を適宜組み合わせて得られる実施形態についても本発明の技術的範囲に含まれる。また、上記各実施形態に記載された要素であり、同様の効果を奏する要素同士を置換した構成も含まれる。
Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to this embodiment and includes design changes and the like within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Further, the present invention can be variously modified within the scope of the claims, and the technical scope of the present invention also includes embodiments obtained by appropriately combining the technical means disclosed in the different embodiments. Will be. Further, the elements described in each of the above-described embodiments are included, and a configuration in which elements having the same effect are replaced with each other is also included.
Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to this embodiment and includes design changes and the like within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Further, the present invention can be variously modified within the scope of the claims, and the technical scope of the present invention also includes embodiments obtained by appropriately combining the technical means disclosed in the different embodiments. Will be. Further, the elements described in each of the above-described embodiments are included, and a configuration in which elements having the same effect are replaced with each other is also included.
Claims (6)
- UE(User Equipment;端末装置)であって、
下位レイヤから、RRC(Radio Resource Control)コネクションがサスペンドされたことを示すインディケーションを受信する送受信部と、
前記インディケーションの受信に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED(5G Mobility Management CONNECTED) mode with RRC inactive indicationに遷移する制御部とを備え、
前記UEがSNPN(Stand-alone Non-Public Network)に登録されている場合、前記制御部は、PLMN(Public land mobile network)の選択に基づいて、前記5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから、5GMM-IDLE(5G Mobility Management IDLE) modeに遷移する、
ことを特徴とするUE。 UE (User Equipment)
From the lower layer, the transmitter / receiver that receives an indication indicating that the RRC (Radio Resource Control) connection has been suspended, and
It is equipped with a control unit that transitions to 5GMM-CONNECTED (5G Mobility Management CONNECTED) mode with RRC inactive indication based on the reception of the indication.
When the UE is registered in the SNPN (Stand-alone Non-Public Network), the control unit changes from the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM based on the selection of PLMN (Public land mobile network). -Transition to IDLE (5G Mobility Management IDLE) mode,
UE characterized by that. - 前記UEが前記SNPNに登録されている場合、前記制御部は、前記SNPNに対する均等SNPNではないSNPNの選択に基づいて、前記5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから、前記5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移する、
ことを特徴とする請求項1に記載のUE。 When the UE is registered in the SNPN, the control unit transitions from the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to the 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of an SNPN that is not an equal SNPN with respect to the SNPN. ,
The UE according to claim 1, wherein the UE is characterized in that. - 前記制御部は、前記UEが前記均等SNPNのリストに含まれる新しいSNPNに入った場合、前記5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationを維持する、
ことを特徴とする請求項2に記載のUE。 The control unit maintains the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication when the UE enters a new SNPN included in the list of equal SNPNs.
The UE according to claim 2, wherein the UE is characterized in that. - UE(User Equipment;端末装置)の通信制御方法であって、
下位レイヤから、RRC(Radio Resource Control)コネクションがサスペンドされたことを示すインディケーションを受信するステップと、
前記インディケーションの受信に基づいて、5GMM-CONNECTED(5G Mobility Management CONNECTED) mode with RRC inactive indicationに遷移するステップとを有し、
前記UEがSNPN(Stand-alone Non-Public Network)に登録されている場合、前記UEは、PLMN(Public land mobile network)の選択に基づいて、前記5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから、5GMM-IDLE(5G Mobility Management IDLE) modeに遷移する、
ことを特徴とするUEの通信制御方法。 It is a communication control method for UE (User Equipment).
A step that receives an indication from the lower layer that the RRC (Radio Resource Control) connection has been suspended, and
It has a step of transitioning to 5GMM-CONNECTED (5G Mobility Management CONNECTED) mode with RRC inactive indication based on the reception of the indication.
When the UE is registered in the SNPN (Stand-alone Non-Public Network), the UE changes from the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to 5GMM- based on the selection of PLMN (Public land mobile network). Transition to IDLE (5G Mobility Management IDLE) mode,
UE communication control method characterized by that. - 前記UEが前記SNPNに登録されている場合、前記UEは、前記SNPNに対する均等SNPNではないSNPNの選択に基づいて、前記5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationから、前記5GMM-IDLE modeに遷移する、
ことを特徴とする請求項4に記載のUEの通信制御方法。 When the UE is registered in the SNPN, the UE transitions from the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication to the 5GMM-IDLE mode based on the selection of an SNPN that is not an equal SNPN with respect to the SNPN.
The UE communication control method according to claim 4, wherein the UE communication is controlled. - 前記UEは、前記UEが前記均等SNPNのリストに含まれる新しいSNPNに入った場合、前記5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indicationを維持する、
ことを特徴とする請求項5に記載のUEの通信制御方法。
The UE maintains the 5GMM-CONNECTED mode with RRC inactive indication when the UE enters a new SNPN included in the list of equal SNPNs.
The UE communication control method according to claim 5.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2022524398A JPWO2021235271A1 (en) | 2020-05-21 | 2021-05-11 |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2020-088865 | 2020-05-21 | ||
JP2020088865 | 2020-05-21 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2021235271A1 true WO2021235271A1 (en) | 2021-11-25 |
Family
ID=78707835
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2021/017856 WO2021235271A1 (en) | 2020-05-21 | 2021-05-11 | User Equipment (UE) AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (1) | JPWO2021235271A1 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2021235271A1 (en) |
-
2021
- 2021-05-11 JP JP2022524398A patent/JPWO2021235271A1/ja active Pending
- 2021-05-11 WO PCT/JP2021/017856 patent/WO2021235271A1/en active Application Filing
Non-Patent Citations (1)
Title |
---|
ANONYMOUS: "3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Core Network and Terminals; Non-Access-Stratum (NAS) protocol for 5G System (5GS); Stage 3; (Release 16)", 3GPP STANDARD; TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION; 3GPP TS 24.501, vol. CT WG1, no. V16.4.1, 1 April 2020 (2020-04-01), pages 1 - 666, XP051861393 * |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JPWO2021235271A1 (en) | 2021-11-25 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP7283868B2 (en) | User device, control device, and communication control method | |
JP7283869B2 (en) | User device, control device, and communication control method | |
WO2020204092A1 (en) | User device, control device, and communication control method | |
JP6828000B2 (en) | UE, control device, UE communication control method and control device communication control method | |
WO2021015199A1 (en) | User equipment, device in core network, and communication control method | |
WO2020218537A1 (en) | Ue and control device within core network | |
WO2020100719A1 (en) | User device, control device, and communication control method | |
WO2021015200A1 (en) | User device, intra-core network device, and communication control method | |
JP2019205001A (en) | User device, control device, and communication control method | |
WO2021060383A1 (en) | User device and core network device | |
WO2022071198A1 (en) | User Equipment (UE) AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD | |
WO2021085615A1 (en) | User equipment (ue) and communication control method | |
WO2021193937A1 (en) | Ue (user equipment) | |
JP6859306B2 (en) | UE, control device and communication control method | |
WO2022071197A1 (en) | User Equipment (UE) AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD | |
WO2022138730A1 (en) | User equipment (ue) | |
WO2021029380A1 (en) | User equipment | |
JP7251936B2 (en) | User device, control device, and communication control method | |
WO2021235271A1 (en) | User Equipment (UE) AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD | |
WO2021235270A1 (en) | User Equipment (UE) AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD | |
WO2021235262A1 (en) | User equipment (ue) and communication control method | |
WO2021235221A1 (en) | User equipment (ue) and communication control method | |
WO2022071199A1 (en) | User Equipment (UE) AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD | |
WO2022107778A1 (en) | User equipment (ue) and communication control method | |
WO2022107779A1 (en) | User equipment (ue) and communication control method |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 21807550 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2022524398 Country of ref document: JP Kind code of ref document: A |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 21807550 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |